'
.1 i.
<
PRINCIPAL
\V. R. TAYLOR
COLLECTION
1951
THOD GASPEY-OTTOSAUER.
ARABIC GRAMMAR
OF THE WRITTEN LANGUAGE
BY
REV. G! w! THATCHER, M. A., A. D.
WARDEN OF CAMDEN COLLEGE, SYDNEY, NEW SOUTH WALES, AUSTRALIA.
FORMERLY SENIOR TUTOR, MANSFIELD COLLEGE, OXFORD.
522125
LONDON.
DAVID MUTT, 57-59 Long Acre, W. C. DULAU & CO., 37 Soho Sqnare, W.
SAMPSON LOW, MARSTON & CO., 100 Southwark Street, S. E.
NEW YORK: BRENT ANO'S, Fifth Avenue and 27th Street.
DYRSEN & PFEIFFER (CHRISTERN'S), 16 West 83rd Street.
THE INTERNATIONAL NEWS COMPANY, 83 and 85 Dnane Street.
G. E. STECHERT A CO., 161 155 West 25th Street.
E. STEIGER & CO., 25 Park Place.
BOSTON: BITTER & FLEBBE, formerly C. A. KXEHLER & CO., 120Boylston Street.
HEIDELBERG.
JULIUS GROOS.
1911.
PJ
H3.2
Rll
The Gaspey Otto - Sauer Method has become my sole property by
right of purchase. These books are continually revised. All rights,
especially those of adaptation and translation into any language, are
reserved. Imitations and copies are forbidden by law. Suitable
communications always thankfully received.
Heidelberg. Julius Oroos.
Ill
Preface.
During the last ten years of my teaching of Arabic
I have often found that my pupils had received much
help from Harder's Arabic Grammar 1 , and have been
asked whether there was a similar work in English.
When 1 was asked by the firm of Julius Groos to write
such a work using Harder to any extent, I gladly
consented, and trust this Grammar may be useful to
many students of Arabic, who cannot read German.
The present work is a grammar of Arabic as it
has been and is written. The spoken language varies
in Arabia, Egypt, Syria, Morocco etc. but the written
language is the same for all; the chief difference
between the modern and ancient literature consisting
in the introduction of new words to meet the require-
ments of advanced knowledge.
Each lesson should be thoroughly mastered before
the next is studied. Each exercise should be carefully
worked and compared with the key.
In the supplement only a few extracts from older
books are given, as the Koran and other works of this
class can easily be obtained. Special attention is given
on the other hand to selection from modern novels,
journals and correspondence.
To those who wish to study the grammar of the
classical Arabic further I would recommend the last
1 Arabische Konversations-Grammatik mit besonderer Be-
riicksichtigung der Schrifteprache von Ernst Harder. Heidelberg,
Julius Groos, 1898.
IV Preface.
edition of Wright's Arabic Grammar published by the
Cambridge University Press.
The various styles of Arabic handwriting may be
studied in the Specimens d'ecritures Arabes (with key)
published at the Imprirnerie Catholique in Beyrouth.
A handy guide to Arabic literature is M. C. Stuart's
"Arabic Literature" London 1903.
Sydney (New South Wales), September 1910.
G. W. Thatcher.
Table of Contents.
Pages
Preface Ill
Introduction 1
Alphabet 1 . Pronunciation 4. Classification of Letters 4.
Vowels 5. Nunation 7. Sukun 8. Tashdld 8. Harnza 9.
Madda 13. Syllable 14. Accent 15. Numerals 15.
Abbreviations 16.
Exercises in reading 17
First Part.
Lesson 1. Article . 23
2. Feminine. Collectives /. 25
3. Number S . . 29
, 'J*y3*ev1 /^ &<*'
4. Broken Plural S., . . .
5. Broken Plural /:. . ., 36
6. Declension. Genitive s.* 40
7. Genitive (continued) ^" 44
8. Pronominal Suffixes /. 49
9. Demonstrative Pronouns /M 53
10. Adjectives ** 57
11. Verb-^ _^ 61
12. Verb with suffixes ^>{. '67
13. Imperfect 71
14. Moods of Imperfect 76
15. Jussive/^T 80
16. Imperative. Present Participle. Verbal Noun . 84
i & c iS
17. Passive. Particles . , i and . .
VI
Table of Contents.
Pages
Lesson 18. Derived Forms of Verb 94
19. II. III. and IV. Forms 100
20. V. and VI. Forms 107
21. VH. and VIII. Forms Ill
22. IX. and X. Forms 116
23. Classification of Verbs. Doubled Verbs ... 121
> 24. Hamzated Verbs ...:...:... 12$
25. Hamzated Verbs 136
26. Weak Verbs. A. Assimilated verbs .... 143
27. Weak Verbs. B. Hollow verbs . . . . . . 151
28. Weak Verbs. C. Defective verbs 167
29. Doubly Weak Verbs .184
30. Quadriliteral Verbs. Verbs of wonder. Optative.
o_ ^ o ^ o ^ .. - ^ *. ~
The verbs (j*-J , ,**j , ^j , ^^s. , fy , o(e ,
-- ^ ^ 5 .. - - ~_
J6 ; plo , Jsi , Olb , o ^ and its sisters . . 193
31. Relative sentences 202
32. Numerals. Dates. Age 210
33. Numerals (Ordinals) 225
Second Part.
Lesson 34. Noun 233
35. Nouns of Place and Time, Instrument, Dimi-
nutive . . . , . . 240
36. Relative Adjective. Adjectives 244
37. Proper names 249
38. Feminine 251
39. Number. Broken Plurals 256
40. Broken Plurals (continued) 268
41. Declension of Noun 274
42. Use of Cases. Emphasis. Permutative . . 278
43. Pronouns .287
44. Prepositions 290
45. Adverbs 305
Table of Contents. VII
Pages
Lesson 46. Conjunctions 313
47. Conditional sentences <yjyy w ? 821-
48. Interjections 307
49. Arabic Verse 330
Supplement 345
Arabic-English Vocabulary 331
English-Arabic Vocabulary 437
Arabic Index 449
English Index 450
^/IffU^y-
Introduction,
1.
Arabic characters are written from right to left.
The alphabet (sLfu? hija) consists of 28 characters
harf, plur. o.^ huruf), which all represent con-
sonants. Most of these letters are written in slightly
different forms according to whether they 1. stand
alone or 2. are joined to a preceding letter or 3. are
joined to a preceding and a following letter or 4. are
joined to a following letter only.
Names of the
letters.
Standing
alone.
Joined to
A#' -
scription.;'
preceding
letter.
preceding
and
following
letters.
following
letter
only.
v
I
7
_jjf alif 1
t
L
i
a
gb ba
v
Sf*
1
J
b
sli- ta
^
X
j
t
sl3 tha
,
^
X
j
th , #- f *'i*+fl
i
Q
1 . ....
p&>> jim ^
'
J r~*~l&
,^ ha
Ml
i
h
C
- .-J> kha
?
^
^
~> kh\ -< ^-^^
o .
C
^^x**^ ^^
Olo dal h>. J
^
d
3i3 dhal i
3
j,
dh *t(r^
9|^ ra
j
.
i
r
Arabic Grammar. 1
Introduction.
Names of the
letters.
Standing
alone.
Jonied to
Tran-
scription.
preceding
letter.
preceding
and
following
letters.
following
letter
only.
o .,
1^5 fj zai
.
.
Z
J
J
6
V# sin
i-
LT
4*
A*
S
i^tJb shin
A
.-.
..
...
sh
H"-
o : uo sad
s ^
u-
Aa
A3
s
.,
o L**
o'uto clad
US
' U* 2
A^
*9
cl<U,
9wb ta
/
J3
la
ID
t
^ 5^3 za
\n
Ja
^
b
Z^tK
^.^ c ain
" t
E
X
-
J
c
C^ ghain
t
*
^
gh
oi3 fa
1 ^
^
ft
5
f
9 .
o'Ji qaf
(J
fi
5
q
v!? : jr kaf
3 &
w^
<^=L
* =>
k
^ lam
\ J
l_s
X
5
i
6
*.yo mini
*
A.
4.
X
m
'j
OJ J nun
_,\ o
a
X
3
n
gup ha
s
\
^
h
6 ^
2 waw
w
3
?
5'u ya
(^'
L^
" 1
j
y
1. The letter t (alif) has no sound of its own but
is used merely a) as a support for hamza under certain con-
ditions (see 10), or b) to lengthen a preceding a vowel (see 6)
Introduction. * 3
or c) at the end of 3^ plur. of verbs (see 6, Note 4). The
first real consonant of the Arabic alphabet is s- (see 3 and 10).
Note 2. When the letter ta is used as the feminine ending
of nouns or adjectives it is written as ha () with two dots (*) and
*
is called *-kj-?-* 9li' t& marbuta, the ordinary ta being called
Sbi tft tawlla. This ta of the fenain]liejBdingj8_not pro-
-y| ^ >|^ *
A raj^-except whcn^Jollowed bv^ft^word ( ^.-,
beginning with_a_vow^L-8auiuJ. The modern usage is observed *
in the technical terms of this book e.g. hamza for %j&; hamzat
al-wasl for
Note 3. In NW. Africa f is written v_? and q vj.
Note 4. The following letters are sometimes used in^
foreign words: ^ = p; = ch (as in church), O = v. 9- ^-
The six letters I o 3 ^ j 3 can only be joined
to preceding not to following letters. These are called
^Laill J^y>, liuruf munfasila i.e. separate letters; the
others are called jUUb&i ^3 ; y> huruf muttasila i.e.
united letters.
Among ordinary combinations of letters in writing
are the following: eh t *f i}***-* ^ ;$ {*<*<** 6y **>+*&-*
rt ^5 * (
^i ba-ha ^^ ha-jim-jim ^ or ^ (joined to preceding
letter ^ lam-alif
,3 ba-ya
ss* sin-ha
^ lam-ha
? ta-ha
^? sad-ha
I lam-mim
ta-ya
^ c ain-jim
^ mim-ha
^ jim-ha
s2 fa-ha
i mim-mirn
^ ha-jim
v5 fa-ya
^ nun-ha
J. nun-ya
&? ya-ha
ha-mim ^ ya-mim.
Introduction.
(-r?reycAd-n<;e of >c '"-' or "* nfs '" order / m^ }<Gi f"t-d
eb. Israel -. -$s-x<.<V> (f*r*&-U) o o
&*to*"eY 3ikrA-n '{}** ****+**) O '
^"^Pronunciation of the Consonants.
The following letters are pronounced like their
English equivalents:
ba = b. o ta = t. ^ tha = th as in think.
jim = j. o dal d. o dhal = dh = th as in
this. J ra = r. j zai = z. ^ sin = s as in so.
ij> shin = sh as in shot, o fa = f. ^ kaf = k.
j lam = 1. f mlm = m. o nun = n. ha = h.
3 waw = w. ^ ya = y. ( 3 and ^5 are also used
to lengthen a preceding u or i vowel see 6).
The following represent sounds foreign to English:
s. hamza is a click produced by a quick com-
pression of the upper part of the throat.
_ ha is an h pronounced with a strong expulsion
of air from the chest.
4, kha is a guttural ch as in the Scotch "loch"
but more from the throat.
<jo sad, {jo dad, _b ta and Jb za form a group of
emphatic sounds corresponding with ^ s, o d, o t
and z distinguished from them by the tongue being
placed against the palate instead of against the teeth.
e" c ain is a very strong guttural produced by com-
pression of the throat and expulsion of the breath.
1 ghain has a hard sound between a snarling
pronunciation of gh and r.
v qaf is a k sound produced in the throat, (like
the cawing of a crow).
4.
Classification of the Letters.
1. Arabian grammarians divide the letters of the
alphabet (^^ztf vJp- huruf alhija') into a) those
Introduction. 5
which are dotted (x*^> ^-\p- hurnf raujama) and
b) those which are not dotted (xJU^ ^ > j> hurnf
muhmala).
2. More practical is the division into a) Sun
y 5* o * *o j .> ^^S
letters (x^M^&Jf ^57^^ alhuruf ashshamslya) namely
o c^> O o / wv / & ( \o (jto *l^p J> ^ . which
assimilate the 1 of the Article, and b) Moon letters
(Xj4JiJ{ o^-Jh alhuruf alqamariya), comprising the other
letters of the alphabet, which do not assimilate the 1
(see Lesson 1).
3. The letters i alif, ^ waw and ^ ya are called Weak
% 0-0 ) J )
letters (*Jl*Ji v.J 3 ^> huruf al'llla) because they are often
interchanged or dropped under the influence of other
letters. Contrasted with these, the other letters of the
.
alphabet are called Sound letters (x^^UsJI ^^ alhuruf
assahiha).
-
Vowels -- 1 Mf a ^ >>xy
*
Every consonant in a vocalised Arabic text is
provided with a vowel sign or with a sign indicating
the absence of a vowel. fom^f^ t tfr * f
O o . 9 . o
The vowel signs (jXfc shakl, Plur. 31X&I ashkal or
O- 3 y
Oj&fc shukul) are three in number:
1. ix^Cs fatha, a small diagonal stroke over a con-
sonant = a as in o da. ( IL $>**^/* J*?' -^^fc*
2. ii.^ kasra a small diagonal stroke under a con-
S M . ftfyfyrnc. *t.Aa.4 k j. fl-rHf *~rtH*n ~ ^' t
sonant = i as in o di. /**>** ****
s *t~~ l<ictu ^s
damma, a small 3 above a consonant
u as in o du.
-
6 Introduction.
The sign indicating the absence of a vowel is -
written above a consonant. It is called QjX* sukun
kuu.
Note 1. The three vowel signs above do not actually
represent all the vowel sounds used in pronunciation for while
fatha preserves the a sound after _, ~, c ? , it inclines to
the sound of au in "taught" after the Emphatic letters (jo, (jto,
0, + and is usually thinned down to the^soujud of e after
6 o *
the other letters as in >~*Jj kelbun.
Note 2. In Arabic a vowel is called a "movement" (*^j^>
V"-
haraka) and so a consonant is either "moved" (U$^*A mutaharrik)
i.e. provided with a vowel, or "resting" (QI^ sakin) i.e. without
vowel.
6.
Long Vowels and Diphthongs.
The long vowels a, I, ti are expressed in Arabic
by the signs ^ _ JL followed by t, ^5,3 (written
O 6
"without sukQn), thus JU> malun "wealth", (j^/ klsun
"a purse", J^L tulun "length".
The diphthongs ai and au (now generally pronounced
o o O o *
as English a and o) are written ^ and 3 __ as
GO^
baitun u a house", ^ khaufun "fear".
Note 1. In a few words^ is expressed by a short vertical
i ' !
stroke over a consonant as in i^X^ hadha "this", ^i5OO dhalika
"that", CI lakin "but", f| allahu "God" etc.
Note 2. At the end of a word a is often expressed by
-
" followed by ^5 (without dots or sukun), thus A^ rama "he
Introduction. 7
threw", J.J. ila "unto". As soon as this ^5 ceases to be final
' * *
it returns to the form I e.g. Lc^ raraahu "he threw him".
-CM> , > 9 f.
The Arabian grammarians call this ^j; the *Lot
alif bisurat alya' "alif in the form of ya". The sign for a at
3, jo. 92
the end of a word (whether I or ^5) is called ^_^aiU ^Ju\
Lalif maqsQTa_ "alif that can be shortened" because it is short-
ened wnen followed by a word beginning with hamzat alwasl
(see 11).
Note 3. In a few words^efltlTng in at an older form of
writing them with j or Xj occurs. These are '>*> or
G.. G..G.. G ,.
hayatun "life", B_^Lo or sblo salatun "prayer", ^ or
>j zakatun "alms", '*J.j or aijjJ tauratun "Torah" (the
Mosaic Law). ( ***** - ^^ 0^^*%* <M>^ > ^-^ ^-^tw ^^t.^^c
n*(a i w*i. /uxfl u><yr^ ^ (3) "jr. UHt^ft^t/^4. fr**? o*4j| t^a t4 -
Note 4. An I is written but not pronounced after the
J^ -
with which some verbal forms end e.g. i y*^ katabii "they
wrote" U>J, ramau "they threw". The | is also not pronounced
G.
in the word xiU mi'atun "hundred".
7.
Nunation.
At the end of nouns and adjectives, when indefinite,
the three vowel signs are sometimes written double,
thus __, _ , ._!_ and are then pronounced ?m, in, an.
s
G o -
This is the so-called Nunation (j^* tanwln). The
sign for an has \ as well, except after s e.g. LL
baban, X^-Jl^> khalifatan.
When however <7 is a contraction for ayun we
find it written JL. as ^cjj? hudan (for hudayun); as
8 Introduction.
a contraction for awun it is written ^5 or f_l_ as
r i-Aoe c asan (for 'asawun).
8.
Sukun or Jazma.
The absence of a vowel after a consonant is indi-
6 > 3 O ^ o .,
cated by the sign _JL called yC* sukun or &>- jazma
e.g. Jo3 qatlun "a killing", ^^^ katabat "she wrote".
The letters ^ and ^5 take sukun when they form
diphthongs, but not when they only lengthen vowels
(see 6).
For the omission of sukun with the lam of the
article see 9.
6
A vowelless consonant is said to be ^L* sakin
"resting" ( b, note 2).
9.
Tashdid.
When a consonant occurs twice without a vowel
sound between, it is written once only and the sign
O o ..
i-L (called jcj^xfci* tashdld) is placed over it e.g.
rnarra "he passed by", J U marrun "passing by". The
consonantal sound however must be distinctly pro-
nounced twice.
Tashdld often indicates assimilation. Thus the j
O .
.of the Article jf al is assimilated when the word to
which it is prefixed begins with a Sun letter (see 4).
The j is retained in writing but without sukun; and
O o -
shdld is written over the following letter e.g. (J *+
> o 5; &
shamsun "sun" becomes with the Article , v^.^xJl ash-
shamsu "the sun"; J^ rajulun "a man" becomes
arrajulu "the man".
Introduction. c ( 9 &
w * r tf
Q>) Again the o of the words *^f 'an "that", ^ min .
and ^ c an "from" is assimilated to the J and * of ^ '
lil "not", U ma "what" and ^ man "who, whom" in i^u
t ~~ 3 . '-'
^1 alia = an-la, "that not", I** mimma and 'ux, 'amma
o A o * ^
"from what", rr ^o rnimman and,.^^^ c amman "from him
who": so also \ 'ilia = 'in-la "if not".
(c) Sometimes the letters o, cy, o, 3, u^ Ja 9 Ja
assimilated to a following o. {0u4: *]>> lo-rfjht- ie .%
Here also the letter assimilated is left in the writing
but without sukun, while a tashdld is written over the
9 ~S , ~
o e.g. cxv,? aratta = arad-ta, ^>aJ labittu = labith-tu.
Hamza.
Hamza -*_. (BJ^P cf. 1, Note 1 and 3) is of
two kinds 1. ^1 8j* hamzat alqat r , which cannot
be dropped and 2. J^ojjt 1^P hamzat alwasl, which
is omitted under some circumstances (see 11).
It is generally written flhnv.fi (wrfo * and ' ) or
under (with ) one of the letters I, 3 , ^ but sometimes
independently. The following are the rules for writing it:
I. At the beginning of a word it is always written
with I e.g. *[ 5 amrun, H^t 'ibratun, ..61 'udhnun.
if. In the mkllo oi'a w.M:
a) Preceded by _1_ a and 1. followed by a or
.sukun it is written above I e.g. JU. sa'ala, ^^ ra'sun;
2. followed by it is written above ,$ e.g.
ya'isa; 3. followed by _i_ u it is written above e.g.
- $> *
(j*^j ba'usa.
10 Introduction.
b) Preceded by _ i it is written above ^5 e.g.
Go
1 bi run.
c) Preceded by _i_ u it is written above 3 when
followed by a or u, above ^ when followed by i, e.g.
y * >
l yu'allifu, J^L* su'ila,
d) Precedfid-Jby. sukun it is written above I when
followed by JL, over ^ when followed by u, over ^
) o * J v-o ,*.
when followed by _ e.g., jlwj yas'alu, ^^u yab'usu.
e) If hamza is preceded by I or 3 of the long
vowel, it is written a little above the line without any
^ ^ ., O j o ^
bearer e.g. ^zL^> tasa'ala, '^^ maqru'atun ; if preceded
by the ^ of long I, it is written above the stroke that
f J
joins the ^5 to the following letter e.g. *_xk~> khatfatun.
Wfa AtfWva*** -p *&
III. At the end of a word:
a) It is not affected by the vowel that follows it,
but is written over 1 after , over ^ after _j!_, over ^
after _ e.g. \ qara'a, iyb yaqra'u, _j.jo danu'a,
khati ' a: ^^^
b) After sukun it has no bearer e.g. %j*o dau'un,
o ^
*.c& shai'un. | With the ending an the hamza is written
over the stroke connecting the previous letter with
the I e.g. ii shai'an; if however the preceding letter
cannot be connected the i is omitted and the hamza
O )
written without bearer e.g. z-.s* juz an.
Hamzat alwal.
1. In some cases the hamza at the beginning of
a word is no essential part of its form, but seems to
Introduction.
be written only to prevent a syllable from beginnii
with a vowel. In such cases, when it follows anotii* i
word, the hamza is dropped with its vowel, a sign called
9- o -
wasla _ - fcJLoj) is put in place of the hamza and the
two words are read as one. If the preceding word
does not end in a vowel, then one is given to it in
accordance' with the rules below (4). The Hamza in these
cases is called JwojJl gj+9 hamzat alwasl. The J, though
preserved in the writing, is not pronounced, neither
has the wasla any effect on the pronunciation.
Examples: ^oUJi Js^& e abdu 'Iqadiri; o^JI^ wa'n-
sarafa (from vjjxajt^), ^^i ^T oo^ ra'aitu 5 bna 'lamlri.
2. The hamza is hamzat alwasl: \c**4*JL /s
a) In the Article 3? al e.g. ^olsll JJI c abdu 'Iqadiri.
b) In the Imperative of the I form of the Verb
(Lesson 16) e.g. vlotfT vUii qultu 5 ktub "I said: write".
c) In the Perfect, Imperative and Verbal noun of
the VII, VIII, IX and X forms of the verb (Less. 18)
^ ^ * 0^3.
e.g. *j46 fa'nhazama.
d) In the following eight words:
j ^[ ibnun "son", ittm) S-o jimra'un or ^[ im-
G , 3 ^ I ru'un "man".
i^a[ ibnatun "daughter". 0;r ^
Bl-xs! imra'atun "woman".
-? fithnani "two"/^^) "
cM 1 (Masc.). ^ ismun
(ithanatani "two"
{ (Fern.). o^t istun "buttock".
3. If the word preceding a hamzat alwasl does
not end in a vowel, then the final consonant generally
Introduction.
.ceives a kasra , e.g. o^oJi sXi qadi 'nsarafa "he
has already gone away". The nunation also takes
after it.
o
Exceptions. The Preposition ^ min "from" takes
_L before the. Article as jJJJi Q-, rniria 'Iwaladi "from
the boy"; in other cases it takes the usual e.g.
aJoi ( - r mini 'bnihi "from his son".
oj o y o>os
The Personal pronouns j? hum, ^ kum and ^6|
O )
antum, the ending *j* turn of the 2 nd Pers. Plur. Perf.
of the verb and the Preposition j^> mudh (= j^n
mundhu) "since" take _i_ u before the hamzat alwasl
e.g. AJJ! i>otJ la'anahumu 'llahu "May God curse them";
SJJj? ^Tj ra'aitumu 'Iwalada "You have seen the boy".
If the word preceding the hamza ends with i ? ^
or ^5 which lengthen the vowels before them, then
' although the writing is not altered, the vowel must be
^ ^ C^O ) C
pronounced short (see 13, 3) e.g. jJ^J I _^\ abii 'Iwaladi,
i fi 'ddari.
o o
If however the word ends in ^5- or 3, then
the ^5 takes _ and the 3 takes _i_ in place of the
--O^> ^ O ^
sukun e.g. ^U! ^^^ ^ ft c ainayi 'Imaliki "in the eyes
of the king" jf _^ak>i rnustafawu 'llahi "the chosen
ones of God". '
-
The conjunctions ^J lau "if" and ^\ au "or" follow
the general rule and take _ after the 3 .
4. The hamzat alwasl foils out of the writing as
well as the pronunciation:
Introduction.
a) In the expression ti\ ^ bismi'llahi (for
"In the name of God".
O o i * **
b) In the word ^ ibnun "son when ]
between the name of the son and that of ^ fatte^
(and not at the beginning of a line) e.g. yliS-i ^ ***
'umaru 'bnu 'Ikhaftab "Omar the son of Alkhattab".
o ^ j o-* 9 *
If the Ji! is predicative the \ is preserved e.g. 3 -^ ^1 ^
dT-z
zaiduni'bnu 'amrin "Zaid is the son of Amr".
c) In the Article 31 al,_Jf_preceded by the Pre-
position J liJHo^for" ^oTjhe^tren^thenin^ Particle^
la "verily^ e.g. j4-/ lirrajuli "to the man" : oJ^i
lilwaladi "to the boy", J^i : lalhaqqu "verily the truth".
If the noun begins with & jb en the ^ of tbe Ar t icle
falls out also e.g. idU (for x5u2j) lillailati "for th 6j m|
Similarly from 2f allah "God" is formed JJ lillahi
u to God".
d) The i of the hamzat alwasl may drop out, when
preceded by the Interrogative particlej_e.g. ^1 abnuka
(for uSdln) "thy son"?
12.
Madda.
If a hamza with fatha (a) is followed by a voweliess
alif then the hamza and vowel are dropped and one
alif only is written, while above this is written a
_ called Sli madda (really the second alif written
horizontally above) which is pronounced a, e.g
Introduction.
*minun (for ^jf), ^ (for |p ra'ahu, ^^ qur'anun
(for *,$.
Note. In many books the usual I which lengthens the
_JL vowel, is provided with this sign, when it precedes hamza
e.g. i j& sahra'u "desert".
13.
The Syllable.
1. There are two kinds of syllable:
a) Open, consisting of a consonant and a short
vowel e.g. v^Jtf' ka-ta-ba.
b) Closed, consisting of a consonant, short vowel
and vowelless consonant e.g. the 2 nd and 3 rd syllables
O 3 O ., -
in ,w^cf ka-tab-tum.
Syllables consisting of a consonant and a long
vowel are considered closed since the letters \ ^ ^
are considered vowelless consonants e.g. ^fo da-rl.
A consonant followed by the nunation is also
considered as closed (as if the n were written) e.g.
o ..
; fo da-run.
2. No syllable can begin with a vowelless consonant.
If such a case arises from inflection in Arabic words,
a hamzat alwasl with I is prefixed e.g. wOtfl 'uktub
"write" (for ^jS ktub). In writing foreign words an
O ^O^O ^^ O ., 3 3 ^o
unchangeable bamza (jlafiJI H;^) is prefixed e.g. ^jI^LM
aflatunu "Plato", or the first consonant is provided with
* o +*
a vowel e.g. L*o.j faransa (for fransa) "France".
CJL
Introduction.
3. No syllable can close with two vowelless c,
sonants. If such a case arises from inflection, the
one letter falls out e.g. J^S qul becomes jj qttl "say",
(cf. also 6, Note 2 and 11, 3).
The only exception to this rule is in the case of
words in which these letters I, ^ ^ lengthening a
2,
vowel are followed by a doubled consonant e.g. ^13 >
Go- G ,
farrun. for 'j from . .1$ farirun.
14.
Accent.
1. In words of more than one syllable the accent
is never on the last.
2. If the last syllable but one is closed, it receives
the accent e.g. J15 qala, ^sLt yaqulu, ^ ^>^> khayyatuna,
U*4X>>t ijtama'na, fS\j^\ akhbarnakum.
3. In words of three syllables, if the last but one
is open, the accent falls on the last but two e.g. vjjtf
kataba. In words of four or more syllables the accent
is carried back until it meets with a closed syllable
O- - o - ~s./- O^ ^ >
e.g. sjj-ixx rndshwaratun, ! uc*-c^' tajannabata, y ; v <*
mukatabatun.
15.
Numerals.
1. In former times (and occasionally still in some
artificial forms of literature) the letters of the alphabet
are used to indicate numerals. In this case the order
of the letters is that of the old Semitic alphabet, followed
by the letters peculiar to the Arabic alphabet. This
alphabet is called Js^.^i vJj^- huriif aFabjad.
Introduction.
1.
1
20.
^
200.
2.
LJ
30.
J
300.
3.
40.
r
400.
4.
^
50.
a
500.
5.
60.
LT-
600.
6.
*
70.
&
700.
7.
J
80.
US
800.
8.
^
90.
(JO
900.
9.
jb
100.
V
1000.
U
10.
L5
TL
tis order
is given in
the following
line:
O
but that used in NW. Africa differs slightly from this.
2. The numerals in general use now are:
i P r f o i v A i
12 34567890
These are read from left to right e.g. | A 1v 1897.
16.
Abbreviations.
A stroke resembling a madda is generally (though
not always) put above abbreviations e.g. ^Ji for .3>f ^t
ila akbirihi "and so forth" (literally "to its end").
The following abbreviations are in common use after
*-* ~M * * O^^Jw^JS
the names of certain persons: ^o =
salla ; llahu c alaihi wasallama "God bless him and give
him peace" used after the name of Mohammed.
*c = -bwJl \& c alaihi 'ssalamu "Upon him be
peace' 1 used after the names of other prophets.
Introduction.
**, = joe *tii ^J radiya 'llahu <anhu "May Go
be pleased with him" used after the names of the
Companions of Mohammed.
~j = *JJ( x^ rahimahu 'llahu "May God have
compassion on him" used after the names of the dead.
Exercises in reading.
I.
. *' J G -
tib kul qum hamun qul bal abun wa li ta bi
* L/ r vi ^ 3^ li ^ ^j u 5 ^
yadun kai dum fi nam dhu khudh 'an lam ma la sir
8
kullun dalla tibbun madda lubbun wai
II.
farahun qatlun shariba hasuna fariha qatala kataba
ibilun hablun darbun khafa tala husnun hasanun
C * - G , - G o. 6 o ,
ra'sun khifti qumta mautun jarun baitun filun nurun
Oo,
jara akala bikrin nahrin bahrin bukhlun zahrin
Arabic Gro.mninr.
Introduction.
III.
G s o.. ..oJ G G ^ j o .. ., o ^^,
* -^ '
haribun nafsan qulna katibun kitabun katabtu katabat
o.>o^^ G^2 Ow^ ^^ ^ j o J o .,
katabtum asasun fattish fattasha aqtulu tadribu jaktubu
* } o + o > t o 3 y > * ) > o - ->-- ^o-
i^j.xXvo ,.5CJljLw ioLx^' r'j^ L?^*^ lx>o
maktubun shughlukum kitabuhu takbruju ba'atbu farihna
J^O^ OJ^ ^ .>..G^ G-^^ s ^ G^O
l^aJLx^' (*^Sjj^ C)^*" 1 ' O^J^ Lv^JL> 7^**
takbtalifu tarlqukum ta'banu saratanun jalisan miftahun
^ * ^ * oa^o o^o, s ^o^-o O^o
^),IXj o_4^>i *^cX^?.i U4JC>! ^_3^U>t
s /&." 1 fi ^ ^
tadaraka ihniarrat ittakhadhtuin ijtama'na ikhtilafun
* , * G ^ G ^ O, Jw^-- O^^^o
^ J.[ JV>| J^| ^j^/a ^JOj u^j^[
e ala ila akbidun akilun mu'minun tatadhakkaru idtarabat
)~s.y 6^ - j o^o 6 ^o o >
OJ&J* HJ^.!^ cU^U,| (j^l^^ ^j*
mu'allifuna mu'akhadatun istahliflm isti'nasun musa
Ujti :
IV. ta'iifan
^ fb-.3*y^,^ ^ <j.
o
1o -^9 XAMl
Introduction.
r i -o. g
O^ O*
o?
^ KSJ o^Ls
* SO O.O - O J&-0 J * O ., 60 -
cr
* ' /' ', J
O ^ Oo - w > ^ S - Ow0- ,*.." VK.I ^"^tjl
S - LT ^^**" r
O
JOCf iljl OA
ft
obij it
^ I -wJ O^^ w*
^JjJ -v, JO. J^JI
4
c jtJJt o^: x^j'wxXt b&JJ)
2*
Introduction.
Loi
-X- Transcription and Translation.
alqutru 'Imisrlyu yukauwinu 'zzawiyata
The land the Egyptian forms the angle
'shshamallyata 'shsharqlyata min afrlqiyatin wayuqalu
the northern the eastern of Africa and it is
lahu aidan wadi'nnlli li'anna qismahu
called also the valley of the Nile because its part
'Ijanubiya waqi'un baina silsilatai jibalin
the southern lies between two chains of mountains,
wayakhtariquhu nahru'nnili Tazlmu
and cuts through it the river of Nile the mighty.
masahatuhu jighrafiyan arba'umi'ati alfi milin
Its area (is) geographically 400000 square
murabba'in wa arnma masahatuhu 'Imuqasatu
miles and as for its area the measured,
fahiya 65 alfa milin rnurabba'in minha 5736000
it (is) 65000 square miles, of which 5736000
faddanin ardan zara'iyatan.
faddans (are) seed ground
wayahuddu hadha 'Iqutra mina 'shshamali 'Ibahru
And bounds this land on the North the sea
'Imutawassitu wamina 'shsharqi khattun yamtaddu
the Mediterranean and on the East a line which extends
min khaui yunusa c ala 'Ibahri 'Imutawassiti ila
from Khan Yunus on the sea the Mediterranean to
'ssuwaisi c ala 5 lbahri Tahmari wa 'Ibahru Tahmaru
Suez on the sea the Red, and the sea the Red;
wamina 'Ijanubi biladu 'nnubati wamina
and on the South the district of Nubia; and on
'Igharbi biladu barqata.
the West the district of Barqa.
Introduction.
wa
'nnllu nahrun yakhtariqu
^ And the Nile (is) a river (which) cuts throuL
iqutra ? lmisrlya rnina 'Jjanubi ila 'shslmmah
the land the Egyptian from the South to the North
fa 'idha wasala ila qurbi 'Iqahirati
and when it comes to the neighbourhood of Cairo
;nqasama ila far'aini yaslru ahaduhuma ma'ilan
t divides into two branches, goes one of them tending
ila shsharqi hatta yasubba ila 'Jbahri 'Jmutawassiti
to the East until it flows into the sea the Mediterranean
mda madmati dimyata wa Takharu yaslru ma'ilan
at ^ the city of Damietta and the other goes tending
ila 'Igharbi hatta yasubba ila dhalika ? lbahri f inda
to the West until it flows into that sea at
thaghri rashlda.
the frontier of Rosetta.
wayanqasimu 'Iqutru 'Imisrlyu bihadha
3 ^ And is divided the land the Egyptian in this
li tibari ila qismaini janublyin washamallyin au
way into two parts, a southern and a northern, or
qibllyin wabahriyin fa'lqismu 'Iqibllyu
a southern and a sea-coast, and the part the southern
wayuqalu lahu 3 ssa f ldu au misru Tulya yaintaddu
and it is called the >a f ld or Egypt the upper, extends
min akhiri hududi misra janubau ila
from the end of the limits of Egypt (on the) South to
nuqtati tafarru'i ? nnlli wa'lbahrlyu
the point of the branching of the Nile; and the sea-coast,
wayuqalu lahu misru 'ssufla yamtaddu min nuqtati'
and it is called Egypt the lower, extends from the point
tafarru'i 'nnlli ila 'Ibahri 'Imutawassiti.
of the branching of the Nile to the sea the Mediterranean,
wayuqsamu 'Iwajhu 'Ibahrlyu ila
And is divided the portion the sea-coast into
thalathati aqsamin mutawassitin wahuwa 'Iwaqi'u baina
three ^ divisions, a middle, and it lies between
far'ayi 'nnlli waqad summiya
the two branches of the Nile, and it has been named
lidhalika raudatu 'Ibahraini
on account of that the garden of the two rivers
wayuqalu lahu aidani 'dhdhalta limushabahatilii
and it is called also the Delta on account of its
Introduction.
biharfi 'dhdhali r inda 'lyunanlyma
Semblance to the letter dhal among the Greeks,
washarqiyin wahuwa 5 lwaqi e u ila sharqlyi 'dhdhalta
and an eastern, audit lies to the East of the Delta
wayuqalu lahu 'lhaufu 'shsharqryu wagharblyin
and is called the border the Eastern, and a western
wahuwa 'Iwaqi'u ila gharbiyiha wayuqalu lahu
and it lies to the West of it, and is called
'lhaufu 'Igharbiyu hadhihi hiya 'aqsamu
the border the Western. These are the divisions
'Iqutri ? lmisrlyi 'ttabi'iyatu 'amma 'aqsamuhu
of the land the Egyptian the natural. As for its divisions
Tidarlyatu fatakhtalifu bi'khtilafi
the administrative, they differ with the differing
Tazmani.
of the times.
First Part,
First Lesson.
addaraa 1'awwalu.)
1. There is no indefinite article in Arabic.
2. The definite article for all genders and numbers ^.f*
is jf 'al, which is prefixed to the noun which it defines, ^^
at the same time depriving it of the nunation (Intro. ?)/*
e.g. ^.o baituu "a house"; viljf 'albaitu "the house".
The hamza of the article is hamzat alwasl (Intro.
11) and so when it follows another word is dropped
with its vowel and in pronunciation the J follows
immediately the vowel of the preceding word e.g.
babulbaiti "the door of the house";
babilbaiti "of the door of the house"; ^JjTC>u bab-
albaiti "the door (accus.) of the house". '
3. In pronunciation the j of the article is assimilated
to the Sun-letters (Intro. 4, 2) o o o 3 } j ^ ^
u^ 00 -b J3 J o when the word to wiich it is
attached begins with one of these e.g. jj^)! 'arrajulu
u . M J O 5
the man (j^wiJ! ashshamsu "the sun". In such
words the j is written without vowel-sign and tashdld
is placed over the Sun-letter.
4. Adjectives as attributes are placed after the (
nouns they qualify. If the noun has the article the '
adjective must have it also e.g. o oj nahrun
'aridun "a wide river"; rpj^iJ? llL f f 'annahrurarfdu
"the wide river".
First Part,
5. The copula "is" or "are" is not expressed in
Arabic, e.g. Ja.^ j&ti 'annahru c arldun "the river
is wide".
6. The personal pronouns of the singular^ are :
5j 'ana I. **
^S) 'anta Thou (masc.).
^| 'anti Thou (fern.).
_^> huwa He.
hiya She.
Vocabulary.
bustanun a garden.
5 - (kablrun great,
( large.
baitun a house,
saghlrun small.
mahallun a place.
hasanun beauti-
ful.
kuwaiyisun
aunllu the Nile.
j nahrun a river.
malikun a king.
i 'adilun just.
insanun a man.
y o^
^ bahrun a sea.
Go .
_A^5 qasrun a castle,
khubzun bread,
taiyibun good.
rajulun a man.
jalqadi the judge
J (see Lesson 6, 2
| Note 2).
|ta c banu tired.
( without nu nation,
(see Lesson 41).
hablbun a friend.
sadiqun upright.
Lw shari'un a street.
c aridun wide.
' ' .-. fqabihun bad, dis-
&** \ graceful.
Transcription.
albustanu kablrun. - - albustanu 'Ikablru al-
baitu ssaghlru. - - mahallim hasanun. arraiulu ha
sanun. msanun qablhun. annllu nahrun. - ma ii_
kirn adilun. -- albahru kablrun. - qasrunkuwaiyisun.
khubzun taiyibun. - alkhubzu taiyibun. ami rajulun
-- alqadl rajulun taiyibun. auta ta f banu. huwa
habibun taiyibun. arrajulu huwa 'lhablbu 'ssfidiqu
shshn u arldun.
Exercise 2.
nl, The h ^l Se iS krg ^ " ' The ^ arden is l>eautiful
Thou art a good man. - I am^tired.
The beautiful castle and wa) the wide river. The
judge is upright. - - I am an upright friend. Thou
art a bad man. - The wide street.
Second Lesson.
The Feminine.
1. Most feminine words take the endiiu _ atun
(for this form of t see Intro. 1, Note 2), e.g.
First Part.
G-o G -
an "a son", Xjut 'ibnatun "a daughter"; r*~=>
G..
"great", feminine B^^ kablratun.
->
2. The adjective agrees with the noun which it
>* ^o-o ) -0,0 .
qualifies or is predicate to, e.g. SjjuJui &ju^| alibnatu
'Ikablratu "the big girl", By.x? K>obl| 'alibnatu kablratun
"the girl is big (or old)".
3. Some words are feminine without having a
feminine ending:
a) Nouns denoting females e.g. J 'ummun "a
>~ Go.
mother", (j^^e 'arusun "a bride", JU> Hindun (name
of a woman).
b) Proper names of lands and cities e.g. ^ misru
J Z &
(without nunation) "Egypt, Cairo", jLJ! 'ashshamu
(always with article), "Syria, Damascus".
c) Names of those parts of the body which occur
G . Go
in pairs e.g. Jo yadun "hand", J^ rijlun "foot",
G o^
..jxc c ainun "eye" etc.
d) Many single words, among the commonest
being:
G o G o
'ardun, earth. ^^ii shamsun, sun.
G
khamrun, wine.^Tw*^; lj narun, fire.
6 - ;zri 6 *
Jo damn, house. (-J^^y ^^aj nafsun, self, soul.
fy f .% ^
^\j rihun, wind./^ji!f3^ ,v,j^ suqun, market.
Note 1. Some words are used both as masculine and
feminine, (see Less. 38).
Note 2. Other feminine endings are ^c a and l
a'u (see Less. 38). $><#** -> 2 J
Second Lesson.
9
Wote^S. Nouns ending in _1. denoting males are ,.
k " :lllfatu " " a coliph "' "
Collectives,
4. Many words singular in form have a collective
meaning e.g. * hajarun "rock", ^ zaitQnun
olives . To indicate a single objec? thi feminine
ending *_!_ atun is appended to such words e.g. I'J^
tajaratun "a piece of rock, a stone", ^ zaitunato
"a (single) olive". ^^^^^^jU t i.~*.
5. Interrogative sentences are introduced by the
particles fe or ?. The latter is prefixed to the first
word of the sentence.
Vocabulary.
a grand - -4*; f^g- p *
fjaddatun a grand-
1 mother. 1,^ shadldun strong,
j^, ) violent.
salihun honest.
^^ fhaklmun a wise
junainatunagarde n r ' man ' P^ sician '
na c am yes. ^ tairun a bird.
la no. ?j,r /tali'un rising (of
W I the sun).
saatun an hour. g -, ^^
: fqadlmun old, ancient ^** mufcillun shady.
\ (of things).
6 , : khadimun a man-
jadldun new. " ' servan t.
?.- .
^
". Ikhadimatunamaid-
-- . .
J 3 waladun a boy. , ^ | servant
First Part.
_
.o/> rautfun obedient. XJXo malikatun a queen.
'e~ -
J>& qahirun conquering. 9 . fgharibun setting (of
; r _, ^^ the sun).
uJaj nazifun clean.
6 *' jtuffahun apple
s- fiwazzun goose ^ ( (collective).
J3i | (collective).
s *- 6 -'. (shajarun tree
x/> maiyitun dead. ^ j (collective).
Exercise 3. x
Go
*> * *
A>- AJU so*U_j xxx- ^
' '" '
, y, 5 O^j o-os 6- ^ -
,|
* o-o ^
Jt KxJlb
a name of Cairo) 8-PlSjJ
Transcription.
aljaddu kablrun. aljaddatu kablratun. - - alib-
natu 'ssagblratu. ibnun salihun. - - hali 'Ijunainatu
kuwaiyisatun. na'ami ljunainatu kuwaiyisatun.
sa'atun hasanatun. albaitu qadlrnun. addaru'jadi-
datun. aTummu hasanatun. - alwaladu hadirun, -
rihun shadldatun. arrlhu shadidatun. a'anta
ta'banu. na'am ana ta'banu. hal anta 'Iqadi. -
Third Leeson. 29
la ana 'lhakimu. hal liiya salilmtun. la hiva
qabihatun. ashshamsu t&li'atun, ashshajaratu
'Imuzillatu. alkhadimatu mutl'atun. misru 'Iqa-
hiratu. - alyadu nazlfatun. aTiwax/.u tnirun.
al'iwazzatu 'Imaiyitatu.
Exercise 4.
The mother is present. - - A great fire. - - Is the
garden large? No, the garden is small. -- The new
house is small. The wind is violent. Art thou
(fern.) the grandmother? -- Yes, I am the grandmother.
The beautiful daughter. - The king is just and
the queen is beautiful. - - The setting sun.
Third Lesson.
Number.
1. There are three numbers in Arabic: Singular
O^o. S^j O.o^
(Ojft/j mufrad), Dual ( L c&* muthanna or iJiii tathuiya)
and Plural (*Ii iam')
\-, i
2. The Dual is formed by adding to the word
(either masc. or fern.) the termination . !^_ ani for the
nominative, QJ - aini for the other cases, e.g.
^5Xo malikun a king; o 'JjLo malikani two kings *
(nom.); ^IXJU malikaini two kings (other cases).
^ - -
X.<U malikatun a queen C) ixxJU malikatani two
o . ^ ^
queens (nom.) ^J^A malikataini two queens (other
cases). ^
Note. In the fern, the H is changed to o whenever a
suffix is added. ^ I^JL* fcfew .<^ o.iivc*
^ ^ .'58.fl3t (TrtU^^Ouu* . ---
"trr h\L, ^M4jU>?7l ^^t
30 First Part.
3. The Plural is of two kinds:
a) The Sound plural (^UjT *2f 5 aljam f assalim}
formed by the addition of endings to the singular.
> w -> yo>o y o -*P.c
b) The Broken plural (^15 f^ "aljam c almu-
kassar) formed by a change of vowels within the
word and in some cases with an ending as well, (see
Lessons 4 and 5).
4. The Sound plural masc. of nouns and adjectives
is formed by adding O3 tina for the nominative
j Ina for the other cases after the case-ending
-*
. of the nominative singular has been dropped, e.g.
) Singular. Plural Nom. Plural, other cases.
+ > ^ ^
malikun. ^L malikuna. ^ 5 malikma.
kathirun. o ^^ kathlruna. ^^ kathinna.
The Sound plural of feminines is formed by chang-
ing _!_ atun into of atun for the nominative and
of atin for the other cases, e.g.
Singular. Plural Nom.
ti . 6 .,
> khadimtitun a maid-servant. oUoL> khadimatun.
Plural, other cases',
khadimatin.
Note. Some feminine nouns take a masculine sound plural,
eg. 'XJLw sanatun a -year Plur. ,.._^A./^ sinuna; some masculine
n'jy
'
nouns also take a feminine sound plural, e.g. (^A> hayawanun
animal, Plur. OLJ!_^JC> hayawanatun.
5. Adjectives agree with their nouns not only in
gender (see Less. 2, 2) but also in number except
Third Lesson. VukctfOKitt * *<%' ^Yl
I
that: a) when the noun is in the Sound i'eig. phir. :
adjective is usually in the fern, singular, though it is
occasionally in thejein. plur, when peraons are i
b) Broken plurals being originally Collectives, take
adjective in the fern, sing.^ee Lessons 4 an
/tfj 4<tffcfi*V3 9l***pfrt0/4jt MOW wk-lkuj rxodft).
Examples of the regular agreement:
' - fkhadimun hasanun a good (beauti-
| ful) servant.
(khadimatun hasanatun a good maid-
| servant.
Ikhadimani hasanani two good ser-
( vants ,
jkhadiinatani hasanatani two good
'LI> khadimuna hasanuua good servants.
Example of exception a):
6 - , - (khadimatim hasanatun good maid-
iCUo ciU3U> { servants.
or as the noun indicates persons
6 ... G .
> khadimatun hasanatun.
0. The personal pronouns are: \ ^
, , - > fhuma they > (hum they / j
huwa he. UP two ^ | (masc>) . V
.. o] (masc. and fern.). s , (hunna they *f*
* uiya sue. ^o> < //> \ * /? *.~
CT I (fern.). IU+HU
lanta thou =^1 | antum ' 1 ^ t l antum y u
(masc.). I y. u , two , *** I (masc.).
(masc. and fern.). s , OB an tunna vou
_, o ^ inahnu we ;
,-* (ana I (masc. a ^" (masc. and
u ' I and fern. I fern.).
32
First Part.
Vocabulary.
p j Jmu'allimun
** I a teacher.
J - O ^
s-w -' (mu'allimatun rr^j
'*+*** a (female) teacher. --
jtf lami e un flashing.
s# lailatun a night.
o _
'u^J naharun a day.
^ mashghalun busy.
so
s- Jkhabbazun
^ I a baker.
(mujtahidun
industrious.
jmabsutun con-
j tente( j.
za'lanu vexed
n ._
llailun night
1 (collective).
Ikhaijatatun
> a (female) tailor.
fmuslimun a Mos-
| i em .
la r ibun playing. -
(haratun a quarter
["(of a town).
muzlimun dark .
.Xale, gha'ibun absent. >
3
le> khaiyatun a tailor. j
Exercise 5.
kaslanu idle.
s 4 f
}
najjarun a car-
penter.
I Ua
) ) & ^ ojoS o
.I^Av^x ^JCJi J
^ O^> <.
^LaJl JJ g
Fourth Lesson. 33
Transcription.
almivallimu \sulihu. almu'allimttna salihQna. -
arainani 'llamratani. - - alrau'allimQtu hadiratun.
hal antum mabsutiina. la nahnu za'knQna.
lailatiini wanaharani. hali 'Iqadl inashghQlun. na'ain
huwa mashghulun. - - alkhabbazuna mujtahidfma. -
alibnatani gha'ibatani. alkhaiyatu wa'lkbaiyatatu mash-
ghulani. alkhaiyatuna wa'lkhaijatatu muytahidana. -
almuslimttna 'salihuna. waladani la'ibani. alharatu
nazlfatuu.
Exercise 6.
The quarter (of the town) is clean. - - The teachers
are present. - - A flashing eye. Are you (two) in-
dustrious? Yes, we are busy. Are you vexed? -
No, I am contented. The Moslem is pious. - - They
(ruasc.) are absent. The beautiful tailoresses are
present. - The boy is industrious. The night is
dark. The servants and maid servants are tired. -
The physician is busy. Two busy physicians.
Two clean hands. Are the bakers idle? Yes,
and the carpenters are idle, they are tired.
Fourth Lesson.
w -o 3 O w ".
The Broken Plural.
Explanation. Arabic words with few exceptions
(see Note) consist of three consonants called Radicals
together with certain vowels and sometimes prefixes or
suffixes. To indicate patterns or type-forms of words
Arabian grammarians use the three consonants joe
the ^J representing the first radical, the the second
and the J the third e.g. Jj^ kalbun "a dog" is said
1'" e 8*1
to be of the form Jotr; .^ of the form J-oe; AJ? (for
of the form j^s; ^s>\ 'ahmaru u red" of the form
''1 of the form 'bUi; iH* of the form
' O
Arabic Gnxinraar.
34 First Part.
Note. A few Arabic words have four radicals. The pattern
JJjts is used for them.
There are 31 patterns of the Broken Plural (Less. 3,
3). A complete list of these is given in Lessons 39
and 40. Among the most frequently used are:
.
.
a) <3lxsi e.g. ^^i 'auladun plur. of oJ 3 waladun
G -oS G..
" a by"; (j!jM 'afrasun plur. of (j*j farasun "a horse";
G . oS G
vJl^i! 'ashrafun plur. of V.AJ-& sharifun "noble". In
-' i
Go
the same way are formed the plurals of Js^b tiflun "a
.> o.
baby''; J Lw matarun "rain"; ^^3 waqtun "time".
Go-
b) jjjti e.g. } j&z buhurun plur. of ^ bahrun "sea";
G-E^ f >
"usudun plur. of vX^f "asadun "a lion";
6 G
shulmdun plur. of js^Li shahidun "a witness"; vyi
huququn plur. of^^-haqqun "a right". In the same
G o.
way are formed the plurals of ^j qalbun "a heart";
G o-> G
js*^ jundun "an army"; ^Ls> malikun "a king".
G . G . Go.
c) vJ'uis e.g. L-^b" kilabun plur. of ^JS kalbun "a
G . " G > -
dog"; jL>j rijalun plur. of J^ rajulun "a man"; so
G ..
also are formed the plurals of Jo.> jabalun "a mountain";
rumhun "a spear"; ^S kabirun "great". ^lo
G .
kutubun plur. of ^jj kitabun
G. . '
mudunun plur. of XJjJwo madlnatun
G.
"a city"; ^^ sufunun plur. of '^s.^ saflnatun "a ship".
G,o Go.
e.g. .ijl 'anhurun plur. of ^ nahrun "a
G ) o s.
.
river"; ^&| ashhurun plur. of ^ shahrun "a month";
> > GZ t Go
'arjulun plur. of J rijlun "afoot".
..
Fourth Lesson.
85
Vocabulary.
The small letters after a word indicate that the Plural is
of the form given under that letter in this lesaon.
G
wasikhun dirty.
fsa'bun hard, diffi-
i cult.
(d) tarlqun a way.
sahilun easy.
b) c ilmun know-
ledge, science.
gili nafi'un useful.
& - |(b) shartun a con-
J* dition. ' "
r Ithabitun firm, per-
inanent.
tawllun long.
V
>,<>* Jalfuratu the : *H*J&&
\ Euphrates,
mukhlisun honest.
sarfun swift.
the
alkali the high.
(b) harfun a letter
(of the alphabet).
~ f'arabiyun Arabic,
&f- \ Arabian.
ho
* w 3
t. ( e
harisun watchful.
V Exercise 7.
(b) saifun a sword.^
qati'un cutting,
nasun people.
6 o
O -
G .,
y
G - G
G ^ ^ ^
36 First Part.
9 .,
Transcription.
huwa kitabun sa'bun. - kutubun sa'batun.
misru wa'shshamu madlnatani hasanatani. alnmdunu
kuwaiyisatun. turuqun sahilatuo. aTulQnin nafi-
c atun. ashshurutu sa'batuu. tuququn thabitatun.
huwa shahidun salihun. - - shuhudun silahun. -
alkalbu harisun. alkilabu 'lharisatu. - alqulubu
'Imukhlisatu. - - sufunun sarfatun. - - al'afrasu hasa-
natun. al'auladu mutl'una. al'amtaru 'shshadldatu.
- al'auqatu 'Imadiyatu. aljibalu 'aliyatuu. al-
hurufa Tarabiyatu. assuyufu qati'atun. al'anhuru
'Ikabiratu. hum nasun kibaruii.
Exercise 8.
The dogs are swift and watchful. It is a diffi-
cult way. Difficult ways. The industrious boys.
- The Arabic letters are difficult. They are (g) per-
manent rights. An honest heart. The high
mountains are beautiful. - - Are you great people?
No, we are honest people. - Useful books. - The
Arabian cities are dirty. - - The Arabian sciences are
difficult. The swords are long. The Nile and
Euphrates are two great rivers. -- The past month. -
The little babies.
Fifth Lesson.
1. Further forms of the Broken Plural are:
^,> *~> o ^
f) ^Ui e.g. ! 3 wuzara'u plur. of wazlrun "a
Vezir, minister"; fy>T 'umara'u plur. of ^1 'amirun
Fifth Lesson. . 37
.
"a prince' 1 ; t\ju~ sufara'u plur. of ^^ saftrun "an
* - 'OK
ambassador"; i\^\ "usara'u {.lur. of *~~' "a^irun "a
captive". ^ >V^ , J^7<-,~,~*~
This is a very common plural for words of the
G
form J^oti when they
"
g) ^bUsi e.g. ^'6'j^ol asdiqa'u plur. of
- 'os 2 *
sadlqun u a friend"; *Lof 'anbiya'u plur. of ^^J nablyun
_ os <j
"a prgphej"; iLji\ 'aqriba'u plur. of v^oy qarlbun u a
' os ' } 8 - *
relative^ ^Lxcl 'aghniya'u plur. of ^f. ghaniyun "rich".
^
h) C) ^Ui e.g. o L*j9 fursanun plur. of ^^'j farisun
O.o^ G ..
"a rider"; ^loOb buldanun piur. of jjb baladun "a
district"; Qlj^ qudbanun plur. of ^**> qadibun "a
rod, sceptre".
2. Nouns with four radicals (JJl*i) have the follow-
ing Broken Plurals: Vg^ \ a it/' eyu
i) JJlii e.g. ^=>\j^-, kawakibu plur. of ^^3^3
' > ^- G. o^
kaukabun "a star"; ^Lf 1 ' tajaribu plur. of iuy^' tajri-
batun "an attempt". In the same way are formed the
G G * G*G*
plurals of j$>j> jauharun "a jewel"; ^.V^-T* rnaktabun
O * * o ^
"a school, office"; LjoCc maktabatun "a Jibrary".--*^^
k) JyJUi e.g.
3 ~'~ 6 - .
Q-o*Us fanajlnu from o^ ^ finjanun "a cup .
(jjollo sanadlqu from 3 Js>^ sunduqun "a coffer".
Go
J^> khanazlru from ^3- khinzlruu "a pig .
38 First Part,
In the same way are formed the plurals from
CJ lLjL sultanun "a sultan"; **.&&* maktubun "a letter";
G o
Juj-OS qindllun "a lamp".
This form is used for the plural of all words of
four radicals which have a long vowel between the
third and fourth radicals.
G.
1) XJJL*i a rare form used specially for Jiving beings
G * Go
e.g. BJs^^'talarnidhatunpl.of Js^JLj' tilmldhun "a scholar".
3. The following words deserve special notice:
Go ., >* ^z.
iy}[ ibnun "a son plur. QjJb banuna or sLoi
'abna'un.
G ..o G o
&o| 'ibnatun or ^J^ bintun "daughter, girl", plur.
banatun.
Gs G , o
\ 'akhun "brother", plur. *j=>{ 'ikhwatun or
, )? 5
>\ 'ukhtun "sister", plur. o!j^>{ 'akhawatun.
Note 1. Some nouns have two or more forms of Broken
Go., G^J G^
Plural e.g. j^ 1 . bahrun "sea" has j_}^ buhtirun, jL^ 1 . biharun,
G^oS G ^oS
j^.i abhurun and ^L^i abharun.
Note 2. Some words have different forms of the Broken
G c.,
Plural with different meanings e.g. o~o baitun means "a house"
G
or "a verse of poetry". In the former sense the Plural is o_j-u
G *0
buyutun, in the latter oLoi abyatun.
Vocabulary.
G ., G
/jl3 farighun empty. u^J naflsun precious.
G
fjj^s karlmun noble.
^ (Other words in the lesson.)
u^^ ^ >*3 H
Fifth Lesson. 89
Exercise 9.
a C tot - oft
LoJl LXD M9
^ cV
>& O - * - >
.
' / /
w\, G *^-
Transcription.
assufara'u hadiruna walwuzara'u gha'ibUna.
al'amlru asirun. - asdiqa'u mukhlisuna. annasu
aghniya'u. albuyutu Taliyatu kuvvaiyisatun. - - nia-
katibu nafi'atun. assalatinu *kibarun. - - arrimahu
tawllatun. basatinu hasanatun. almu'alliiniina
mabsutnna wa'ttalamidhatu mujtahiduna. -- assunduqu
farighun. buldanun ghanlyatun. albiharu (albuhtiru)
'Ikablratu. al'aqriba'u liumu Tasdiqa'u. -- aljaubaru
"nnafisu. annafsu 'Ikarimatu. albanuna mujta-
hiduna wa'lbaniltu inutfatun.
Exercise 10.
The cups are empty. - - The pigs are animals. -
The Sultan is just. - - The princes and ministers are
present. The letter is long. Long letters.
Noble souls. The scholars are busy. - The boys
are contented, they are playing. The horsemen are
tired. - Are the ambassadors present? - No, they
are absent. Are you relatives? Yes, and we are
friends. The big coffers. -- The jewels are precious.
Beautiful verses. The brothers and sisters are
present and the sons and daughters are absent.
40 First Part.
Sixth Lesson.
Declension. -><*
1. There are three cases in Arabic: the Nornjnative
nu'^r/f^' (., raf ), Genitive, oblique or prepositional (^> jarr)
6 o .,
and Accusative f^*oj nasb).--^- b/ '^''f tfVc/ev< ^*-' t/iw/c *
^"^2. These cases are expressed:
** a) When the word originally has nunation
whether it be a masc. sing, or fern. sing, or broken
plural - - by the endings' un, in, an v ( written * 5
|_! _ _1_). ^ ? V"' ?2 j^,
fe^^t^When the word has originally no nunation by
t* for the nom., and a for the other cases.
f of 5**0y*
"V c) When the word is defined by the article or a
^^ following word in the genitive whether it has
^_ nunation or not originally - - by M, i, a.
srw **o ' Examples.
O G-
a) Nom. -IK^'LW sariqun "a thief". &xoL>- khadimatun
"a maid-servant". o^ 3 f auladun "children".
Gen. *^Ll sariqin. }^oL> khadimatin. oi^j auladin.
.
Ace. l5.'u sariqan. K^ooL> khadimatan. |o^| auladan.
g 9 ^ * *'-
. ioCoinakkatu "Mecca" './ oj^Lx^osanadiqu "coffers".
en. and Ace. XX* makkata. / jo'iJwo sanadiqa.
^ |.
00. *ec*-'' _ T -> * % _ o. o-o J ^ e t
c) Nom. -z ,LwJi assanqu. v^wMJl wc^Ua sahibu- Ibaiti
u^ ,
"thejmaster of the house".
Gen. -i ,LwJ| assariqi. v^AxJf ^o'uo sahibi- 'Ibaiti.
CV , " ; ,
* ' ^ - .1
Ace. ,UJ| assanqa. ^NXXJ| v_*>Ua samba -'Ibaiti.
u^ , -
-
Sixth Leeson. 41
Note 1. A word without original tanwln is called by the s
. - > - A^ttl^ .
Arabian grammarians O-AOAX _A ghair munsarif i.e. not
Ir^. ^
fectly) dwlinjed. (see Less. 41).
^oteii,. Words which en<l in ^- pr-ccjc,l l\- ka.-i.i
G > mt
1^5 iyun and ^5 iyin into in: ^5 iyu and ^ jyi * 77.
into i. In the Sound plural they drop the ^ altogether
* :. G r.
e.g. U808 q&cjin "a judge" for ^toS qacjiyun (nom.) or .y"^
*oS > ^o5
qa^liyin (gen.^J^oLJtl! alqadlt "the judge" for ( -XlftJt alqmliyu
(nom.) or -Xo'iiiJ! alqadiyi (gen.) Plural, nom. Q_ysli> qa^tlna;
gen. i-yy-^ qfujina. Other forms are uncontracted e.g. >-ysl5
qa^iyan (ace.).
Note 3. The forms of the dual and plural have already
been given in Lesson 3 so that the declension of the noun ' is
now complete.
3. 41Lp re P s iti ns govern the genitive, thus:
-o
3 ^ i4 i n as ijl**S J- ^ bustanin "in a garden";
ft raakkata u in Mecca".
^c. c ala "on^ as jlLil jst c ala 'Ijibali "on the
mountains 1 '.
J li "to, for^' as jjjj lilwaladi "for the boy"
(see Intro. 11, 4 c).
J-O *
u* min "from/' as o^Jl ^ mina Ibuyuti "from
- the, houses", ^
4. The relation of a word and its following genitive
is called &l*>t idafa; the governing word is called
o'uaa* mudaf and the genitive AJi Ousi=x> mudaf ilaihi.
42 ^ 3 First Par <, /^ L '-
The worcf that governs a genitive is itself definite
) - -> O -
but never takes the article, thus J.>. ^^o baitu rajulin
means
house of a man".
J O^
J baitu 'rrajuli means "
house of
the governing word is indefinite the prepo-
sition J must be put before the following genitive e g.
-o baitun lirrajuli "a house of the man"; or
one may say Jo-Jf oj-o ^ ^^o baitun min buyuti
'rrajuli (literally) "a house from the houses of the man".
- Vocabulary.
allahu God.
suqun a market.
<> /
jarun a neighboui^
o/y^-7
1-3^
qabla before.
? fahmadu Ahmed
{ f a }
- fvvasi'un wide, /
(sahibun master,
owner, friend.
alyauma the day
= to-day.
z ah run a back.
miftahun a key.
c umaru Omar
(name of a man).
'- fzaidun Zaid (name
3 \ of a man).
9,
| babun (pi.
abwabun) a gate,
door.
maftuhun open.
(raflqun a compa-
I nion.
8 '^ (mashhurun
renowned.
majlisun as-
sembly, council.
jzaujatun asponse,
i wife.
.
^ (ra'sun a head,
V"J 1 beginning.
-o
hikmatun wisdom.
makhafatun fear.
Sixth LesHon. 43
Exercise 11.
SA
Transcription.
sahibu 'Ibaiti gha'ibuui 'lyauma. alfarisu f ala
zahri 'Ifarasi. al'amiru gha'ibun khadimu Vamlri
ft'ddari. miftahu babi'lbaiti. - - abwabu^ Imadlnati
maftuhatun. 'umaru sahibim lizaidin. basatiuu
'shshami masbhuratun. - - kalbu 'Iwaladi harisuD.
kutubu 'ttalamidhati nazlfatun. nahnu asdiqa'u
'rrajuli. qasru Tamiri fi'lraadlnati. - - buyutu 'Ima-
dlnati 'aliyatun. arrijalu hadiruna fl'lraajlisi.
zaujatu 'Iqadl hasanatun. - - ra'su 'Ibikmati makhafatu
'llahi. baitun min buyuti 'rarairi ft'ssuqi. -- antum
hadiruna ft bustani 'Jjari. aljrau qabla 'ddari 'rraftqu
qabla 'ttarlqi.
)( Exercise 12.
Is the master of the servant in the house? No,
he is in the garden of the neighbour. - You are the
friends of the man. The merchant is present in the
44 First Part.
market of the city. -- The door of the house is open.
- The man's dogs (dogs of the man) are watchful.
The king's ministers are present in the council. Is
the physician present? - - The physician is absent and
the wife of the physician is present to-day. Ahmed
is a friend of the judge. - The gardens of the city
are spacious. The relatives of the physician are rich.
Seventh Lesson.
The Genitive (continued).
1. The Dual and Sound plural masc. lose their
final ^ with its vowel when- they are followed by a
genitive; thus the ending o i ani becomes \ a,
, - - - <
^yj - aini becomes ^5 __ ai, ^ __ atani becomes li'_
ata, AJ ataini becomes - atai, _ una be-
comes 3 - _ u, ^ _ Ina becomes ^5 _ I, e.g.
baita 'rrajuli the two houses of the
man.
ff / ^aba baitayi 'rrajuli the two doors
V^ j of the two houses of the man.
| ibnata 'Iwaziri the two daughters of
the
f baitu 'bnatayi 'Iwaziri the house of
{ the two daughters of the minister.
I mu'allimu 'Iwaladi the teachers of
( the boy.
J kutubu mu'alliml 'Iwaladi the books
( of the teachers of the boy.
O 5 .
2. The words i_jf abun "father", ^i akhun
o
G _ 3
"brother", +&* hamun "father-in-law", ^> dhu "master,
Seventh Lesson. '* m***** ) 45
v*
possessor" (only used with a genitive), ^ famun "mouth'
take the followiug forms before a genitive:
Nom.
fft
aba Ace.
w
aba
Geii.
jjl abl
> "
akhu
lif
akha
11 i^
s>\ akhl
h>
hainu ,,
u^
ham a
" Lf*
K> ham I
J
dhu
r3
dha
" ^
5 3 dhi
3
*"
J*
fu
45
fa
j i
j ft.
Thus:
jf abu muliammadiu Mohammed's father.
' rf ' " | darabtu aba zaidin I struck Zaid's
L.I oj^ \ 'father.
wajhu dhi husnin the face of the
beautiful man (literally "of the pos-
sessor of beauty").
3. A word cannot be separated from a genitive
belonging to it, therefore if it is qualified by an
adjective, the adjective must be put after the genitive
(and have the article), e.g.
baitu 'Iwaziri 'Iwasi'u "the
spacious house of the Vezir".
An alternative form would be:
albaitu 'Iwasi'u lilwazlri.
4. If the genitive refers to two nouns, it must
follow the first while the second takes the suffix of
the personal pronoun (see Lesson 8) e.g.
^ _
baitu Iwazln wabustanuhu
"the Vezir's house and garden".
. ttfl>,3 v^uJT iJsJ yada 'Ibinti warijlaha "the girl's
hands (dual) and feet (dual)".
46
5. The genitive is often used partitively and to
Of ) -* O
,. denote material e.g. *i KxLS qit'atu Jahmin "a piece
^x of flesh"; s^ O liu3 finjanu qahwatin "a cup of coffee";
jMkursiyu khashabin "a seat of wood".
6. The genitive often occurs after an adjective to
O xO0 > ..
define or limit its application, e.g. JJixJi JsJL* qalilu
Taqli "little of understanding" (i.e. as regards under-
*
standing) i.e. "stupid"; jlil _xi^ kathlru 'Imali "abundant
~~ , J "~ -- . ____
'of wealth" i.e. "rich"; *>pl !J^ hasanu 'Iwajhi
"beautiful of face".
Note. This genitive is improper and stands in place of a
defining accusative, hence the rule in Lesson 6, 4 does not
apply to the word before it, which can take jhe article when it
is .definite e.g.
^ O^ - O -0-0 >* * -9.0 -O-o J-0
ibnatu 'Iwazlri 'Jhasanatu
'Iwajhi hadiratun "the beautiful daughter (lit. "the daughter the
beautiful of face") of the Vezir is present".
7. Some nouns are used in Arabic with a following
"^^'genitive denoting a quality, where in English an ad-
jective is used. These nouns are such as
sahibun, plur. U^\ ashabun "master, possessor"; 3 3
dhu, dual, \^ dhawa (with omission of the final o be-
j ^
.. fore the genitive), plur. ^ dhawii and the feminine
> ' "^sing. olJ dhatu, dual lj : K5 dhata, plur. oLJ dhawatu
> f &t
"possessor"; _^\ abu "father"; pi ummu "mother";
^l ibnu "son", e.g.
sahibu c ilmin "master of learning
' j e jearned;'.
- f dhatu husnin "possessor of beauty
o 1 i.e. beautiful (fern.)".
Seventh Lesson.
47
* f abu lisanaini "father of two tongues
* J I i.e. dissembling".
libnu khamslna sanatan "son of
I 50 years i.e. 50 years old".
Vocabulary.
[abu bakrin Abu
Bekr, (name of
I a man).
qabilatun a tribe.
( banu asadin (sons
of a lion), name
_ *i.
^ f u an Arabian
trlbe -
khubzun bread,
hadldun iron.
{shaikhun an old
man, head of a
tribe, Sheikh.
f ma'rifatun know-
( ledge.
kidhbun a lie.
/ , ' **
/: 4**. i^. ,^'.IK<
hujratun a room
matbakhun a -^^
kitchen.
zuhdun abstinence. 9llj nisa'un women.
/luqmatun a bit (of o
1 bread, rneat&c.). ^ tajirun a merchant.
jamalun beauty.
/ bukhlun miser-
( liness.
zillun shadow.
48 First Part.
..O-o .. O-o - O ., O J O -
^ 6 ^ ^ 0,^0
*-*^
O - -o-o
Transcription.
mu'allimu 'Iwaladi ashabu 'ilmio. arrajulu
'Iqablhu huwa abu lisanaini. ibnu abl bakrin ka-
tbiru'lmali. ibnata 'Iwaziri hasanata 'Iwajhi. ~ babu
'Ibaiti 'Iwasi'u maftuhun. hal huwa dim e ilmin? La,
huwa qalllu Taqli. kutubu dhawl c ilmin nafi'atun.
- qabilatu bain asadin hiya qabllatun mina Tarabi.
- zaujatu 'lhakimi hiya dhatu husnin wa jamalin. -
hali Tamlru karlmu 'nnafsi. la huwa kathlru 'Ibukhli.
ashshajaratu dhatu zillin. zuhdu abi bakrin mash-
hurun. e aina 'bnati 3 lqadl laini'atani. qit'atu lahmin
kablratun. luqinatu khubzin saghlratun. - - finjanu
'Iqahwati hadirun. kurslyu hadidin ft 'ibustani.
shaikhu 'Iqabllati 'Ikathiru 'Imali salihun.
Exercise 14.
The boys are stupid. The stupid boys are
present. The physicians (Broken plur. f) are learned.
The girls (Less. 5, 3) are beautiful. The men
present are learned and the women present are beauti-
ful. The tailor is bad, he is a liar (father of lying).
Abu Bekr's servant is present and the two maid-
servants of Abu Bekr's brother are absent. / The cups
are in the room. J No, they are (J.) in the kitchen. -
One of the sons (a son of the sons) of the sheikh is
50 years old. Is the merchant rich? Yes, he is
rich and miserly (much of miserliness). - - The learned
are the friends of kings (Plur. b).
Eighth Lesson.
Eighth Lesson.
Pronominal Suffixes. * ^
o
1. The Personal Pronouns (j*+*o damlr) exist in two
forms: a) Independent i.e. standing alone (J^xaiL* ^^
damir munfasil) or b) attached as Suffixes to nouns,
verbs or prepositions (J^U ^o damir muttasil). The
Independent forms have already been given in Less. 3, 6).
2. The forms used when attached to words are:
Sm S- At^OrKW- Dual Plur-
3 rd Masc. hu <*i(*J~ ( ~> _ ^> hum.
3 rd Fern. Li ha
2 ud Masc. 2 ka *4. k , - 5 , Z^ kum
U^ kuma
a y
2 nd Fern. ^ ki ^ kunna.
1 st Masc. and Fern. ^ I fi na.
(with a verb J, nl). ' i**^.
3. These Suffixes attached to a noun correspond to
our Possessive Pronoun e.g. ju'Jtf kitabuhu "his book":
attached to a verb or preposition they answer to our
Personal Pronoun in the objective case e.g. xays darabahu
3 o
"he struck him"; xU minhu "from him".
Note 1. Nouns to which these suffixes are attached employ
the forms which they have before a genitive i.e. they drop the
nunation and in the dual and plur. the ,; while the words
G 6s G ,
i*_j| ^.1 *^> have the forms given in Lesson 7 (except that with
the 1st pers. pron. sing, they become \ abi, ~=>\ akhl, -T
hami).
Arabic Grammar. 4
^ J
First Part.
fc, e^
, , .
Note 2. The suffices s hu, U$> hums and ^P.hum are
^ &
changed to hi, U$> hima and ^P him when attached to a word
- '
ending in - i, ^5 Tor ^5 - ai e.g. aj'utf' kitabihi "of his
book", f-g-oUcf kitabaihim "of their two books".
> ;> >
Note 3. The suffixes p$ kum and *P hum become A/
> ->
kumu and p& humu when they are followed by a word beginning
w ^ ^ amzat alwasl.
^ Note 4. The pronominal suffix of the 1st person sing.
is always c ya after a vowelless ! 519.
4. The prepositions j^c. c inda "with, in, in the
Dispossession of", (lr min "from" <ji c ala "on", it ila
j*--** "to, unto" are attached to the pronominal suffixes
/ ** d *i ) ~ o
without change (e.g. v^j^c. c indahu "in his possession",
G-* -
\jJLf: 'alaihi "on him") except in the case of the 1 st person
o w
which is as follows: ^jOt f indl "with me", (J j^> minni
"from me", ji c alaiya "upon me", J.1 ilaiya "unto me".
j li "to, for" assumes the form 5 la before the suffixes
except with the 1 st person which is i li "to me".
5. The English verb "to have" is usually expressed
in Arabic not by a verb but by the prepositions j,
" & ~ ~
3^. or * ma c "with"; thus "Zaid has a book" may be
expressed by u;Lx^s Jojj or v_;li^> Jo^ jOc or
6 . '
6. The particle 0! or Oh! in forms of address
may be expressed in Arabic by b ya with the following
Eighth Lesson.
&
, ( 51
'
o
'
word in the nominative without nunation e.g. j^,
ya zaidu "oh Zaid", but with the following word" in
the accusative if that is followed by a genitive^e.g!
yjljf jJl' C ya saiyida 'nnasi "oh Lord of (the) men"-
For further details see Lesson 16.
f baina between,
1 among.
(waraqun paper
{ (collective).
fqalamun a reed.
{pen. Klto
hibrun ink.
Vocabulary.
/ 'a'ishatu Ayesha
I (name of woman).
khaitun thread.
Go
I zainabu Zainab
\ (name of woman).
| saiyidun master,
) lord. ,
f saiyidatun mistress,
f mahmudun Mah-
mud, (name of
I man).
I hasanun Hasan,
) (name of man).
fiddatun silver.
v'rul l^timatun Fatima,
I (name of woman).
Exercise 15.
18mun
sa'atun hour, watch.
dhahabun gold.
f abdu 'rrahmani
Abdurrahman,
(name of man,
literally "the
servant of the
Merciful").
1 himarun
an ass.
j r
I
a sl
servant.
s e
au
r hindun Hind,
f (name of woman).
uto*^
52 First Part.
3 LJ
.> o-o- Go ^^ ^ .> o-o
^ c ,
^- -> - JO^j
li ^ - XaDb
*J
r*
O ^0-0 ^ J O (is.
Exercise 16.
Abdurrahman has two sons, the name of the
older (great) is Mahmud, the (name) of the younger
(small) is Hasan. O servant, is the physician pre-
sent? - - No, (0) my master, the physician is absent;
the wife and son of the physician (Less. 7, 4) are pre-
sent. Hast thou a gold watch (watch of gold) or a
silver one (watch of silver)? - - I have a silver watch,
(0) my master 1 IJave you horses (plur. a)? Yes,
we have norses and asses. Are my servants in the
market? No, your servants are in the garden.
My brother's wife is beautiful (beautiful of face). -
O my mistress, art thou content with ( c j| thy slave?
Yes, I am content. He is content v jvith his
servant.
If (. yy,>' "-Nint
. ,>' -Ninth Lesson. 58
Ninth Lesson.
Demonstrative Pronouns.
1. The Demonstrative Pronoun (s^U^ll ^*J ism
al-'ishara) in its simplest form is: Masculine Sing. 16
dha for all cases; Dual nom. O IJ dhani, gen. and ace.
^jj dhaini; FemimqeJSipg/j^o dhl, >o dhihi, j tl, x
JL!!- 5 "" - ^-^f - --JL. -- *^-
tihi, lj r ta for all cases; Dual nom. o bf tani, gen. and
~_-__ ^,
ace. ^AJ taini.
Plural for_both_ genders and all cases iji ula or
ula'i. -
These forms are however rarely used.
2. The words for "this, these" are formed by pre-
fixing IP (written $> see Intro. 6, note 1), to some of the
simple forms above. They are:
Sing. masc. fj^> hadha for all cases. Fern.
hadhihi (rarely ^cXP) for all cases.
Dual masc. nom. o \0& hadhani. Fern. C) U$> hatani.
o /\ o' j
Gen. and ace. O^ hadhaini. Fern. -J> hataini.
Plural *fy ha'ula'i for both-genders and all cases.
r ~~ Ct<
3. The words for "that, those" are formed by
adding ka (in some cases with interpolated j) to
the simple forms. They are:
y
Siag. masc. ^!3 dhaka or ^o dhalika; fern. ^J
taka ot .^xj tika or usually ^JJ tilka for all cases.
/LL
54: First Part.
Dual masc. norn. (JolJ dhanika or ^13 dhannika;
gen. and ace. ^^ dhainika or ^i^JuJ dhainnika.
Fern. nom. ^o'j tanika or ^j tannika; gen. and
ace. U&LO tainika or k^JLo tainnika.
Plural t-^^i ula'ika (more rarely i^^j ulaka or
J^ 3 T ulalika) for both genders and all cases.
.5 4. If the demonstrative qualifies a simple noun,
it precedes it and the noun takes the article e.g.
r
'Ikitabu u this book".
But if the noun is defined by a following genitive
or a pronominal L _fia|&x the demonstrative is placed
after these e.g. \> ^U .t ibnu 'Imaliki hadha
'3Ljyyi)U'}* HMMMto^ V^y *
"this son of the king" fj^ b kitabukum hadha
..J'this book of yours".
5. If the demonstrative is used pronominally and
as subject of a nominal sentence, then:
a) If the predicate is an indefinite noun, no copula
is necessary e.g. i_ilv^ |3v2 hadha kitabun "this is
a book".
^ \ b) If the predicate is defined by the article the
3 rd pers. pron. is used as a copula to prevent the
demonstrative from being taken adjectivally (as in 4) e.g.
hadha huwa 'Iwaladu "this is the boy".
redicate is defined by a following genitive
al suffix, the demonstrative is put first
O 3 > * ', I
and no copula is needed e.g. Lx^s \O^> "this is
; i c) If the predicate is defined by a following genitive
or a pronominal suffix, the demonstrative is put first
your book".
3 O
6. The Interrogative pronouns (^L^c^^i ^[ ism
alistifham) are ^ man "who", U ma "what" (sometimes
Ninth Lesson.
55
!v3o madha), ^] aiyun fern, iuf aiyatuu "which",
kam "how much? how many?"
~~
is indeclinable
/ cr is indeclinable (^^^ mabnl). The genitive
relation is expressed by placing it after a noun e.g.
O - ) +
o* ujbcf kitabu man "whose book?"
/ U is also indeclinable. After some prepositions it
is written ^ as ^ lima "for what? why?"
S2 Gas'
t^i, fern, ioi is declinable and is treated as a noun, ;
T~T"~5
so takes a following noun in the genitive e.g. ^ } ^\
aiyu rajulin "which man?" ^JL iLj aiyatu bintin
"which girl?"
o- &6.
*/ takes,, the following noun in the accusative e.g.
= lO * 7^ i'Ae o f trhaf f iL.'>u^tt&(L4 A
^^ o .,
*y kam waladan "bow many boys?"
Note. The interrogative particles (I,
before the interrogative pronouns.
are not used
qatilun killing.
i i
Jahzun glance.
qamusun dictionary.
Vocabulary.
o
anlsun amiable.
^ shakhsun, person.
o ..
manzarun
( ghaflatun careless-
1 ness.
| imra'atun woman,
I (in distinction from
I man).
sababun cause.
fmuslbatun mis-
* . fortune -
matiubun desire.
sanatun year.
uinrun life.
56 First Part.
Exercise 17.
Ow-oJ^ O o ^ O ^ * I
I O 333 }
l J 1 uJj"f
w 'u
Exercise 18.
This is a good man and that (fern.) is a bad woman.
- This is the judge. This judge is upright and that
physician is learned. These friends of thine are rich.
This son of the sheikh is amiable and that daughter
of his is beautiful (of face). O my master, what is
thy desire? What I want (my desire) is paper (and)
pen and ink. Who is the minister's son, this or that?
- This is the minister's son. -- Whose son is Hasan?
Hasan is the son of Abdurrahman. How
many sons has Abdurrahman ?/ He has five. -- Hast
thou this book? No, I have that. -- This dictionary
Tenth Lesson. 57
is useful. What is thy name? My name is Hasan.
- How old art thou (how many years is thy life)? -
I am 50 years old (my life is 50 years, or I am a son
of 50 years). - - These two men are friends.
Tenth Lesson.
J * <J~0 > G %
Adjectives.
M 1. Some of the commonest forms of adjectives
ism sifa) are:
""* 6 _
a) J*c& fa'ilun (properly the present participle) e.g.
<5 -O , O
sadiqun "upright", jjle 'adilun "just",
jahilun "ignorant".
O . G . " ' 6 '''
b) Js-oti fa f ilun e.g. J^~ot^ sa'idun "happy", jAt
o
kablrun "great", kathlrun "much, many".
* I t' a -
' I
c) >*5 fa'ulun denoting intensity e.g. ^?- jahalun
G ,. " f| f > / ^
"very ignorant", j^-^y kasulun "very lazy". ^)***~f -
d) ,..il*i fa'lanu (without nunation) e.g. ...LoJ !****
*-^ o' ^****-
ta'banu "tired", 'LX^ ghadbanu "angry". ^ lU^ .
2. Adjectives denoting colours or bodily defects
have the following form: ^
Masc. sing. jjd>! afalu. Fern. sing. ^^3 fa'la'u.
6 o>
Plural for both genders Jots fu'lun.
58
First Part.
E.g.
Sing. Masc. Fern.
3 *<). * O .,
o^*t aswadu, black 1,3^ sauda'u
SAJ! abyadu, white U=-o baida'u
\- hamra'u
-^
zarqa'u
\ Plural.]
G .
* sudun
jTiahmaru, red
^
, blue
J atrashu, deaf
akhrasu,
a'ma, blind
a'raju, lame
.r humrun
*
zurqun
u,
*
^
'
.
ir>| akhdaru, green L*^> khadra'u ya> khudrun
asfaru, yellow ^1^ safra'u *
tarsha'u g&
GO
kharsa'u
'ainya'u
'arja'u
sufrun
turshun
- khursun
c umyun
'urjun
hudbun.
-^A^V ie < e J, / 7.l* n .,cl*i,-
Notice the absence of nunation in the Sing. (cf.
Lesson 6, 3).
- _L..J^.
*o^te. The fern, of the dual changes hamza into , e.g.
~ saudawa-ni. ^ ft^, &*&*&> ^^'^
3. For the comparative and superlative^of adjectives
i* wHsr* ;
the so-called Elative is used (the JwjA^ixJ ! ** t ism
i?^*
attafdll). It is always of the form Joel af alu, e.g.
Oo j^oc
sa'bun "hard" Elative v^ouol as c abu "harder".
^
kabirun "great" Elative ^S\ akbaru "greater".
4. If the second and third radicals of an adjective
are the same, they are written as one with the tashdld
G
in this form (cf. Less. 23); e.g. joJ^ shadldun "violent"
Tenth Lesson. 59
(radicals jj^) makes its Elative ixif ashaddu; (for
.> * o "E 5 .* >*
jj^il); JsJLs qalllun "few", Elative JJJ aqallu.
^ 5. The Elative as comparative is the sam* for nil
gfcttders and numbers. It is followed by ^ to express
the .Englisn "tfian", e.g. '^^^/s^^i^f^-'ca^..
j+c. ^ fS\ j^ zaidun akbaru min c umara "Zaid
is older than Omar".
s-^-sfj (j-, j\ JJ3> hindun akbaru min zainaba
"Hind is older than Zainab".
oUJt Q, jS\ o _?^\ albanuna akbaru mina
'Ibanati "the sons are older than tjjfi^trGghtei's' ' .
6. The Elative as superlative is always defined by '
the article or a following genitive or a pronominal -
suffix. Its feminine is jli fu'la (see Less. 38, 5. c.), ^>V*
e.g. ^1H? al'akbaru "the greatest" (njasc.) ^'Jxil alkubra fc
"the greatest" (fern.). . Sviz/
O o <* G ' f m
7. The substantives ^> khairuh "good" and li
sharrun "evil" are used as Elatives with the meanings p*^l
"better" and "worse", e.g.
^x/o Jt c> ^J> huwa khairun minka "he is better
than thou'7 >io^.^rx^.
Vocabulary.
*
latlfun pleasant. . _p launun colour.
^ wajnatun cheek. **-*#& saifun summer.
- [ bahrun sea (used **-
: I also for the Nile). ^ sha run bair -
( nisa'un women j^ thaqllun heavy.
; j (used as plur. of
. !/>[) x^,Jwo madrasatun school.
60 First Part.
jami'un mos-
que.
aljarni'u Taz- . j^ (haddun boundary,
haru the mos- I limit.
que el-Azhar *- - jaziratun island.
(in Cairo). ~'^ -\ ?TA*~*. *.*,*.
sharifun , - _,.,
noble. ^ sa llun be ^ ar '
f albariha o o. ^-^^' 7lt; f
- -o* J yesterday , ^j-^ shauqun yearning.
s ; J ' (used in ace. GO,
(as adverb.). ^f- gharbun West.
Exercise 19.
( Less - 7 6 ) ^5 Uaxk!
J ^O.eG.0 JO. 0^>^ J ^ oO,o J O ^ OS
(Less. 7, 6) _jji! ^ot _^>
^ > ^ .,0.0.
^r>x
3 O O ^0*> i - 3*3* O^O<0 J 5 o^
Jo! ^3 J^axJi JoJLi
/aJs
(Less. 36, 7) Lj]
Eleventh Lesson. 61
Exercise 20.
The lame girl is in the yellow room. The girl's '
eyes are blue. - - The black eyes of the girl are killing.
The slave is black. - - The Red Sea is the boundary
of the peninsula (island) of Arabia in the West, -f- The
beggar is deaf and dumb. - - My house is more spa-
cious than thine (thy house), it is the most spacious
of the houses of the city. - The Nile is wider than
the Euphrates.^- This book is better ( ( y>\) than that
(book), it is the best of the books. - - Most men (ff\
literally "the most of the men") are idle. - - My
yearning for (<U cf. Less, 8, 4) thee is more violent than
for thy brother. _
Eleventh Lesson.
The Verb.
1. The Verb (ji fi e l) has usually three radical
letters as S kataba to write, but may have four or
more as *s*3 tarjama to translate, (see Less. 30).
Note. In dictionaries the Arabic verb is found in the form
of the 3^ sing. ma sc. perf. active, while the infin. is given as
the translation of it. Thus we say kataba "to write" although
it really means "he wrote".
2. The 3 rd sg. masc. perf. is of the forms jJis, Jo6
or jj i.e. the first and third radicals always have _
a, while the second may have any one of the three
a, i, u, verbs having i or u are generally intransitive
and denote a state or quality, those wjth ^denoting a
temporary state aa! ^ji)hazina, to be sad; while those
with u denote a lasting, or permanent state as
hasuna, to be beautiful.
62
First Part.
3. The verb has two main tenses: the Perfect
^s.
al-madi) denoting a finished action, and the
3 ~30-.
Imperfect (c .Lill al-mudari c ) denoting unfinished action.
7 V CJ
To these the Arabs add as a third the Imperative
al-'amr).
4. The Perfect Stem is obtained by cutting off the
last vowel of the 3 rd sing. masc. perf., and the perfect is
declined by adding to this stem the following endings :
Sing.
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc. o.
2. fern. o.
1. m.a. f. o-
E.g.
Sing. 3. masc.
3. fern.
,, 2. masc.
,, 2. fern.
1. masc. a. fern.
Dual 3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc. a. fem.
Dual
a 3. masc.
.,
3. fern. Is _ ata
Plur.
3. masc. ! 3 _ u
o
3. fern.
_
na
ta 1. rn.a.f. Ui* _ tuma 2. masc.^' _ turn
i
w -> O
ti
tu
-
2. fern. ^ _ tunna
1. m. a. f. G _ na.
- f kataba he has written,
( (or he wrote) _
katabat she has written.
(katabta thou (man) hast
{ written>
(katabti r thou (woman)
} hast written
katabtu I have written.
[kataba they two (men)
{ haye writ / en
/ katabata they two
{ (women) have written.
I katabtuma you two
} have written>
Eleventh Lesson.
Plural 3. masc. < men >
o fon - <:.; I katabna they (women
3. fern. S haye
*
2. masc. 1^ you(men)have
f ^ n SJO V fkatabtunna you (women)
fern. xxxT j haye written
,, 1. masc. a. fern. ULx/ katabna we have written.
In the same way from verbs of the forms Jot^
fa'ila and jjti fa'ula we have: ^^ shariba "he drank",
* " * y
c^j^ sharibat "she drank" etc.: from ^^u karuma
y o j .,
"he was noble", ^^S karumtu "I was noble" etc.
Note. The endings in the forms above are simply shortened
forms of the personal pronouns used as nominatives except in the
3rd 8 ing. masc. where the a is unexplained, in the 3rd s i n g. f em .
where the at is the fem. ending and in the 3rd masc. plur. where
the u is simply the sign of the plural. (The i in this last ending
is not pronounced and is introduced only to prevent the form
being read at the beginning of the next word as "and".)
The chief rules for the Concord of subject and
predicate are:
Oo
a) When the verb (Jots fi'l) precedes the subject
al-fa c il) then:
1. If the subject is a sing. masc. or usually if it
is a duaJLmasc. or a sound plur. masc. the verb is put
in^the 3 rd sing. masc.
3 t *J&0 ~ *
kataba 'Imu'allimu the teacher wrote.
'/ f kataba 5 lmu c allimani the two teachers
' " ' f kataba 'Imu'allimana the teachers
64 First Part.
2. If the subject is a fern. sing, followed imme-
diately -fcf- the verb, or a dual fern, or a sound .fern.
plur., or a broken plur., the verb is put in. the
3 rd sing. fe_m.
... f katabati 'Imu'allimatu the teacher
( fem ^ wrote
katabati 'linu'allimatani the two
teachers (fern.) wrote.
... f katabati 'Imu'allimatu the teachers
>J^ katabati 'ttalamidhatu the pupils wrote.
3. If the subject is a sing. fern, not immediately
following the verb, or a collective (see Less. 2, 4), the
verb may be in the 3 rd sing. masc. or fem.
kataba (or katabat) lahu
'Imu'allimatu, the teacher (fem.) wrote to him.
3 to 3 O A fO .. **.
nj^ j^LJi (vi^l) J^i akala (or akalati) 'ttairu minhu,
the birds (coll.) ate of it.
b) If the subject comes first the verb must agree
with it in gender and number.
)... * JW..JO.O . . ^
hadara ? lmu c allimuna wadha-
habu, the teachers were present and went away.
6. Sentences according to Arabian grammarians
are of two kinds:
O 0,0 y . O
a) The Verbal sentence (X-JL*aJi XJUii al-jumla al-
j o 05
fi'llya) when the verb (Jmil i) is followed by the subject
(called in this case J^liil al-fa'il) e.g. ^ ^jS kataba
zaidun "Zaid has written".
b) The Nominal sentence filj^ ? idUJ.] al-jumla al-
^ ^OJO
ismiya), when the subject (here called iJO^Ii almubtada 5
Eleventh Lesson.
65
"that (with which) is begun" comes first, whether the
J^- &
predicate (^1 alkhabar) be a noun or its equivalent,
6 ,.. O o.,
an adverbial clause or a verb e.g. jj^ vXi- zaidun
^ Go-
waladun "Zaid is a boy". ^S J^ zaidun kataba
"Zaid (he) has written".
o
Note. The particle Oo qad is often put before the perfect
to strengthen it. It may sometimes be translated
sometimes it may be omitted in translation.
Vocabulary.
I fahima to under- G
gtand
qaulun speech.
tala c a to rise (of
the sun).
/gharaba to set (pf
^ the sun). ^
"
shamsun sun.
qamarun moon.
/ qasada to strive
( after, make for. t<J
sa'ihun traveller.
- - - f dakhala to enter,
go into. &
o ^j^ kharaja to go out.(o)
***
3^ nazala to alight. (0
->
9U ma'un water.
khamrun wine.
naharun day.
?aidun bunt
l abila to receive.
^aifun guest.
.
kasara to break.
kubbayatun glass.
ba ' atha to Send '
^^^ peagant
hakimun governor. -
rajft e a
ba c uda to be distant.
towards, _
^ haushun courtyard.
Arabic Grammar.
s , ^
fni
I about.
ni?fun half. ^
sa'atun hour.
66 First Part.
>3 wajada to find. j ghulamun youth.
2 - f ghanlyun (plur. g) - fV j talaba to seek,
e5f \ rich. v^> j 'require.
lii fataha to open. r ^ ta'amun food.
/ - -
^ _-s fariha to rejoice. u^i> jalasa to sit. ^
, jt^
G J O . O ^ ^ .> O --Oo JO**,*, * *,
JS U ^5
o,
>^0- O- J
? llf lil *Lt7 llLi U ^ Z u7 (Intro. 11,3}
o o - -0-0 --J -o-- - - .>> oS
Ui 'xjL
-0-- -O^, O
[ ooc:^ '^Aail vi^^
-- -- O
(Intro. 9)
^
- -KO-I
,3
Twelfth Lesson. 67
Exercise 22.
The verb is always to be put at the beginning of sentences.
Have you written your letters (plur. k)? Yes, we
have written our letters. The beggar sought food
from nie. - The maidservant opened the door of the
house. Hast thou gone out to the hunt to-day? No,
I did not go out to the hunt, I went into the city.
(accus.). Has the sun set? Yes, the sun has set
and the moon has risen. . .Mohammed and his sons
entered, thf cjty #nd went out (dual) of it. -^ The men
sat. We 'returned from the hunt and sat. - - They
drank (the) coffee. I received the guest at my house
o
this night. maidservant, hast thou returned
from the market? I alighted at the house of
the peasants. girl, hast thou understood what I
say (my speech)?
Twelfth Lesson.
The Verb with Suffixes.
1. When a personal pronoun is the direct object
of a verb it is attached to it as a suffix in one of the
forms given in Lesson 8 e.g. Jsjcj^i darabtuka "I have
struck thee", ^^o darabani "he has struck me".
Note. The otiose I in the 3*3 plur. rnasc. is omitted before
____ L. --- ~-
3 - -
the suffixes e.g. ^ij-jyi? (Jarabun "they have struck me"; and
3
+ - u is added to the 2^ plur. masc. before the suffixes e.g c+.**)r+fA<
^ '&-*..
^j* darabtumtiha "you have struck her". *'-' ** ft'.
68
First Part.
2. The verb ^ kana "to be" is weak (Jjow inu'tall.
See Less. 23, 1) and its conjugation will be explained
in Less. 27, but it is needed so often that the Perfect
is given here.
Sing. 3. masc.
2. masc.
,, 1. masc. a. fern.
Dual 3. masc.
,, 3. fem.
,, 2. masc. a. fem.
Plur. 3. masc.
3. fem.
,. 2 masc.
2. fem.
kana he was.
kanat she was.
kunta thou (in.) wast,
kunti thou (f.) wast.
kuntu I was.
kana they two (m.) were,
kanata they two (f.) were,
kuntuma you two were,
kanu. they (m.) were,
kunna they (f.) were,
kuntum you (m.) were,
kuntunna you (f.) were.
,, 1. masc. a. fern. \jS kunna we were.
3. The Perfect of Q '/ is used with the Perf. of
another verb to express the Pluperfect of the latter, the
subject being often placed between the two verbs e.g.
- --.i 6 - - ' f kana zaidun kataba Zaid had
O { written.
- - } kana 'rrijalu sharibu the men
cr I had drunk, (cf. Less. 11, 3 b).
Twelfth Lesson. 69
4. When ^ is used as a copula its predicate
0- - O o
(j*~> khabar) is put in the accusative (_**2j na?b (see i,
Less. 30, 12), e.g.
f kanat fa^imatu 'bnata 'Imaliki
\ Fatima was the king's daughter.
- - f kana zaidun waladan Zaid was
or i a boy.
- ,? I kana 'Ibustanu kablran the
cr \ garden was large.
5. Any verb in Arabic may govern Jts own Verbal
O ^ Ox
Noun (^j^/j masdar) in the accusative. When an
adjective is attached to this, the two words together are
translated in English by an adverb e.g. r t ^ r l~>i '^.^
fariha farahan 'aziman, he rejoiced greatly (literally
"he rejoiced a great rejoicing", cf. Less. 34).
Vocabulary.
, ' v f taraka to leave,
balagha to reach. te abandon .
khabarunfpl. * t tajirun (pl.^ tuj-
( akhbarun) news. | j aru n) merchant.
khatama to sealn^ n 6 : . J <Jarbun stroke,
*~^ y^^ blow.
3^4 akhadha to take. ~* s ,^ J muhimmun impor-
f tant.
mamlukun (plur.
mamallku)
haraba to flee.
| salitoa to be sound, ^J**
\ whole.
Mamluke.
hazina to be sad. e ^ [hakimun (pi. ll
'^\ t u kkamun) ruler,
huznun sadness. |
governor.
70
First Part.
|
s - J'aliyun All (name (bida'atun (pi. ju
6^ 1
of man).
qatala to kill.
J qal'atun fortress, ^
| citadel.
f salimun Selim, *)6*\" j*
I (name of man).
S->
bal but. -^
Exercise 23.
baclaTu), wares,
goods. \) 3 2.
sarara to hear.
asara to take
prisoner. *Y>/r
/ _.
) 'adtiwun (pi. 8
\ a'da'un) enemy
JX..^
u>
A.X -
c-^ Js.'i o.^"
. G-O ^ O ^ to)
b*Ji l (Less. 7, 2) xi
tf u
Exercise 24.
Have you struck them (fern.)? No, we have not
struck them, the men have struck them. This news
Thirteenth Lesson. 71
(plur.) has reached me. -- The king was just. This
sheikh was learned. Wast thou present yesterday
in the assembly? No, I was absent. - - children,-**"
were you diligent? girl, hast thou understood me?
- I have understood thee. - - The girls were present
and rejoiced greatlyr Her name was Hind. - The ,.,
king took the enemies prisoner and killed them. - - ^
merchants, where are your wares, have you left them
in the house? - Have you heard it? We have
.. oS
heard it. Hast thou (ool) written it, or did thy
sister write it? -- They both wrote it.
Thirteenth Lesson.
The
1. The Imperfect tense (cJc almudari') exp
an action still unfinished and is translated in English
by the present, the future or when used without a
conjunction after another verb by the present participle.
* fc-9-o * f* o"Z 3 sf* ~~ . ^
e.g. ^>1 ^.jjj^x^j y^'uit (j^=>- jalasa 'nnasu yashrabuna
'Ikhamra "the men sat drinking (literally "they were
drinking") wine".
2. The Imperfect Stem consists of the three radicals
of the verb, the first having no vowel, the second
having a, i, or u (the dictionary always tells which is
used with each verb). The persons are expressed by
prefixing ya, ta, 5 a and na to the stem with the
addition in some cases of suffixes also. The Moods
are indicated by adding the vowels u for the Indicative,
a for the Subjunctive to the last radical, which is left
without vowel for the Jussive.
Prefixes and suffixes added to imperfect stem in
indicative mood:
72 First Part.
3 (J + O . ,^O.
3. masc. _ j 3. masc. ,^| j 3. masc. ^ j
) O - .O. .OO-
3. fern. j' 3. fern. ^| j 3. fern. j
JO^ ^0_ 3 O ^
2. masc. j* 2. m.a. f. ^| j 2. masc. ^ j
2 fern. ^ 15 2. fern. &---*
; (j Z i o ^
1. m. a. f. 1. m. a. f. j
Full form of Imperfect Indicative of S u (i.e.
imperf. stem = kiub):
> ><>' /yaktubu he writes (or
Sing. 3. masc. s-^X, ^ will write)
3. fern. ^x& taktubu she writes.
3 ><*,* /taktubu thou (masc.)
2. masc. ^3 \ wrjtegt
- >*- (taktubma thou (fern.)
2. fern. -ai- writest
y 3 o s.
.
,, 1. masc. a. fern, ^jc^i aktubu I write.
.r j >r /yaktubani they two
Dual 3. masc. U^ { y (masc>) write /
r. /taktubanitheytwoffem.)
\ write.
' v^ ,, 2. masc. a. fern. .MUxxj taktubani you two write.
. ^ o . (yaktubtma they (masc.)
Plur. 3. masc. C)J ^ {^ write
.0,0, fyaktubna they (fern.)
3. fern. ^. | J write
- *' \ taktubuna you (masc.)
2. masc. o _^ { write _
^ O y O ^
2. fern. cr^ 3 taktubna you (fern.) write.
1. masc. a. fern. ^joG naktubu we write.
Thirteenth Lesson. 73
3. Ike vq_wel_of ^ the second letter of the imperfect j
stem must oe ascertained from the dictionary. The I
following points however may be noted:
a) Most verbs whose second or third radical is a
guttural (i.e. ^ ^) take a e ** f^ fataha,
y * c* ^ ^ ^ ^
Imperf. gjtfj yaftahu; j^o mana'a "to hinder, Imperf.
-> -O-
^ yamua'u. There are however many exceptions as
>o dakhala "to enter", Imperf. JJoJ yadkhulu; ill
balagha "to reach", Imperf. Qll yablughu; ^^ raja'a^
"to return", Imperf. <L^J yarji'u. k/ - ^ *
c -'-' " c ^^5 " t - / -^7^".-,'
b) Verbs of the form[ joJka'ila generally take J
as yyi shariba "to drink", Imperf. ylLj yashrabu;
exceptions however occur as ^^> hasiba "to esteem",
Imperf. v^*^. yahsibu. (vluli hasaba "to reckon"
makes v^^Lsr' yahsubu). t
-*- HI (
c) Verbs of the form L>i;fa c ula- take _ _ as
karuma "to be noble", Imperf. lyo yakrumu.
4. The Imperfect in itself denotes only unfinished
action, but it may be made to indicate the future by
putting the independent word vjl saufa before it or
prefixing the contraction ^ sa, e.g. ^Jjo vJ>*l saufa
- c I
yaktubu or ^L* sayaktubu "he will write".
5. The Imperfect of o (which generally has, a
futui^mpajiin^ is:
Sing. 3. masc. O-^ y a ^ unu ne w ^ be.
,, 3. fern. ., J^ takunu she will be.
74
First Part,
Sing. 2. masc,
2. fern.
,, 1. masc. a. fern.
Dual 3. masc.
,, 3. fern.
,, 2. masc. a. fern.
Plur. 3. masc.
3. fern.
., 2. masc. (
2. fern.
takunu thou (in.) wilt be.
takunlna thou (f.) wilt be.
akunu I shall be.
(yakunani they two (m.)
\ will be.
/takunani they two (f.)
\ will be.
takunani you two will be.
iyo y akununa they (m .) will be.
^j y aku n n a they (f.) will be.
j takununa you (m.) will be.
j takunna you (f.) will be.
*
,, 1. masc, a. fern. o yCj nakunu we shall be.
6. The Perf. of Q K used with the Imperf. of another
verb gives to the second one the meaning of the Latin
3 * <j * G o ., .. ^
imperf. e.g. ^oeij ^x^j ^ kana zaidun yal'abu "Zaid
was playing".
7. The Imperf. of Q l/ used with the Perf. of another
verb gives to the latter the meaning of the Future-
^^^ 60^ 3 ) *
perfect e.g. ^J^ o^ o-^ y a ^ anu zaidtm kataba
"Zaid will have written".
Vocabulary.
shari'un street,
la'iba to play,
allarm God.
' 5 - ftaufiqun success
j^H I (of God). ^ /
c arafa to know.^>/
f aghniya'u (plur. of
} o
I ,j^::ghaniyun)rich.
;
.
Thirteenth Lesson.
qadrun value. \ , , .
thamanun price.
75
duk
smoke
(literally "to
smoke").
4. Jji hamala to carry.
s r a ... am or (in a
'"' \ double question).
{-1. ,1
O*o- *">
:\j-3 qaryatun village.^ *4
/ ba da , hu aftei "
I wards.
GO
\
r
L v
qabrun grave.
ahadun one (with
suffix ^xilahadu-
hum one of them).
dhahaba to go aw
faina where?
I whither?
/dukhanun smoke,
\ tobacco.
to-morrow.
c ' 4
right.
liammalun porter.
Ihimlun load,
\ ' burden.
zuhrun midday,
, in
the aftcrnoon.
^< s-JJoJ ij^ ^jj
76 First Part.
jt^te ^ !<3Lt o^J u u^xU (accus. cf. Less. 12, 4)
Exercise 26.
Dost thou smoke? I do not smoke. Will you
two be present to-morrow with us? No, we shall be
absent. What does he desire from me? He de-
sires his right from me. The girl sat playing with
us. - - Zaid knew (use Q l/ with imperf.) the sheikh of
the tribe. I did not know him. The porter will
carry the load to (&[) thy house* Dost thou under-
stand what I say (my speech)? -^ No, I do not under-
stand it. The men were present going to the hunt.
When wilt thou return from the hunt? I shall
return to-morrow. Will this news (plur.) reach him?
It will reach him in the afternoon. The king
will be just. The sheikh smoked ( with imperf.)
^ much tobacco. merchant, wilt thou send the
_ wares to my house? The porter will bring them
to thee.
Fourteenth Lesson.
The Moods of the Imperfect.
1. The Imperfect (^l^il almudarf) has three Moods
which are distinguished by the vowel of the third
Fourteenth Lesson. 77
radical. In this it resembles the noun with its three
case-endings. (Hence the .term j'*&* which means
"resembling".)
Note. Arabian grammarians treat the imperfect as a noon,
5
thus, where we should say that the conjunction Q| anna "that"
requires the Subjunctive Mood, the Arab says that the particle
Q! governs the imperf. in the accusative.
The three Moods are:
1) The Indicative ending in corresponding to the
nominative and hence called ? .L\ ,^
C-^r CJ
3 3 (1 ~
almudari' almarfu', e.g. u^Oo yaktubu.
2) The Subjunctive ending in . . corresponding
> > 0^0,0 3 * >O
to the accusative and called uj_^llf c. ,Lcui
almudari' almansub e.g. ^ocXj yaktuba.
3) The Jussive with a vowelless ending correspond-
3 ,0*0* ~30S ** / * /
ing to the genitive and called *;^i! c. .Usl! *^A^
r- / ^ c~>
almudari c almajzum e.g. v^xXj yaktub.
Note. The Jussive originally ended in - - which is now
dropped, but reappears before a word beginning with hamzat
+ + f*x> ) O ^
alwasl e.g. UjLxXJl v^H yaktubi-lkitaba.
2. The Imperfect Subjunctive is declined as follows:
Singular. Dual.
3.
3.
masc.
fern.
>^xXj yaktuba.
- 3 ^
^JoCj' taktuba.
3.
3.
rnasc.
fern.
JjcL yaktuba.
'JjcXj' taktuba.
2.
2.
masc.
fern.
i
w& taktuba.
^Oo taktubl.
2.
m. a. f.
Ljkj taktuba.
1.
m. a. f.
^/JC3'f aktuba.
78 First Part.
Plural.
) ) O
3. masc. [^**J yaktubu.
^ O J O -
3. fern. Q-t^SJ yaktubna.
2. masc. fjlx^i taktubu.
O .> O .,
2. fern. Q-J-^J* taktubna.
., -> O
1. m. a. f. wOXi naktuba.
Note 1. In the 2nd sing. fern, and in the 2nd an d 3rd d ua l
and plur. niascl. tho final Q of the Indicative is dropped. In the 2nd
and 3 r d plur. the otiose I is added at the end except when a
suffix is attached to the verb e.g. sj-^oj yaktuubhu.
Note 2. The Imperf. Subjunctive of Q^ is declined like
the indie, subject to the same changes in the endings as in the
verb above.
3. The Subjunctive is used after the conjunctions
.!.] an "that", T\ alia (see Intro. 9) "that not", J^>
^$*L
V hatta "until, so that", 6 li, jf kai, jJ likai, ^ li'an
' s <S f "go that", iij If alia, (^ ^ li'an la) "so that not", vJ
***flt ^ & 5 DV ^O'*"
fa and 3 wa when they mean "so that", 3 i au when
^~ x i /it means "unless that, until that' : and ..J Ian "not"
^
^ ) o - oS -
used as negation of the future), e.g. ^. o (
an yahdura "he required that he should be
present".
* o. o, , ,. ,
Note. Q] is a contraction for ^1 o_5^ ^ la yakunu an
" ^ n t ^ e that".
Vocabulary.
The vowel after a verb is that of the second radical
in the imperfect.
\ -. -, / kashafa (i) to un- -^ / amrun command,
\ cover, examine. ^ \ affair.
Fourteenth Lesson.
>^
O >
u -
79
amara (u) to com-
mand (takes ace. **=& maujQdun existing.
of the person). , 0- ; ma fqQdun wanting,
I not present.
samaha to allow
(with J for the
person 'and ^ for
the thing).
nazara (u), to see.
f amila (a), to do.
----- -
l ttl
V? /amama before (of
r U )
} '
f 1 , rrcafj .
wa ada to promise
(with ^ of
sirrun a secret.
baina between.
ghucfatun
7 K 7 T'
fsarafa to spend f
(time). C
,
firashun bed.
raqada (u) to slee;,
, ,.. . . .
qasada (i) to intend.
f aqilun intelligent.
^' Exercise
O ^ -JjO-'i ^^O ^^O^O^O^O - O-O
,..i L^J'yoi sJ^Lc U-Ali^ 1 ' ..^ -*XJL -^5 JL i
ij-^o^-o^ ^ ^^o^>-jo^
^vJ o^o Js^> jSUaJl v*^ 2 ^ (S
^ o*O ^^ - . Oj^,^ -- O^) J --OS ^
-x^'JiJ :^> U j o3L
^ JO , ^ > O^O^> . ^ O^> J ^ Co ) 3 & * *
v-JLLiJ q>>>L5 J^iiJi J^'^i ^ ^
3^5*1
^^O^ ^O^ ^ ^ ^Oi i^
*
\l > oj)&
Exercise 28.
We require thee (from thee) (fern.) to be present
(see Less. 16, 6) with us. He entered the bed to
sleep (so that he might sleep). -- The women intended
80
First Part.
to go out of (from) the house. I sent a boy with
him to see what (U) he would do. Mohammed and
his servant intended to go to (.[) the market. - - I
shall return to the house to see what thou art doing.
- I have commanded the servant to appear (be present)
before me. They went away until they entered the
c ity. I have promised him that that shall be a
secret between me and (between) him.
Fifteenth Lesson.
Jussive.
} 3 O *O*> ) * ><Js.
! The Jussive Mood L^j^sitl c^'u^I! almudari c
alrnajzum) has the same forms as the Subjunctive except
that where the 3 rd radical is the last letter, it takes
jazma (sukun) e.g.
OJG yaktuba.
taktuba.
taktuba. ^
Singular. Dua
3. masc.
j y aktub.
3. masc. Li
3. fern.
O JO
j taktub.
^ j
3. fern. Li
2: masc.
'./
: S taktub.
2. masc. L;
2. fern.
; jo
j' taktubl.--
1. m. a. f.
/
? aktub.
Plural.
3.
masc.
3 }
f_^x-<j yaktubu.
3.
fern.
^ yaktubna.
2.
masc.
fjlxi taktubu.
2.
fern.
Jyjo<i taktubna.
O JO-
1.
m. a. f.
^jc^j naktub.
Fifteenth Lesson. 8i
2. The verb ^ in the Jussive loses its^ (see Less. 27)
when the last radical is vowelless (see Intro. 1 3, 3) e.g.
Singular. Dual.
a.
masc.
^Xj yakun
3.
masc.
M5
yakQna
O J *
^ j ^
3.
fem.
^Xj' takun
3.
fem.
liyo
takQna
2.
masc.
j -
^Xj' takun
2.
m. a. f.
r ' -
takun a.
2.
fem.
J^yCj takuni
o >.
1.
m. a. f.
,.^\ akun.
Plural.
> > ^
3. masc. t>>j^J yakunCi
3. fem. ^^Xj yakunna
> ^ ^
2. masc. l^j^J takiinu
2. fem. Xj takunna
1. m. a. f. ^Xj nakun.
3. The Jussive is used:
a) Alone, especially in the 3 rd pers. to express a
o y o ^
command e.g. ^^ yaktub "let him write". In this
sense it is generally strengthened by a prefixed j e.g.
vl,xXlj liyaktub "let him write". If ^ precedes this
particle, the j loses its vowel e.g. ^^4* falyaktub
"so let him write".
b) After i la used for prohibitions (J&ti ^ la
annahyi) e.g. ,.V/^Uv 4 la taktub "do not write".
ylf i la takun gha'iban "be not absent".
Arabic Grammar. - 6
82 First Part.
c) After Lj lam used to deny a statement. Here
o > o ^. o ^
the Imperf. has the force of the Perf. e.g. ^JcXj *J
lam yaktub "he has not written". It is also used after
UJ lamina in the sense "notyet".
d) In the protasis and apodosis of conditional
sentences, (see Less.^7).
Note. The jussive may be rendered more emphatic by
adding anna or an, thus forming the so-called modus energicus
1 and 2, e.g.
Modus energicus I. Modus energicus II.
- (yaktubanna rv , , ,_
H he shall writeoff yaktuban.
' taktubanna Ix^S taktuban.
j taktubanna
o taktubinna ^>^> taktubin.
aktubanna ,-JJtf f aktaban.
j yaktubanni.
j' taktubanni.
i* taktubanni.
.... - o > J o _
Plur. 3. masc. Q>-AKj yaktubunna Q^^XJ yaktubun.
, x . ,, 3. fern. ^l^okj yaktubnanni.
2. masc. ,.~AX*J taktubunna ^JxXf taktubun.
^ o > o ^
,, 2. fern. _lL;od' taktubnanni.
w^JO^ O ^ > G ^
1. m. a. f. cxj naktubanna >.^J naktuban.
Fifteenth Lesson.
83
These forms (not much used) are employed for
exhortation and are often strengthened by prefixing
the particle 3, e.g. ^liCJ layaktubanna "let him **
surely write". They are also usecTafter the prohibitive '
^ e.g. y^te i la taktubanna "thou shalt not write".
Vocabulary.
5
^oLi- janibun side.
o
dlqun anxiety, need.
mana'a to pre
O y y
q^io dukhulun entrance.
t ^
shai'un thing,
^gharibun strange
| pi. ^c ghuraba'u.
daqlqatun minute.
^S'*
- : fghadibatobeangry "
| (followed by Ji). L+)
a(i) to be able.
r t i .*"
Go r /ghairun another
^"^ noun.
) 3 O ^
8jx& another than he.
kadh abaft) to lie.
maudi c un
makanun
P lace -
fa and.
qala to say.
nurun light.
_^
i
Exercise 29.
-* -
o^o LJ
(Less. 16, 4 a) S^l G
*y'
o o ,
84 First Part.
Exercise 30.
*
1 did not (U) know the affair and did not
understand it. boys, do not open the door. -
girl, do not lie. The pupils were idle and did not
(II) write the letter. boys, be not idle. They
heard your speech and did not understand it. - - Do
not leave your friends in (the) anxiety. Do not pre-
., o
vent me from entrance to (jv^s.) you. Be not angry
with me, o girl. - - Let us drink (the) coffee! The
father and his son were not able to return to their house
(. . . . that_they should return).
Sixteenth Lesson.
The Imperative,
OG-O y (j
1. The Imperative \ Jsjts fi c l aPamr is formed
from the Jussive by omitting the pronominal prefix,
but as a word in Arabic must not begin with a vowelless
letter (see Intro. 2) a hamzat alwasl (Intro. 11) sup-
ported by I is prefixed. This hamza takes the vowel
_ if the second radical has _ , but _ if the second
radical has _ or e.g.
kataba, Jussive ^co(j yaktub, Imperative
uktub.
Sixteenth Lesson. 85
O O
daraba, Jussive u^caj yadrib, Imperative
idrib.
jJLo maua'a, Jussive ,-cX+j yamna', Imperative
...<
ix imna
i[ V^-H idhhab ila 'Ibabi waftahhu
"go to the door and open it".
2. The Imperative is naturally found in the 2 nd pers.
only:
Smg. 2. masc. ^jS\ uktub
,o^>
,, 2. fern. t uktubi
-> o>
Dual 2. masc. and fern. L^i uktuba
Plur. 2. masc. 1 uktubu
O J O^-
uktubna.
The Imper. of ^ is:
Sing. 2. masc. ^ kun
2. fern. j^ kunl
Dual 2. masc. and fern, liy' kuna
Plur. 2. masc. UJ^ kQnu
,, 2. fern. kunna.
3. The Imperative is negatived by Si with the
Jussive (see Less. 15, 3 b).
4. Direct address (the vocative) is introduced by:
f m
a) The particle b ya followed by a noun, which,
if it stands alone is put in the nom. without the article
86 First Part.
and without nunation in the sing.; but if it is followed
by a genit. is put in the accus. e.g.. oJ^ L ya waladu
"Oboyl"; JlT jJk' IT ya <abda 'llahi "0 Abdallah!"
(literally ''servant of God").
i5 , -5
b) The particle Lg.jf aiyuha; fern. Lgjol aiyatuha;
r strengthened form L^? C ya aiyuha followed by a noun
^ _ _ - __ __ ^_
in the nom. and always with the article e.g. JwiijT Qt C
ya aiyuha 'ttilrmdhu "0 scholar!"
For further details see Less. 48, 1.
Present Participle.
5. The Present Participle (J^uH ism alfa'il,
_ .
no men agentis) is of the form Js.cli e.g. \^& katibun
"writing",
The Participle is declined like other nouns and
generally has a sound plural e.g.
Masc. Fern.
6 S> -
Sing. nom. wJtf katibun writing x*j*l^ katibatun
ace. Lj'li 7 katiban ,, xol^ katibatan
,, gen. s^.jl^ katibin ,, x*.jl^ katibatin
Dual nom. o Lj'l? katibani { 4$ katibatani
-- 1 '^ katibaini katibataini
o .* *"
. J ^ " - -
Plur. nom. jl^ katibuna oLufe 1 katibatun
acc ' ( V^'^ katlbma oLji katibatin.
gen. u **;,
Sixteenth Lesson.
After O K the Participle expresses a condition in
* . G o^
the past e.g. US* sX^ o tf kana zaidun katiban "Zaid
was writing" thus having much the same meaning as
vlotfu ^ (see Less. 13, 6). ^ ^wj^Z,/* "fj,&.
6. There is no infinitive in the sense of the
European languages in Arabic. The English infinitive is
expressed by a sentence in Arabic e.g. xlvJ .1 jo' jsJb
yaqdiru zaidun an ya'malahu "Zaid is able to do it".
The Verbal Noun.
7. Every verb in Arabic has a Verbal Noun (Jjulo
masdar). In the simple verb this may be of one or
more of some 40 forms. Among the most common
/G"9?\ Go. 0~
are Joej c lun as Jjcs qatlun "killing"; Joe fa e alun (from
, * G.^
verbs of the form Joe) as _i farahun "rejoicing" (from
and 5j*s fu'ulun as jy>o dukhulun "entering",
G > >
^ khurujun "going out", g^JLb tulu c un "rising",
^ nuzulun "descending".
For details see Less. 34.
Vocabulary.
/ sakata(u) _ to be ' T ' labisa to P ut O Q L
\ silentr"^- u : ^ (clothes).
G .
sakana(uj to dwell.
--.# / saiyidatun woman,
thaubun (pi.
thiyabun) garment,
clothes.
( mistress.
? - / wastun middle,
fa ala to do. ja*s j ce ntre.
First Part.
b taraqa to knock at. vjLif ajaba to answer.
zarifun (plur. *lb s f / fa'inna for, (con-
zurafa'u) a witty - * Junction),
person, wag.
Exercise 31.
o - a .cs .
^ ^ ^ oo ^ o
b vjLJf
j Ij
i (what) U HA
*.
lit
-
bj
* G ^ ^
\ o *
Q-,
-x
-^ i -o ^
OsJ>f
J,6
Exercise 32.
See, o boys, what you have done. O friend, enter
and sit by my side. scholar, open the door of
the room. I was going to the city. Whither are
you going? We are going to the market. boy,
come d wn fr m tne mountain. you two scholars,
Seventeenth Lesson. g$
write your twojfitters. girl, speak the truth and
9
lie not. Where is Mr. (j^) Hasan living? V- He
is living in the middle of the city. - - What are you
doing? We are putting on our clothes. - I was
writing a letter, when (vj) our friend entered. Do
not prevent me from entrance to (j^) you.
Seventeenth Lesson.
The Passive.
1. The Acuve^V oice is called in Arabic ^^Ltlt
alma'lum "the known" because the agent is known,
when the active is used as in "Zaid struck him";
the Passive Voice is called j JJffi almajhul "the
unknown" because when the passive is used as in
"Zaid is struck" the agent (the striker) is unknown.
The Passive is formed from the Active by change
of vowels. In the perf. the 1 st radical takes _L, the
2 nd takes _. In the imperf. the prefix takes JL, the
2 nd radical takes -L. All the other vowels are as in
the active e.g.
Perfect.
Sing. 3. masc. -^ $ ur ika he was struck.
-
,, 3. fern. ^>oy duribat she was struck.
2. masc. ^^^o duribta thou (ni.) wast struck.
,, 2. fern. c^fy^ duribti thou (f.) wast struck.
) O i
1. m. a. f. si^te duribtu I was struck.
90 First Part.
Imperfectum.
) - O J
Sing. 3. masc. Vj^ yudrabu he is struck.
J .. O >
,, 3. fern. V/^- 3 tudrabu she is struck.
3 -* o y
,, 2. masc. LJ^SJ tudrabu thou (m.) art struck.
,, 2. fern. Q^y^j tudrablna thou (f.) art struck.
/- o
,, 1. m. a. f. L-jy^l udrabu I am struck.
2. The Passive must not be used in Arabic when
the agent is expressed; thus "Zaid has been struck by
f o y * > *, *. *
Omar" must be rendered by fOyjj ^ ^^o claraba
^umaru zaidan "Omar struck Zaid".
The Passive is often used impersonally e.g. S^>
dhukira "it has been mentioned", or "it is told".
Passive Participle.
3. The passive participle (j^si I [ ism almaf ul)
^
is of the form jjjta/o maful e.g. ujj^jCo maktubun
4i written". It is declined like other nouns and generally
has the sound p]ural.
The Particle [.
4. A Nominal sentence (Xx***ji XJU^> jumla isrniya
see Less. 11, 6, b) is often iutroSuc'ed by the particle
^[ inna "verily", which is followed by the subject
(bo:.*!? almubtada 3 ) in the accus. and the predicate
alkhabar) in the nom. The predicate is often
O
,
strengthened by the prefix Q, e.g. ^j>U l^j ^ inna
O .. s o. 5
zaidan c aqilun or JoUJ fjyj: ...I inna zaidan la ? aqilun
"verily Zaid is intelligent".
Seventeenth Lesson. 91
If the subject is a personal pronoun, it is attached
as a suffix (see Less. 3) to ^t e.g. ill innahu "verily he".
Note. Alternative forms are used with the 1" pera.
w * j
pronoun i.e. ^ innl and ^^ innanl "verily I": lit inns and
Lot innanS. "verily we".
The Particles *J and ^f.
5. The Conjunction "that" is expressed in Arabic: / y
a) By o ? an (see Less. 14, 3) with a Verbal sejitence
- '
(Less. 11)7 the verb being either in the perf. (o^U) or
the imperf. subj. (^jj^uU e^La*) e.g.
^ 2*02?. o ? jy&UH ^lb talaba 'Iqadl an yahdura
zaidun the judge required Zaid to be present (to appear).
Go^ ^ ^ ^ 0-5. jo
sami tu an dhahaba zaiduu
I heard that Zaid had gone away.
If more than one verb is dependent on _t, the w
o ~S
imperf. subj. is used throughout and the o l is not : !
repeated e.g.
"" ^ - - o^^Oi.,^jo^oj ^*> +-&
1 \ amara 'Iwa-
zlru an yahdura muhammadun wayajlisa bijanibihi the
vezir commanded Mohammed to be present and sit
beside him.
b) By . i anna with a Nominal sentence, the noun
_
immediately following the conjunction being put in
the accus. (as with ^!). If a pronoun follows it is
added to t ~f, as a suffix. With the 1 st pers. pron. the
double forms JJ annl and '*1\ annanl, 13? anna and
-s *|.
Lu! annaua are used. ., - Jj ^ V
92
First Part.
If the predicate is a noun it is put in the nom.,
if it is a verb (%ee Less. 11, 6) it is put v in the perf. or
the iraperf. indicative, e.g.
.
joj ^ <j^j balaghanl anna zaidan c aqilun
it has reached me (i.e. I have heard) that Zaid is
intelligent.
yn^T. fjs^ o i (JUl a'lamu anna zaidan yahduru
I know that Zaid will be present.
Vocabulary.
r / dhakara to
\ mention. !*}
( anlsun ami-
| \ able.
\ ,. .
, .-r ,
shajaatun
\ courage.
. -, ,
/ daraba to
; ,\ strike, coin.
[ alqustantim-
yatu Con-
( stantinople.
/ mashghulun
\ busy.
I hadama to.,
| destroy. L U J
waqtun time.
f khatarun
\ danger.
khaufun fear.
/ siratun manner
^ of life.
khusrun loss.
qabila to receive.
rhadlyatun a gift,
J ent
. 3% ,
.,_v, sururuu joy.
i--^ / salahu Mdlni
power-
o ,o. fmajhulun un-
^^ ^ known '
'
G ~*>
ghalaba t
conquer.
f mu'arrikhun
, ,[
8 hasala to wash ' V
salaba to crucify. ^
Seventeenth Lesson.
'* -i fmunajjimvm astro- *- Irifatun liftini; up,
f- \ loger. *j \ raising.
. I qlla (passive of ^j- ^y^
. | qala "to say ).
GO- / khashabatun a
^ najmun star. *-x^> ^ piece of wood
Exercise 33.
O E 9 ^
I O ^ J
O J^S 00^0,
i L[ (Koran, Sura 2, 151)
^
t>* o ^ ^ ,So^o^ .1 s ^-o Ojo ,
^ LLI 8uXP 1 li
(Koran, Sura 103, 2) ^
' \\" \ "' ' ' v " ? * 'r T
j OiJis ^v^p ^ IvAP o,u J^P A! J*x
^ i?i ;
Exercise 34.
The doors of the house were opened. - - The pre-
sent was received with (^J) joy. It is told that Saladin
-*
was a powerful sultan. - - I did not know that you
^ o
were busy today. Was this news known to (j^t)
*
you? -- Truly this news is unknown to us. I know
94 First Part.
that Hasan is the conqueror and that thou art the
conquered. Truly the men mentioned are my friends.
His courage has been mentioned by (JOLC) the his-
torians. Your clothes were washed.
Eighteenth Lesson.
Derived Forms of the Verb.
1. The Simple verb (which alone has been treated so
6s * 3 9 o
far) is called o.^ Jots fi c l mujarrad ("the naked verb").
6 -Go
From this is formed the derived verb x
fTl rnazid fihi litterally "the verb in which is an
increase"). There are 14 forms of this latter, each
consisting, of the three radicals of the Simple form
with the addition of one or more letters and having a
meaning which is a modification of that of the Simple
form. These with the simple form are designated by
the numbers 1 to 15. Of these the first 10 only are
in common use, and the ten seldom occur from any
one root. The forms of a root in actual use are given
in the dictionaries.
2. General list of the Perfects in each of the
15 forms with its modification of the root meaning:
I. Simple form: j*is fa'ala, jo3 fa'ila or t$ fa c ula
(see Less. 11).
Forms increased by one letter:
II. JJS fa cc ala, (with doubling of the second radical).
Meaning: Intensive as Ja5 qata c a "to cut", la5
qatta'a "to cut to pieces"; or causative as jJU e alima
"to know", jU 'allarna "to make to know, teach".
Eighteenth Lesson. 95
\III. jib fa'ala (with introduction of an alif after
the fir&i radical).
Meankig: Relation of the action to a person as J^x/
kataba "to write", oul? kataba "to write to someone";
or Attempt to do the action as jci qatala "to kill",
JJl5 r qatala "to try to kill, fight".
IV. jsiij afala (with prefixed xlakft j+P hamzat
alqat c cf. Intro. 10; the first radical losing its vowel).
Meaning: Causative as vJb* jalasa "to sit",
ajiasa "to make to sit".
Forms increased by two letters:
-v^. Jsjtii tafa cc ala (with prefixed o ta and doubling
of the sfreqnd radical).
MeaningKReflexive of II. as ids qallada "to gird"
Jdii taqallada "to gird oneself'/.
VI. jJiif tafa'ala (with prefixed o ta and alif
introduced after the first radical).
Meaning: Reflexive of III. as Aii qatala "to fight",
jJlia taqatala "to fight one another".
infa'ala (with prefixed hamza and nun
the halmza here and in all the following forms being
hamzat alwasl, cf. Intro. 11).
Meaning: Originally Reflexive of\I but generally
""^ i^*" "** ^ + + O
used as a Passive as \^=> kasara "to break" ',** * t it
j ^
mkasara "to be broken".
VIII. Jotxit ifta'ala (with prefixed hamzat alwal and
o ta introduced after the radical, which loses its vowel).
96 First Part.
Meaning: Reflexive of I as +:>- jarna'a "to collect,
^ - -* o
unite" ^H ijtama'a "to collect themselves, to assemble".
~ *
IX. Joist ifalla (with prefixed hamzal alwasl, omis-
sion of the vowel of the first radical and doubling of
the third radical).
Meaning: Used only for Colours and Defects as
v* .* C
ihmarra "to be red"; _ *^1 i ?wa jj a "to be crooked".
' (L> ==
Forms increased by more than two letters:
X. jJi&uJ istaf ala (with prefixed ^^1 ista and
omission of the vowel of the first radical).
Meaning: Properly Reflexive of IV as pLf aslama
, * o * o
"to give up" JLvJOJ istaslama "to give oneself up".
XI. 3lM ifalla a rare secondary form of IX.
XII. J^*H ifau'ala
XIII. S\ ifauwala rare f ormg occulT i Dg in
certain verbs only with
special meanings.
XV. Ju*M if anla
3. Any verb in the above list that has Reflexive
" ' -c
meaning is called ^ ^IL* mutawi .
4. The imperfect of the derived forms is formed
from the perfect according to the following rules:
a) The prefixes ya, ta, alif, nun receive the vowel
u if the verb is increased by one letter only (II, III,
IV forms), otherwise a.
if'
XIV. JJL^I if anlala
hteenth Lesson. 97
b) The second radical receives the vowel i except
in the forms with prefixed ta (V and VI) when it
receives a.
c) The first radical remains as in the perfect; tin-
third radical receives the vowel of the mood - - u for
the indie., a for the subj., sukun for the juss.
The hamza at the beginning of some forms in the
perf. falls away in the imperf.
Thus the Imperfects are as follows:
Perfect. Imperfect.
II. Jois fa"ala JoiL yufa tc ilu ,
III. ^ fa'ala J^lL' yufa'ilu
IV. jJiM af ala joJb yuf ilu
V. jiii tafa er ala J^*^j yatafa"alu
VI. iciif tafa'ala ^J-c^ yatafa'alu
VII. J*iwi infa'ala J^J yanfa'ilu
5= 4 ^
VIIL Jotiii ifta'ala JoilT yafta c ilu
: ^
IX. jo^ if alia jocL; yafallu ^^^
c
X. \ifi*1 istafala jotioli yastafilu.
5. The Imperative is formed according to the
general rule (Less. 16, 1) from the Jussive by the
omission of the prefixes.
If the first radical thus becomes vowelless a hamza
must be put before it (Intro. 13, 2). In the IV. form
this is hamzat alqat' (Intro. 11) which receives the
vowel a (fatha); in the other forms it is hamzat alwasl
and receives i (kasra).
Arabic Grammar.
First Part,
II.
Jussive.
Jotaj yufa^il
Imperative.
J,^ fa ce il
III.
j&UL yufa/il
J^l5 fa c il
IV.
u; y^
Vjtsl ai il
V.
Jsjsiu yatafa fc al
o ^^^
Jsjiaj tafa"al
VI.
J^Uxj yatafa'al
^ ^ ^
J^LAJ tafa al
VII.
Jotaxj yanfa'il
Jw*ftjf infa c il
^ S
VIII.
Jotiaj yafta'il
Jsjtiii ifta'il
IX.
X.
^ C_
JJLxaj yafalii
- - , Pfi
AjtaX^^j yastafll
JJL*i[ if alii
,yjtic*v| istafil.
6. The Participles are formed from the Perfects
by prefixing a rnlm with the vowel u. The prefixed
hamza is dropped. The second radical takes the vowel
i in the Active, a in the Passive.
Participle Active.
Participle Passive.
O ;;
II.
Jotic mufa"ilun
JotLo niufa cc alun
G ^ >
6 ^ j
III.
j^&iix mufa'ilun
Jw^Ux) mufa'alun
O o >
G ^ o ^
IV.
Jotit* mufilun
Jo^/j rnuf alun
6 w^^ >
G -
V.
^jj&* mutafa"ilun
Jotax* mutafa cf alun
G ^^ y
G ^ ^ ., >
VI.
JvtU mutafa c ilun
J^cLaXx mutafa'alun
G ^ o >
G ^-o j
VII.
Ajt&>u rnunfa e ilun
AotAvl* munfa'alun
Eighteen tli Lesson. 99
Participle Active. Participle Passive.
VIII. J^iL mufta'ilun j^ mufta'altm
s *>
^MA mufallun
O ,0, o >
X.
mustafilun
mustafalun.
7. The Verbal Noun (JXll masdar) of the Derived
forms is as follows:
9 fa ct ala:
3 fa c ala:
from II.
,, HI.
,, IV. JoSF afala:
V. jj& tafa"aln:
VI. J*Ui* tafa e ala:
^ ^,0
VII. Uaj( infa'ala:
Vni. joiist ifta c ala:
5
,, IX. Ajtjt ifalla:
5
,, X. Ajtix^t istafala:
- (fi'alun (more often
l\\ ifalun
tafa cc ulun
J I
tafa'uiun
infi'alun
ifti c alun
ifilalun
istifalun. -
Note the introduction of an alif of prolongation
before the last radical in all except II, V and VI.
Verbal nouns generally take the regular feminine
plural.
100
First Part.
Nineteenth Lesson.
II. Form
1. Conjugation of ^LS "to break to pieces, smash".
Imperf.
Perf. Indie.
Subj.
Juss.
O .* w ^
cy*r
etc. etc.
Imperative
etc.
etc.
etc.
Part, Active
Part. Pass.
v '_> -'
6 o.
Verbal noun ^-yw.xX
In some verbs there is a secondary form of the
Verbal^oun of the form 3l*j' e.g. from ^^ "to
welcome" vjb*- j*.
The Passive is in the Perf. ,^S etc., in the Imperf.
.> ^ j
etc.
2. The form Jots denotes:
Nineteenth Lesson. 101
a) A strengthening of the meaning e.g. '^~S "to
break", ^l/ "to break into pieces, smash".
b) It has usually a Causative or Factitive meaning
(like JJtsf) e.g. JLc "to learn" ^ "to make to learn,
teach".
Note. In these cases, if a verb is intransitive in the Simple
form, it becomes transitive in II. e.g. ^ "to be numerous",
"to make numerous, increase"; while if it is transitive in
the Simple form, it becomes doubly transitive in II. e.g. VJ-?
"to reach", jJb "to make (something) reach (someoneko transmit)".
c) Sometimes it has the meaning of thinking.
esteeming e.g. C>Ss "to lie", ^jSs "to esteem (someone)
a liar", "*SJs "to be sincere" iJJ> "to think (someone) /
"
,
sincere, believe".
d) It is often used to form verbs from nouns e.g.'i
O O ^ i x
from Jd^ "skin, leather" is formed jJb* "to skin,
bind (books)"; from ^JLc ^UJt "peace be on thee"
is formed *J^ ^ " ne greeted him" i.e. said "peace
be upon thee" to him.
III. Form j^l3.
3. Conjugation of ^ol^ "to write to":
Imperf.
Perf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
102 First Part.
Imperf.
Perf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
* 3
etc. etc. etc. etc.
Imperative
o r -
v_oo Part. Active
* etc. Part. Passive
O - G-^
Verbal noun L-jU-f, more usually Kxj'i
Passive, Perf. wo^f Imperf. Indie. v_^.j'lXj
4. The form jili is used to express the relation
of the action to a person e.g. -^jtf "to write", ^ot>
"to write to (someone), correspond with".
It also very often expresses an__^ttemr3t__to_jdo
something e.g. jJs "to kill", J^ls "to attempt to kill,
to fight"; 01^, "to precede", ^jLw "to try to precede,
to compete with^.
5. The Jsili form is always transitive and takes
the Accus. of the Person e.g. xo'K "he corresponded
with him", a&IS "he fought with him".
IV. Form
- ^ o ?
6. Conjugation of y^X^i "to make to sit .
Nineteenth Lesson.
Imperf.
103
Perf.
- - oS
Indie.
> O )
u-1*
Subj.
Juss.
O o >
etc.
Imperative
etc.
etc.
etc.
o 2
etc.
Verbal noun (
Passive, Perf.
Part. Active
Part. Passive
Imperf. Indie.
0,
7. The meaning of the 'Jisf form is causative or
factitive (cf. jU), It makes intransitive verbs transitive
and transitive doubly transitive. ' J ^ "to be present",
s
f "to make to be present i.e. to bring, present";
"to sit", JJl>? "to make to sit, seat".
Many verbs employ both the II. and IV. forms
as causatives, sometimes with different shades of
- ~ - --oS
meaning, e.g. ^-> and ^>t are both used to mean
"to inform"; while JU means "to teach" and lilf "to
inform".
104 First Part,
The jots I form is often used to form verbs_ from
nouns e.g. from ^>uo "morning" ^ol "to do in the
C /. .OS
* morning"; from llwo "evening" ^^^i "to do in the
O ^ O x , OS.
evening"; from p^LJ "Islam" ^JL*! "to receive Islam,
become a Moslem".
Vocabulary.
,
-~ | II. to speak to, ^ f ,
r* { address P (ace.). ff j IIL to defend "
MO tt&rV
- LIII. to treat in a -Js^ to witness, III. to see.
1 friendly way.+ A" J
&to-r,aie,t-vcdt-<j*-nrt*T***2!* o o
II. to kiss. ^-^ half -
IV. to destroy -$^ **** around:
':" w
| to be (literally bit if not, except.
"to do in the
I morning"). ^ ^ Onl 7-
O - 6c
JJWB ramping. /is! horizon.
_?
' -- - Ia5 III. to interrupt.
- ^ oJLr> III. to disobey. j~
k ^os , .s NLy" speech,
yat pi. ysUt command.
J^^f to send.
-a! pi. . xi affair. 6 c - -, n
* ^-^i. ^ J bedoum.
- cr< lU o ^ v
a/* fu^ " J -. I IV x to inform (^
**** \ "concerning"). <^ ^
.- [father (literally ( IV - ^ brin ^ foi> -
^> I "begetter"). ; ' I ward ' P^S nt -
tfoj***. ^ vr I II- t cause to
^, jjlib IV. to become dark. -^ C^ | reach, conyey.C* 1
w ^3 ? ^
! j . uo^ pl- u^v^ robber,
to ask advice of. f
to equip. >^w i)^ ,i^ull; to attack.
f3-1t*f6f-^
W-
,
W-
Nineteenth Leon.
land.
O o ,
jou distance.
j^ II. to seek.
j.L> to be neighbour to.
(IV. to deprive,
( (with two accus.).
jlife, (see Intro. 6,
i Note 3).
f^-t^^v^
III. to watch, ob-
serve.
to cover, overwhelm.
friendliness.
IV. to teat kindly.
egion.
J|^ >
10
to mix, III. to have
intercourse witfi,
(ace.),
J_JL>
- - - f in to frequent the ";jl
F** I society of (acc.).-*jS^
- - - | II. to propose, I ^f^
^ \ manage.
-- - t-.&t**.*^-
jj^s II. to determine.
II. to believe, (a.)*
tojtravel. j-- 4 * ** t - OMfr j^r
peace, greeting.
as, like. ,i^l> < +*-k~
to find.
Exercise 35.
Jib I
?r-
j j^il
,
106 First Part.
)
F
Sb-Jt ;,i
^ ^ o ^ o ^^ -^oo ^o
(Perfect for the English Future) 6l
) wS- j^o^> , * * 3wS >,S jc> oS Oo^ *'.+ * s.o-
^j!^ ^.AJ! ^x>> ^Ji lj| ^j^^ 1 . /M^ ^j s-*^' j^y ^
M > r.
*/ O'*"
(proverb)
^Exercise 36.
I
O servant, bring us the coffee. -- The judge com-
manded them to (that they should) bring forward the
robber. We kiss thy hands. - - Convey to him my
greeting. -** I have commanded thee, o girl, to convey
o .,
.
my greeting to them. I informed him of (^) this
affair, but he did not believe me. - - Do not believe
this boy, o girl. - - The proposing is from men, the
determining is from God. I ask advice of my friends
in anxiety. Thou hast seen many cities and had
intercourse with many peoples. ~ Send that man to
Twentieth Lesson. 107
me so that (J) I may treat him (jjj|) kindly.
Do not disobey my commands. Defence is the right
of (the) man. - I bring thee the good news tlmt
have conquered the robbers. - - We have travelled to
Damascus. Bring in (cause to enter) the physician
Twentieth Lesson.
O o-o y o 5
V. Form J
1. The jiii form is the same as the jj^i with a
prefixed o.
Conjugation of ( Xli' "to take over, receive":!-!;^ '
Imperf.
Perf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
etc. etc. etc. etc.
Imperative
Part. Active
^^ o etc. Part. Passive
108 First Part.
Verbal noun
Passive, Perf. JUo Imperf. Indie.
2. The V. form ,U&' is the Reflexive of the II. form
e.g. *j "to separate", v^'j "to separate oneself,
to scatter"; ^ "to teach" ( JUi* "to teach oneself i.e.
to learn".
It is also used _to form verbs from nouns e.g.
s . o. " . * ,
from .ilwuaj "a Christian" is formed ^aJo "to become
a Christian"; from ^50^ "a Jew", o_^j "to become
a Jew".
It often has the meaning "to think oneself, to
represent oneself as", e.g. ^\S "to think oneself great,
e S ^ 2
be haughty"; LJLj (from ^1 "a prophet") "to represent
oneself as a prophet".
VI. Form.
I jj 3. The VI. Form is the same as III. with a pre-
f | fixed o.
t .* J Conjugation of Jj'Laj "to fight with one another":
\ |5 Imperf.
' Perf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
\ * V *----
, J * 4L isi>vULJiJ
: 1 4*- .,
^ ^ f 1 ^J.j'1-^j
M - *^3o ,
^
J ] ^JliLsj-
3 A.
etc. etc. etc.
Twentieth Lesson. 109
Imperative
Part. Active
e
Part. Passive
Verbal noun
Passive, Perf. Joytf Imperf. Indie.
4. The Jilitf form is the Reflexive of the III, form,
e.g. JJlS "to fight", jjlii "to fight with one another",
therefore if the verb occurs in the Sing, its subject
must be a Plural or a Collective, e.g.
"the men fought with one another";
is Collective) "the people fought with one another".
This form is used more often than V. to rnean "to
as", e.g. ^Lxj "to pretend to be'
pretend to be dead".
*i all (adv. accus.).
- mornng, ace. n s 02
I the morning". ^ also,
necessary, duty. - -
V. to followwocix. - V. to_Jsearate
j to
trace. ^
, TT *JT ^ LJ when, after.
V. A to narrate to
one another, VI. ? j from (the presence
to converse. ^^^ cr i of . . .).
r- I V. to show oneself - ., ,. ..
-V^ ""do, direction.
brave
. &jvt -
- .-
110 First Part.
rr ^
i /ITT i>*--*-<*>
j presence, ap- - - f\V. to wonoer, be
^3=5> \ pearance. ^ I _ astonished. *&,
_ . ft rW~~~ s , % ir 4rxu*^c . '
yCajV. to be grateful. ^M extreme, extremity.
^^r Kpiur. JLQ ;" -j!* JP' V' to
fo? w&U I - ^*ft r^ \teach, Y. to learn.
o. I I | , i f i *** , * )^- tb ^t^wvc'
( tenderJeekng.dW^ J^ medicine.
- - - yxAacs^t, G ' -' ) appointed, speci-
.^>3 V. to remember. upy**? \ g e ^
. '
people. ^ ;. VTto have the
^r" I honour.^ AA*^
-:, - | VI. to meet one ri. *
Jf | another. ^M Christian.
^^^XSS^K' f V. to say farewell
VI. to be TMld.t'**fg&ty { to one another.
Zfui
Exercise 37.
^UJLi ( JL5ol lij
iU3 (about) jc L j -w
,..^oS .o- jjo,^ s - ^ -Jw.^j
^Ju i (from thee) ^V-Ji ^JlLj
^ *^
jo^. j^s^ ^ jo^s -^ s - - .r * <
Twenty-first Lesson. 1U
Uy (Less. 12, 5) viT |
2 S CM>./ , j , , ^
*^>> j*f v5 ^tj ^ eoLaPj
' * " ** " -^
^Exercise 38.
Do you speak Arabic? No, we do not speak
Arabic. - They did not speak with us. - We con-
versed about this affair. - - Hast thou learnt what thy
teacher has taught thee? - - Yes, I have learnt it. ~
Ihese pupils learn the science of medicine. Do not
speak thus, o child. - - They separated from one another
that they might follow the way and meet at (3) an
appointed place. I was greatly astonished (I was
astonished the extreme of astonishment) at (^) him.}
Truly we are exceedingly grateful (we are grateful the
excess of gratitude). The Moslems and the Christians
fought with one another. - - We said farewell to one
another so that we might disperse.
Twenty-first Lesson.
VII. Form.
1. Conjugation of ^J$[ "to break" (intransitive)
Imperf.
erf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
112
First Part.
Imperf.
Perf.
^ - x-
O ..wAj i
Indie. Subj,
J ^ O ^
-s**J\'l ,
Juss.
O,
j o ^ ^ o
o
u_.wAjl _AV^XJ
etc. etc.
Imperative
etc.
o ^
etc.
Part. Active
Part. Passive
Imperf. Indie.
etc.
9 .0 ,
Verbal noun
Passive, Perf.
* 2. The VII. form is originally the Reflexive of the
Simple form, but generally it contains the idea of
allowing some action to be done to one i.e. it has a
Passive sense as ^.^ "to uncover", ^a^XH "
' uncovered".
~&> f 3. The VII. form is wanting in all verbs that
* begin with hamza, waw, ya, ra, lam or nun.
VIII. Form.
4. Conjugation of +>-[ "to assemble".
rj s^tC'-jy Imperf.
Indie.
Subj.
Juss.
o ^ o ^
Twenty-first Lesson.
Imperf.
113
Perf.
Indie.
Subj.
Juss.
> ^ o S
J**H
etc. etc.
Imperative
etc.
.,
Verbal noun
etc. etc.
Part. Active
Part. Passive
Imperf. Indie.
Passive, Perf.
5. The ta introduced after the first radical under-
goes certain changes:
a) If the first radical is one of the emphatic letters
* o 3 * o^, J, Ji?, the ta is changed into a _b; this is
assrmiiated 'fo' a Jj or jb which is then written with
tashdid e.g.
strike" forms
"to be dark" forms
"to make" forms
"to
u to rise" forms iit;
and
b) If the first radical is o, p or j, the ta is softened^
to o; this is assimikted to a^t\ which is then written **,*
- _ ,o ^:.^
: forms
>o forms ^^Jt and
c) If the first radical is e>, it sometimes asslmifates
the o e.g.
Arabic Grammar.
f " '?. * ' s .
lorms ic^vXil or o^ui.
&
114
First Part.
6. The VIII. form is like the VII. the Reflexive of
the Simple verb e.g. from *j> "to collect" is formed
^ ^ o
*x>!. "to collect themselves, to assemble"; but has
also the sense of doing a thing for oneself e.g.,_from
vl^ly "to acquire" is formed ^J^S\ "to acquire for
I oneself". Sometimes it has a reciprocal meaning e.g.
"to strive", L^>\ "to strive with one another".
** *&# if,"
to divide.
division,
S* t"A4
(Vni. to approach
} (with *&). jl
-y ^^
seel behold!
number.
Vocabulary. n +~?^
' lIL to be
..exerienced.
- -r f VIII. to beseech ( o
J^ \ someone).
excuse,
viJi! VIII. to apply to.
a porter, bearer'
book, letter.
f to strike, VIII. to
| be excited.
plur. Jo[}S> feeling.
hearing.
Go
plur.
(adv.), much, .very.
Jas to cleave, rend.
_. -
*.^to
to inflame.
VII. (literally "to
be widened" of
the breast) to
rejoice.
(VII. (literally "to
extend itself), to
I be pleased.
V. with
to do
a favour, to be
generous to.
*jt: (to look. VIII. to
> 1 expect.
reward. .A
jJ
deed.
to lash, flog.
a
Twenty-first Lesson.
o
& youth.
lean
bourhood.
115
*.; f nearness, neigh-
^ 5 I
G o -
army
6- -
G o
VIII. to confess
(something
AC/ 1
truth.
foot.
/ 1. and Vm. to
I tremble.
fear,
whole, all.
fi. to help, iii
- - : J
/S mil
- J*.T--
conquer (literally,
"to be helped"
>y
to think.
. to honour;
- - : f VIII. to busy one-
' \ self, work.
[VIII. to crowd;
^j verbal noun, "a
I crowd".
3 * C>f - OJ O
B !*3i
Exercise 39.
U -
^ ^
o bi
/Tl r^\ ~-.-o ^O-
(Intro. 9) ^LJL^>[ x^
'
cr
*
116 First Part.
..
O ^ ; s v - -
/^o,o ^ .> ., w
l^Hxo! ^ ^l lijJt 3
j.JsJij '^^Li
("from fear" adv. accus.) l^3
Exercise 40.
Do not approach us. We assembled in the neigh-
bourhood of the city. Do not expect us. We were
exceedingly pleased that you were present with us.
The army of the Sultan was defeated (broken) and the
Christians conquered. Think not that thou hast con-
quered us. y- Truly, he is honoured by all. We are
diligent and work much. There was a great crowd
in the streets. The feelings of the men were stirred
as they heard that. Work and do not play, o children !
Twenty-second Lesson.
IX. Form.
1. Through the meeting of two similar letters at
the end of this form certain assimilations and con-
tractions take place in the conjugation, The rules for
these are given in Lesson 23.
,, 3. f.
2. m.
11 2. ,, f. ,"rt**&
Dual 3. m. n lJ^
^
)> 3. f. cM fj4-s5
- o - * o
Twenty-second Leason. 117
Conjugation of 1^. "to be or become red".
Sing. Dual Plur.
3. p. m.
3. f.
2. m.
2. f.
1- n
Imperfect. Indie. Subj. Juss
Sing. 3. p. m. I^_. ^^r
Plur. 3. m. ^i:. j^^ U^'
118 First Part.
Imperfect. Indie. Sub}. Juss
Plur. 2. , m. ' '
w ^ O
Imperative.
Sing. 2. m. Dual. 2. |. Plur. 2. m.
w.-O .. O ., ^ G
2. f. ,c+**\ 2. f. i
&
Part. Active -^
^
Part. Passive not used.
Verbal noun ^^-\. Passive not in use.
2. The IX. form is used only for Colours and Defects
(for the corresponding adjectives see Less. 10, 2), e.g.
Ov*t to be or become black.
& ,, white.
" " "
ILLt green.
crooked.
The very rare form XI. vilaM is according to some
a stronger, according to others a weaker form of IX.
w + O
e.g. U^l "to be or become red".
Twenty-second Lesson. 119
X. Form. i^l^JitTsiJ ~
3. Conjugation of ^llsCf "to esteem beautiful" :
Imperfect
Perfect Indie. Subj.
Indie.
> 0^0.,
Juss.
O - ,
y c^o^ ^ o .. & ., & 0*0^
^ C ^ ..
.. ^
., ..
o ^ oS
o o ^ oE
etc. etc.
Imperative
etc. ^
O ^ o
O o -
0^0
etc.
Verbal noun ,
etc.
Part. Active
Part. Passive
Passive, Perf. ^*JsilT Imperf. Indie.
4. The X. form:
a) Is originally the Reflexive of IV. e.g. ^jL] "to
give up" ( JLlil| "to givre oneself up".
b) Denotes "to desire or ask for oneself" e.g. yii
"to pardon" 'J*xL[ u to ask pardon". ('*^S&
c) Denotes "to esteem or think" e.g. ^~+> "to be
beautiful" ^Ij^Lt "to think beautiful" J^s "to be
,.
120 First Part.
disgraceful" ^xJ&*,t "to esteem (something) disgraceful,
G s
wrong .
d) Often has a Causative meaning, e.g. vjd=> "to
^ o ^ o
swear", u^Jb&wf "to make to swear".
Vocabulary.
^ti t G o ^ G .> .
-Z Loo world. -ya, plur. ^^ meadow.
to bT wg, x. to
esteem great, im-
fX. to esteem l P ortant -
^ \ forbidden.
opinion. - : I to serve X. to take-
* nes service.
~ G ,,
> X. to enquire ^Ji> government.
v
v J^c X. to use.
j X. to receive. "
Jtet&jzjLk s* , li reed, pen.
future. ^ hard> difficult .
O , > ^
M i if God will. ^> X. to enquire.
>
Exercise 41.
^Oi<o M^&^> ^1 J -O-o ^^ ^ w^
*i LL
j/^I (Lesson 9, 6 P) U jJ^ C
)*'*>' * t>eQ **> ** * CO JO^-x- W^C^
LJu 'ol
x-
- IjJJtS Lo
CT
ItXP
Twenty-third Lesnon. 121
co o
(Less. 12, 5)
Exercise 42.
Do not esteem this event important. girl,
why hast thou become red? - - I saw the men become
pale (white). - - Do you think right (beautiful) what he
has done? No, we think it disgraceful!,--- The plants
have become green. %ft I have taken this slave into^-
service. -- He is taken into service by the government V
They have received this foreigner well (a great re- ''
ceiving). - - Do you use this pen?/- No, we do not
use it, its use is difficult. Do 'you think it right
that I should take this man into service? I think it
wrong. -- Enquire concerning (^) this matter. - - He
went out to the reception of the vezir.
Twenty-third Lesson.
Classification of Verbs.
1 . Verbs are divided by Arabian grammarians into :
a) Sound jLl *vi).
b) Not sound (^JlL 'j J*)- '%
These latter are again divided into: ' JkV 1
. v^J^
Jots i.e. the Correct verb comprising (a)
"Doubled verb" i.e. the verb in which
the 2 a and 3 rd radicals are the same
122 First Fart,
'Harnzated verb" i.e. the verb in which one radical
is a hamza.
8 ^ o > Go
II. jjjw Jots the "Weak" verb in which one of
the radicals is a waw or a ya.
Note. The terms ^* and &^ are often used as identical.
In this case the doubled verbs and harazated verbs are regarded
as Sound. The terms Regular and Irregular are sometimes used
loosely for Sound and Not sound. This use should be avoided
as all these verbs follow certain laws, though they suffer some
changes of form due to the laws of contraction and assimilation.
Doubled Verbs.
2. The following rules govern the conjugation of
verbs whose 2 nd and 3 rd radicals are the same letter:
I. These two identical radicals are written as one
with tashdid (or as the Arab grammarians say *Uol
* 'assimilation" takes place):
a) When the 1 st and 3 rd radicals have vowels (are
^J<=\A "vowelled"), in which case the 2 nd radical loses
its vowel, e.g. jo from JJo; Jijo from c>ib; 3o from
JJo (Pass. Perf.); io from ijo (Dual Perf.); jfo from
jjfo (III. form); 5 to from J.Jio (Part. Act,).
Exception: The Pass. Perf. of III. is JJ.o.
ParftW*^ 1 o '
b) If the first radical is vowelless (^L) and the
3 rd radical has a vowel, in which case the 2 nd radical
w J ^ ) y o ^
gives up its vowel to the 1 st , e.g. jjo from JJjo.
II. When the 3 rd radical is vowelless, the 2 nd retains
0.0
its vowel and contraction LUoi) does not take place,
e.g. 2. Perf. Sing. Masc. Perf. ^IJo; Juss. JJjy Imper. JJoi.
W^Afc^tf^i^ ^ - 1
* &** *** "'
Twenty-third Lesson^' 123.
*-, /j> '*-*/ <- <T. *MW. ~r<i-*Jfc.
; 5v^i^ i ^ a 2 t ,te/^tTf:^^ftAr ~ -
Note 1. Doubled verbs of the Jo and oii form are thus ^^^
only distinguished from those of the Jois form in the uncon- *
*.'->* O
tracted forms, e.g. Jwo (= JJLo) forms in 2nd gi n g t Masc. Perf. c>JUL^. A **
Note 2. In the Jussive mood and in the 2nd Sing. Mate.
Imperative contracted forms occur very often. In these cases,
to prevent two vowelless letters coming together (Intro. 13, 3)
at the end, the doubled letter takes a vowel (either fatha or
kasra, or flamma w hen the Imperf. has damma), e.g.
*>->* it i ^ 0^0*
Jussive: OJo, 0Xj and 0-Xj beside JJ^J.
a >' Q >ei-
Imperative: uO beside JJol.
& >oi.
The other forms of the Imper. are formed either from JJot
JCi- *3(ji- * > Cii- ?, ) , 5 j JJ ,
as JJOf, ^Uol, IjJlbl or from ^O as J.O ^J I^Jo but always
III. When the 2 nd radical is separated from the i ^
3 r ^ by a long vowel, no contraction can take place, p
e.g. Part. Pass. JyjJ; Verbal noun of IV.
3. Conjugation of J3 "to show"> fj^Jj
Perfect.
Sing. 3. m. 33 Dual. ^o Plur.
_. -
,, 2. m. ^
1-
Imperfect Indie./-' i, Subj. Juss.
or
or
124 First Part.
Imperfect Indie. Subj.
V***
Juss.
tjJJ
Imperative.
or
or
or
or
Part. Active
Part. Passive
Twenty-third Lesson.
Passive.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss.
ool jJoi
etc. etc. etc.
Derived Forms.
Perf. Imperf. Imper. Part. Act.
II. jiS
III. Ji3
^' '0' / ' *
(Passive; JJ 3
IV. 33!
v."~ ' iij "" '
VI.
VII. ' '
v s -o i, ,o. o-o S.oj '.
VJ11. v^Jlxj i-XX^ O<JOOot ' v "->.-* OjOOoflt
(The VIII. form of J^ "to stretch out" is given
here, because in the VIII. form of 3o there is assimi-
lation = 33( (see Less. 21, 4, b.)
126
First Part.
Perf. Imperf. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
IX. Seldom occurs.
X.
Vocabulary.
ft, *,****
.. ,K>* C
O .,
+S then, thereupon.
( (u) to stretch out,
3J I IV. to help, VIII.
extend.
-'-
tablecloth.
as (with genitive).
custom.
Bedouin.
((u) to narrate ("to"
narrative, story,
history.
f(u) to collect, VII. to
~^ ' U. CtS :~ i-jo^u>-i,
f* | join (with ^)J
_ | (u) to count Iy . to
prepare , 3t. to
prepare otfeself.
pi. l&j coiiipanion
journey,ystart.
pi. ^^> horses,
i) to' be settled.
-4-
determination.
V. to go. t l* /f*fi^
O > y
pl. 0^X5* boundary.
- f uncle (on the
c i father's side).
people.
III. to make war.
SJiFrench-
man.
6 -
| (i) to determine
1 (with ^).
Cairo.
f (u) to injure, VIII.
{ to compel.
u) to think, be-
lieve, esteem.
time, fate.
to be cheerful.
IV. to love. 9
extensive.
f subjects (of a
[ kingdom).
T \vi-Mty -third Lesson.
127
((u) to loosen,' VII.
{ to become loose,
slack, feeble.
to be mad -
. pi-
possble. -
(u) to
j u V^> fc ^
VIII. to refuse.lgT^
((IV.) to urge (upon
mad -
60,
( to be new, V. to
1 be renewed.
6 ~_
pl. jUl hope.
f I V. to feel, perceive
\ (with ^J]. (i-n-ncy*.ccvs
+
cold.
valley.
to surround.
tree.
| mulberry (collec-
1 tive).
fig (collective).
vineyard,
I % A ~- I ..I *
but.
pl. ^Uc intelligent.
heat.
(u) to pass by. (-;
| (plur. of ^o "a
I
\ dirham") money.
f (u)to strike, knock,.
I ring.
bell.
fr
^IV. to complete.
to be little, II. to
make little.
a ^ | to be strong, VIIL
Xii J to strengthen one-
ll\ [ self.
X. to deserve,
to ride.
Exercise 43.
128 First Part.
' V *
UJ l
5 j o ^ ^ ^ i o-o o^- ^o^^ jo;;o ^^
UJ
is tt AiA^.
(adverbial accus.) I j3j *^ jjy^i -/> t*
> O ^ ^ O J S, ^ Cj , * >ff.O&^)QZ'
UJ
-^.Exercise 44.*^
Have you felt the heat? Yes, we have felt it.
Hast thou passed by this place? I did not pass
by it, but I will pass by it to-morrow, if God will.
Do you believe that he will appear before the judge?
We do not believe that. The rich people count
their money. We have prepared ourselves for the
Twenty-fourth Lesson. c/ (^,5* 129
journey, f- Do you think him a brave man? - I
thought him a brave man, but to-day I do not think
i ^
him so (e^JjN^). Thy presence rejoiced us. We
are glad (rejoiced) of it (). - - Ring the belli The
boy did not complete his speech, when (J>) his father,
entered/ -- Do not speak much (make little thy speech).
I loved her very much (a strong loving). He
loves her and she loves him. - - The heat was too great
for us (strengthened itself on us). - - This city extends
to the sea. - - He deserves a great reward.
Twenty-fourth Lesson.
> o o-o^ > ;j ,, j c - 5
(0^3 >.ljH u-jJJJ)
The Hamzated Verbs.
o^o-o .> o
1. The Hamzated verbs are of three classes according
^to whether the hamza is the first radical as in Jcif "to
take"; or the second as in 3tl "to ask"; or the third
as in Li "to read".
2. In the conjugation of these verbs the following
rules are employed (cf. also Intro. 10):
a) At the beginning of a word the hamza is always
written with alif e.g. 3^>f, Pass. Perf. Je>|.
b) If it comes at the end of a syllable and has
no vowel, it is written with alif after Yatha, with ya
after kasra, with waw after damma e.g.
Jv~>b (Indie. Ircperf. I.); JeL^j (Indie . Imperf. Pass. I.);
c^X*^ (1. Sing. Perf. Pass. I. of Li "to conceal"); c
Arabic Grammar.
130 First Part.
(1. Sing. Perf. I. of ti "to read"); ^ (Part. Act. IV. of
^,1 "to be true, believing").
. c) If it has kasra or damma and follows fatha it
is written with ya or waw e.g. ^^Jj "to despair"; ^^
"to be brave". *
Exception. At the end of a word it is written
with alif even when it follows fatha e.g. T-AJ (Imperf.
Indie. I. of \}.
d) If it has fatha and follows kasra or dam ma, it
is written with ya or waw ^e.g. ^jJ^j (Imperf. Indie. II.
of JLJ!); Jj^ (Part. Act.); ^o (Perf. Act. I.).
e) If it has kasra or damma and follows a vowelless
letter, it is written with ya or waw e.g. ^Lu or o w^Lu
(Imperf. Indie, of ^^o); (jy^. (Imperf. Indie, of <j*jj);
> - > - - 9
u (Imperf. Indie. III. of jLw); JoL* (Part. Act. I.).
f) If it has fatha and is followed by the alif that
lengthens the vowel, the latter is written with mad da
(see Intro. 12.) e.g. 3viT (Perf. III. of J^f); JL>T
(Part. Act. I. of the same). If however it has fatha
and follows an. alif that lengthens the vowel, it is written
independently e.g. isLL (Perf. III. of JlL).
g) If a hamza is prefixed to the first radical and
that radical is a hamza, then two hamzas will come
together, in which case alif with madda is written in
place of both. The III. form and the IV. form will
thus be identical in the Perf. e.g. ^1* (IV.) "to believe";
(IE.) "to blame".
>, ft4V^*
v^ r , t _,, * r*t
Twenty-fourth Lesson. C*** 4 *, 13 I
If the prefixed hamza has kasra or dammn, the
hamza of the root is changed into the y& or waw that
lengthens the vowel e.g. O U^ (Verbal noun of IV.);
j4i (Imper. I. of jjil); Jjt (Imper. I. of '/!); y,i
(Perf. VIII. of ^ "to quote").
h) The Verbal Noun of the II. form takes the
form *Luj in verbs of which the last radical is hamza
e.g. idyij (Verbal noun II. of ]').
2> 3. Peculiar forms of certain special Hamzated verbs:
a) The verbs 3^>1 "to take", Uj "to command"
and $\ "to eat" drop the first radical in the Imperative
of the I. form e.g. JU> "take"; Fern. ^Jvi, Dual
etc. p> "command", J* "eat".
b) The verb <JU, has in the Jussive a regular form
? " oo^ o^^
OL^o (written also J^-wu) and a form Jo*u with omission
of the hamza. So in the Imperative jj- (as well as
jilJ), Fern. J,l etc.
c) The verb 3J>1 in the VIII. form assimilates
the hamza to the following ta e.g. A^M; Imperf.
Indie.
" ***.**
^wdi
4. Conjugation of verb, the first radical of which
is hamza:
'to get
132
First Part,
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj.
Juss.
JJI
b
Jjlj
^
oJ!
etc. etc.
Imperative
etc
Passive Perf.
v_AH
etc.
Part. Active
Part. Passive
Imperf. Indie.
etc.
"to hope": Imperf. Indie.
Imper.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
\ "to quote": Imperf. Indie. ^ Imper. yj|.
Derived Forms.
Perf - S ip- Part - Act - I l
jj?
o ^ O .
or &
O , 6 .
^^
f I ..
v_ AJ UU
T\yenty-fourth Lesson.
w V^T?
133
Perf.
*"P-
VI.
;. Act.
o . ,
Noun.
o t
VII. Wanting in all verbs beginning with hamza/ 3
waw, ya, ra, lam, nun. (fuc
VIII.
X.
\
\
Vocabulary.
to appear, IV.
to show.
III. to be friend-
to take, III. to
blame, VIII. to
take for oneself
f III. to be inti-
1 mate with.
to_bejtrue x safe,
IV. to believe
(in religious
sense).
firr ,
[ properly
(plur.
-angel.
.
| apostle,
resurrection,
religion.
| the day of
I judgment.
III. to travel.
, possessions.
> bread.
L beggar.
to be satisfied.
( to hope, V. to ob-
serve (with j of
( thing.
food.
manner.
bedouin (adjective).
| (sound plur.) rnove-
{ ment, v^ve'. (?./**.
sick, ill.
1
to make an impres-
sion, V. to bo in-
fluenced, affected.
lJTJ0*St/^Tf ftY [
134 First Part.
-
oi killing.
>if to be late.
astrologer.
.
invitation. ftfc j IV. to let (for
,... /^ 1 hire).
condition. v s -
^
,, , ->LLl to
to allow some- <> ' i
thing LJ or oos
v_ftj| thousand. >,-
J,), X. to ask
(&. (pi. (>-) piastre,
for permission. V 7 ^
^ 2 | to assure, V. JJ] to edit.
j^=>f < to be assured, . 3 _ t
(certain. ' ^ J (pi. , ^|j>) watch-
word. ^ man :4/.-r
',- ,. ,. v_^ls to prepare oneself,
jj^j* is dictionary.
- T r (I^r'toMet ^v^ way ,
jkifT <JLh btrfM*-*' vl!/3/yii T i - ,
^ < ->T~^,'^^''' OT '" rfJ (_7 s>j r c ; loose, shoot,f*e, s >
M^M JA^X injurious
o 3 .L powder, gun.
II. to jgeet. + v
s - ) (plur. o y^>)
p^ \ thought.
Commander.
oftheFaith-
~:' | ful, (title of
( the caliph).
/ / ^ _
^ ^^"^
Exercise 45.
_O^) O^O^) ^ Jj-
(Moslem creed.) ->^\
Twenty-fourth Lesson.
? } )* * lit** OS -o . - & i - - J J ^
~> A)-O c\>J 3 JJJ! j
.. o , o ^
5i ^- J ^ o M
i oj^oi -y s^jJi
'
o - j Q r j JT or
o t
A ytbi
o
Ji (adv. accus. "in order to'')
G > ^ - 0^5 ^ I ^ *. >
ji.fr
o ^ ^ o J , o,, jw-o -2
*- ^
136 . First Part.
/^ Exercise 46.
Have you taken the money? - - No, we have not
taken it, but we will take it now. Eat and drink
until thou art satisfied. Take the reward of your
work. They both seated themselves to eat. - - I
think that 1 am affected by the heat. / He hopes that
his father will command us to appear (that we appear).. _
- Excuse us for our lateness. -'We came forwards
to ask permission of the Commander of the Faithful*/
to come in to him, and he allowed us that.; - Truly
this book is the work (editing) of the sheikh Mohammed.^
Do not blame us. - - Eat with us. --We discipline
the lazy scholars. -r- The discipline of the lazy scholars
is the duty of the teacher. - We do not blame (with
us is lack of blaming). - - We spoke pleasantly to him "
(we were friendly with him in speech). He took
(VIII.) a house.
Twenty-fifth Lesson.
1 . Conjugation of verb the second radical of which
is hamza.
to ask".
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj.
-> o ^ o ^ ^o_ ^ o ^
u (also written J^^vu) ol*u
etc. etc. etc.
Twenty -fifth Lesson. 137
Jussive.
/E o ., o o - G ,
or
etc. etc.
Imperative.
o o
(also written X-/J) or
=>
o o
etc. etc.
Part. Act.
Part. Pass. ^j..w^> (also written j^-*** or
-* ^ > o ) )
Passive Perf. J^^, Imperf. Indie. oLwj (also written Js
Example of the form joti: ^^"to be cast down".
Imperf. Indie. u>Uu (also written u^IXj)
o o O o
Imper. ^
^ > * * i>*
Example of the form Joe: L V^J "to be brave".
Imperf. Indie. (J*^H
o &o-
Imper.
188 First Part.
Derived Forms.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
,? * Jw-J O v* .. 6w^J >
IL
) ., ) O . 6 , >
III. J*L.
o ) o .> o o 6 o .>
IV. JL.I
,i . j>? . .. o t ^ , 6 . , e?..
V. JLo
VI.
VII.
VIII.
(from 1^1 ''tobmdup a wound'* as this form of
3Ll does not occur).
IX. does not occur.
^o ^.o ^o^o^ oo.'o 60. o J 6o , o j
-A.. .OL/ M VWl ^.xXx^VsJ ,*./JXV< 1 A>xXxAVyX >.
E I - I * I I
Verbal
II. J^vo' IV. 3tlt VI. 3^Uo VIII. f (zz,
S o
%* * y <*" * ^ G.o
III. xJsLwc V. ov^j VII. oLLwvJI X.
l ,. S
2. Example of verb, whose third radical is hamza:
\j* "to read".
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
IJG
Twenty-fifth Lesson. 139
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
*..
oiJ>
^
etc. etc. etc. etc.
Imperative
Part. Active , c
>
'i\ etc. c/ f /^> Part. Passive 9Jl
A*"*"" f J p. J R>OJ
Pass. PerL ^c-s Imperf. Indie, iyb
o ^
jj etc.
Conjugation of verbs which take kasra in the
Imperf.: ti? "to be healthy", Imperf. Indie. L5 >^j, Impe-
rative ^3>\.
Conjugation of verbs of the form Joi: ^j^=> "to sin".
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper.
etc.
etc. etc.
140 First Part.
> *
, *
Conjugation of verbs of the form Jod: ^Lj "to
be slow".
erf. Imperf. Indie. Imper.
I/
etc.
etc. etc.
Derived Forms.
Perf. Imperf. Inclic. Imper. Part. Act. P^rt. Pass.
s . i> ~.y t~ 9 ^ 9*.,
II. ti
..
in. r,is
S-o
IV. JyjJ
9 ..
_____
V. i .Si*
^ .~ &. .. 9 .^^ 9. --
vi. yjc x y _ y
_o * -*- -o 2 v
VII. tJijt (j^Jio (j^jij!
o
^o > ., o^ . *o f.
TTTTT f .... ..v
Vlll. )j^3\ (JVT^
IX. Does not occur.
X**r. * ^ * ** .. .. > ."...
. )jix^.l /C-AXAVsJ ^CaX^^l /^Jix/^wO )_Rx*Ws^O
Verbal Noun.
V.'lot VI. 3JUi' VIII.
. ,-r~ /
O^ *3 9w^- - O
V TTT f I T7 ... ' "\7TT <r t t "V
111. ),lJi V. *.aj ' VII. 9)joi A.
Twenty-fifth Lesson.
141
ni* <**** Vocabulary.
II. to help, give
success (only of
. to
*
III. to^addre
(plur. ^ dr
ea'iii.
. '-f. .
3- (plur. r l^i)imagi-
' ( nation.^-
(pass.) to be regarded.
J & <& AA**.-** &**.
III. to reward.
II. and IV. to
announce (with
j accus. of person
( and <^ of thing).
ambassador.
VIII. to flee.
Said (name of man).
( to be enjoyable
(of food), 'II. to
I congratulate.
sleep,
return.
philosopher,
to make.
Abyssinian.
f (with pronominal
{ suffix) perhaps.
good (noun), better.
price.
(plur. *5'!^s) fruit.
need.
y (i) to pardon.
guilt. ^
to fill.
vat, cask.
apples (collective),
immediately.
VIII. to begin,
arrival.
| II. to bring, V. to
1 come forwar
(to grow up,
I IV. to set up ; j
sound, (adj.).
passing.
142 First Part.
Exercise 47.
o 2
ol -
^ ^^ ..
JW - LgJ
j CT ^
-> J
>jy
O J . , .. f- 33 ^ 3~*>f. O., *'**..,
Jc^ ; ki . lll
',. S ^^ *o--. j^o^ *
Lix>j> J.^j:! jls ji*aj U
& J ^ ^
Jlcco (Less. 9, 6) J jo^JJ 1^1 jfe
^"' s-'i C"
G ^^GG.^^^^ v
^lilXfl (than) ( y t ^U c> J^ U (for me) ^
^. Exercise 48.
Read this letter. I have read it. This woman
seeks (j^oi) me that (j) I may read her letter to her.
The people appeared asking (Imperf.) concerning my
condition. - - Ask me for what you want (ask me thy
need). I ask you to (that you) pardon my guilt. -
Twenty-Hixth Lesson. 143
Have you filled this cask with apples? - We have
filled it. , Fill it immediately.^- girl, read this
book. - - They began to read (that they read). / I know
the beginning (Verbal Noun) of this book. - - I have
announced to them the arrival of the Emir. - - Come
forward that I may reward thee. - - We bring thee
congratulation (Verbal Noun). We are beginners
(Part.) in the Arabic language. - The Sultan set up
a school.
Twenty-sixth Lesson.
JO G-o^
Weak Verbs,
a,* /Tr" S
1. The Weak verbs (Jo* Jots), in which one of
the radicals is a waw or a ya are divided into three
classes:
C- O o
A. Assimilated verbs (JUU joe) whose first radical
is waw or ya.
3 (J O O
B. Hollow verbs (uJ^>-i Jots) whose second radical
is waw or ya.
"^
C. Defective verbs (^^ Jots) whose third radical
is waw or ya.
A. Assimilated Verbs.
I. Verbs whose first radical is ^.
2. Verbs whose first radical is waw have the
following peculiarities:
a) Those that take kjisra in the Imperf. lose their
5 iu the Imperf. and Imper. e.g. from juo 3 4 'to arrive*
^ o
Imperf. J^ Imper. J^o. Many also that take fatha
in the Imperf. have the same peculiarity e.g.
144
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper.
_ 3 * O ^
"to place, put". *j^2j *j&
3 * * O .,
"to be wide". ***o **
-/ ( C
^ "to fall". b ^i
to give". ^ w^j ^J 3
lost verbs of the form JoJ take kasra in the
.jj-l Imperf. (contrary to the rule in Less. 13, 3) e.g.
., ^ .> c>
/aSj u to trust", Imperf. /aiu Imper. /aS
f* 8 ***' * * "
- - u to be swollen
The verbs whichftake damma or fatha in the
Imperf. andj preserve their 3 are rare e.g.: j^>- 3 "to be
~
afraid", Imperf. Indie. Jo-jj, Imper. J^.| (for
see below).
Those which are also Doubled verbs retain their
3 in the Imperf. e.g. ^ "to x loje", Imperf. Indie, o^j.
' f -!*~zu~.^ j, -3
Note. In the Imperf. of the Passive the ^ is retained,
even when it is lost in the Active e.g.: Oc> 3 "to find", Imperf.
J / , . ^ >
Indie. Act. Os^r, Pass.
b) If the waw is vowelless and preceded by a
O ' O ^ O
kasra it is changed into a ya e.g. Jc^.l (for Jo>- 3 !) Imper.
o
from jc?^, so from o^>- 3 the Verbal Noun V. is
(for
Twenty-sixth Lesson. 145
Vowelless waw preceded fr v flamma becomes u e.g.
>^j (for Jo-jj) cf. Less. 27.
c) In the VIII. form the wtiw is assimilated to 1
the following ta e.g. - Jij3(*> JJoCT ^~~^f&(
J^>5 "to join" VIII. jJajl, Imperf. Indie. J^^oij.
II. Verbs whose first radical is ^.
3. These Verbs retain their ya in the Imperfect e.g.
j-lJ "to be easy", Imperf. Indie, ^ou.
- ~S.<1*
(Jf Jj "to despair", ,, u^^ ( see Less. 25).
If the ya is vowelless and follows damma, it is
changed into a waw e.g. Jaib "to be awake", Imperf.
Indie. IV. ^aijj (for Jo&u).
In the VIII. form the ya is assimilated to the |
following ta e.g. (Jf J^ VIII. jj*u't.
4. Conjugation of the verb whose first radical is . :
Juij "to arrive, join".
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
J^o!
etc. etc. etc. etc.
Arabic Grammar. 10
146 First Part.
Imperative
Part. Act.
G **J
etc. Part. Pass. ^<
Verbal Noun jjc 3 or 3^4 or '*^ 1'
Pass. Perf. J^o 3 Imperf. Indie.
An example of those verbs, which retain their _.
in the Imperfect is J^>. 3 "to be afraid", Imperf. Indie.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
o ..
>j 7 i Imper. J^>r.i.
Derived Forms.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
II.
' "^ J*****' I - - - o . .o^ o.o
^J**7 .^ ^* ^^i J^J-^ J^-^}
G ^ o J 6 ^ o
G z ) G ., z, )
(J*X2J)
IX. Does not occur.
^ ^ o ^ o ^ o^o^ o o^o G
X..
Verbal Noun.
H. .Usli- IV. Sllit VI. ,"Ui^ VIII.
l . - s
G w G - o G .
mi" - - . - ' -r-r | ./ "\7TT t f V
. u*-oj Or XJLol^x V. J*A^.J VII. 0^^5-31 A-
Twenty -sixth Lesson. 147
5. Conjugation of the verbs, whose first radical is ^ :
J^AJ "to be dry", e^;
Perf. Irnperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
o - o ,
U**"**-
etc. etc. etc. etc. \
Imperative
20t *^ Jrart. Act.
^[0^44^*- A******
<~ -^**J-
etc. Part. Pass.
G o -
Verbal Noun
,
Pass. Perf. ^^ Imperf. Indie.
Derived Forms.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
^ a^ >~*j o ., GW^J G s^^
III.
.. s ^ >*,*,* oz~' G w-^j Gs--,
V.
VI.
10*
148
First Part.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
6 * >
VIIL
ir** u~fH u-fl
, j/^AA^ i W^X.A/0
IX.
Does not occur.
X.,
^ ^ O O J ^ C ., G & . O
.. { .. .. f
y^AAAAVj. (j^AAAAWO (yAAAAAv) (W
5 o^-oj O<.o^o
Verbal Noun.
ii. JL
.Jj IV. jLlLl VI. Jo
'Li/ vm. Ju
in. L
V^*"
j'w^O V. , WW>.AJ ' VII. / WV^A
^_/ ... L>
o- O -
AJ) -A., i WV'UAAA>
u> 4T-,
^*^*.
Vocabulary.
G
Lord (God). Xj,jJ>L^S
V
Alexandria.
1 r /.v^J
( II. to make easy, wu -^ ^ '
< V. to be made '= "-
/ii* '; Jo.x' - ^^*"'
, f-^ ' "^,..JIK'
sjiortly..,^ ^
easy, possible.
to be difficult, II. to
make difficult.
I. to complete.
to stay, remain,
stand still, IV. to
refrain from (with
o ^
^J, I. to learn,
ascertain ( with
I-
seat, throne.
to lay down, to
let, allow (only
in Imperf. and
Imper.l
) V. to betake one-
\ self, go.
since.
time, csl^'j^^^^'^
| VIIL to be dis-
l turbe.cl, excited.
hearing.
| IV. to conduct,
\ bring.
to be necessary,
incumbent (with
anger,
body.
Twonty-sixth Lesson
*****,* fib) ^
III. toberaitablflf-f
to agroo to (with
&, VIII. come
to ail agreement.
.
dwelling.
who, which (fera.).
149
,.
frlend ' beloved -
to be awake,
x to wakeu
|
(pi.
message.
/(properly of a camel
etc. to go down to
director, editor.
^<5/f4*^)
journal, newspaper.
-^z*
tt> ^V3
V. and VIII. to
(properly "to
be violent in
journeying") to
hurry forward.
j III. to speak to/ 1 "*'"'
I address.
>n condition
(that).
Ibrahim Pascha.
tPuirfeTy;
Mi^^^u^Uf.
piety, fear o/ God.
V. to adjae,*** **
.l'V
to promise (with
accus. of person,
u; of thing).
to describe.
A XT-
Asla Mmor '
comfort.
bear.
cistern.
7. to move
(oneself).
i<
*'J- W ^iL
-J *, i J -;
^Exercise 49.
Lj
" 9
'J*Xx
150
First Part.
O ^ C O-o -
3 + ti *
Joel
cr
.0,0 -o 3 o 5
> Xj LJ! S | 3 I3 (in regard to . . .
,
zJ Lo
^1 Uiiajt
^3 s^Ju
v, * * .,
^J! f: LwL
Twenty-seventh L< - 1"1
Exercise 50.
You have sought us and not found us. Hast
thou laid these books down on the seat? - I have
not yet laid them down, but I will lay them down
shortly. Lay them down immediately. Let
us stay with you. - - If God will, you will arrive at
(i[) Cairo in (the), cxgp fort. --We have already arrived
long ago (since fijjme). - - He fled from the bearThe
fell into the cisternT^ girl, do not fall. friends,
lead us to the sheikh of the tribe. - This dwelling
will be very suitable for us. - Stand still and do not
+ o
move./ The entrance to (vXic) the Sultan was made
possible for us. - - It is our duty to bring you to the
prince (the bringing you to). - - Many marvels are found
in Egypt. - - I shall describe it to thee in this letter. )
- Your letter has not reached (j,[ 3^) us. ^We have
fallen into great distress. God will help ((&} II)
your affairs, for He (ills) is the Helper (Part.). - - We
have agreed that you shall stay with us for a long_tinae_
Accus.).
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
B. Hallow Verbs.
1. Hollow Verbs i.e. those, whose second radical
is 3 or ^ observe the following rules:
152 First Part.
A. If the ^ or 1 5 is vowelless and -the third radical
is also__yowelless, thenjihe 3 or ^ is dropped to prevent
the meeting of two vowelless letters (Intro. 13, 3) e.g.
.
From J (for jS) the Jussive should be *yij (see
below, B, 1), but as the 3 and * are vowelless, the ^
. -> ^ O ->
is dropped and it becomes +j; so Imper. *j>.
From ^C (for ^o) the Jussive is ^J, the Iinper. j.
^ ^ o ^ -
From oL> (for o^i>) the Jussive is v^A^ 1 ., the
Imper.
If the third radical, by conjugation, receives a
vowel, no elision takes place e.g. 2 ud Sing. Fern. Juss.
3 "
ij, Plur. Masc. Imper.
So also the dlif, when it takes the place of 3 or
^5, is dropped, whenever the third radical is vowelless
by conjugation e.g.
From IV. \ (for 'i\] is formed 2 nd Sing. Masc.
B. If the j or ^5 is vowelled, the following rules
are observed:
1) If the first radical is vowelless, then the vowel
of the _j or ^ is given to it, the ^ or ^5 thus becoming
vowelless ; atv is then changed to a /and itv to i, e.g. :
~r~ - : - - -~-/- - -j - * .
From r$(= ' r js) is formed Itoperf. Indie,
From ^L (= ^1), Imperf. Indie. ^J (for ^Lj.
t./KS' From oli (= ^i), Imperf. Indie, oLfe (for
.1 Ht,
Twenty-seventh Lesson. . 153
So also from js (= ^S) are formed Perf. IV.
* o .* j _, ,. o v > > > o >
for pjjji for (.>&!); Imperf. Indie. IV. ( *-Jij (for ^yb for
l^b); Part. Act, IV. (for jU for yu); Part. Pass.
O ^ . O o - 3
IV. Ux (for jjw for
2) If the first radical is vowelled.
a) Then if the third radical is also vowelled,
a) awa, aid, aim, aya, ayi, ayu become a, e.g. 3 rd Sing.
Perf. I. fj* becomes ^15, o^> becomes oli, ^o becomes
X 3>i? becomes jlL, ^^i becomes ujli. VII. Form
^ -* ^o ^ - o ^ - o *
Perf. o^fijl becomes jL&lj and Imperf. Indie. 3^AJu becomes
J ^ O ^ ^ ^
^JLo. p) mvi, uyi become f, e.g. Pass. Perf. I. j^s
becomes J^s, ^-uo becomes ^yo.
Note. The rules a) and p) apply also to the VIII. form
^^^O ^^O ) * C) *
e.g. Perf. VIII. >^>t. becomes ^LX^>I, Iinperf. -- *^T. becomes
G ^ d ,
- ^ ^ o ^ ., o
Perf. jy^l becomes UOol.
b) If the third radical is vowelless, elision takes
place and
. . .
a) awa becomes u, awi, aya, ayi become i, e.g. |
1 st Sing. Perf. ^*^s becomes vils, ^J^> becomes J
>O JO^^ .JO JO^ *O
becomes oo c^> becomes
P) ;* and wyj become i; e.g. 1 st Sing. Perf. Pass. I.
) O id)
becomes viJLS ox-o becomes
2. The Verbal Nouns of IV. and X. drop the,
and add ta after the third radical; e.g.
From Jj'| the Verbal Noun is ju'ot ; from
r &
o^ ^ &
it is x
the j |
r 'jij, *'
154 First Part.
3. In the Participle Active of the L form the *
6 ., S -
and the ^ are changed into hamza; e.g. pjfc (for ^1$),
O .. G .,
yLo (for ^j'uo).
4. In the Participle Passive of the I. form of verbs
whose second radical is 3 one of the two waivs is
dropped and damma is written over the one left;
., O j .* O .> o ^
e.g. from jls the Part. Pass. I. is o^iU (for lijjJU),
In the Pass. Part, of verbs whose second radical
is L5 the ^5 is dropped and Jcasra is written under the
first radical; e.g. from ^ (= ^1) the Pass. Part. I. is
O ^ O j o
.x>^o (for j^y).
Note 1. A few verbs whose middle radical is 3 or ^5 of
the form Jots preserve the , or ^5 and are conjugated as Sound
verbs; e.g.
-> o
"to be one-eyed", Iinperf. Indie. ,^AJ etc.
Hollow verbs, which denote Colours or Defects, always, retain
the 3 or ^c in the IX. form; e.g.
5i ' w^o^
"-^^l "t ^ e or Become black" Imperf. Indie,
a ^o
U^^i " to be or become white"
":.j
The 5 is often retained in the X. form; e.g. Oj-cix-*J,
y o - O -
Imperf. Indie. v-^AaiLywJ.
Note 2. Hollow verbs, which have 3 or ^5 as third radical
always retain their , e.g. ~~
"to be worth", Imperf. Indie.
Note 3. Thffse Hollow verbs which have ta or Mgn as
third radical aasim'ilate~it ^with a foliowing ta or nun\ e.g.
^ ^ ) 3 O J
From olo the 1st Sing. Perf. I. is ^^A (for
^ w i ^ O .>
From ^ the I st Plur. Perf. I. is U^ (for
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
Conjugation of ^B (= JLS) "to stand":
Perfect.
Sing. pis Dual Uls Plural
Imperfect.
Indie. Subj. Juss.
Sing. 3. m.
o,
3. f.
2m X" X"
. m. f^-**-* fLf** ****-*
2. f.
Dual 3. in.
O f
n 0. f- O
Plur. 3. m. ^
3. f.
156 First Part.
Indie. Subj. Juss.
Plur. 2. m. ,*
2. f.
Imperative
S. 2. m. ^
2. f. ^i Part, Act.
'* >
D. 2. LojJ5 Part. Pass.
PI. 2. m.
2. f.
Passive.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
etc. etc. etc. etc.
Derived Forms.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
^w^ jw^J ow^ Gw^j GS^J
III.
'
, r -^ ^ o S G j G .
i iv. .bj
Twenty-seventh Lesson. 157
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
_a*- ->a*-- oa,,., O^^^i G a * - .
V.
VI. U
p^f. <jJuJ ^MfHtp'V*-- '& *HU**MJM~M+ ". H** fU ttt. Uf*
'?^o > ^o^ / o*& G ^o> O *
IX. o^/J . ^>j-^j ^^^^i ^J-V^Q wanting.
^^^o > -o^ o^o S J -oj O^^oj
X.
..ii. v. * ;/ vin.
III. L^Ulo' VI. ^l' IX. j^j *-
iv. List ^ vn. LjJi - x. L,ixli
~
5. Conjugation of the form Jots:
Jli (for J^>) "to fear".
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
>!
^ -
etc. etc. etc.
158 First Part.
Imperative
o ,
ou> Part. Act.
6
jb> etc. Part. Pass.
Passive.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
etc. etc. etc.
etc.
Conjugation of the form
jUb (for 5j) "to be long".
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss. Imper.
^^
Lb
viAL etc. etc - etc - etc - etc -
6. Conjugation of verb, whose middle radical is
.Lo (for jsj&) "to become".
Perfect.
Sing. 3. m. jjo Dual \ } \^o Plural 1 5J U
o ^ -* - -. o
3. f. 0,1
2. m.
2. f.
1.
Plur. 3. in. ^^
3. f. 'V
2 m juc
9 f '
55 * ,MT*^J
1, 1-
Imperative
Twenty-seventh Lesson. 159
Imperfect.
Indie. Subj. Juss.
Sing. 3. m.
3. f.
2. m.
2. f. (
I.
Dual 3. m.
3 f
55 ^J I.
O t" .".
)jAAOJ
Part. Act.
^ Part, Pass.
160 First Part.
Passive.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
/ '
5 Wfc4 J w^^^J
.0 ->-J - ., 3 b * >
yf jUoj jUi j*aj
etc. etc. etc. etc.
Derived Forms.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
II. -VO r XX2J ~wO -AX2X
xT77
--S j> o 6j
r\r !
IV. ,00)
V. -XAOJ ^XXiXj ^AXiJ -AAOJOO .>wOJOO
- -. J. ^ ~ o^ .. 6 ..>X G. ^
) ^ o * o.o O^o
VII.
^.O J-O^ O^O *3.O
V II LxXO I L!/T y^j _Ll>O ?
) Z J s Z J
(see Less. 21, 4 a)
w -O ^O., O .,0
lax. />i2jot ij^ixxj i>i2Ai2^.j\ ivfljywo wanting.
y .o. o^o O .oj G rf ^ o >
(
- AA^XV^J ^dAAV I -X/v^A^V.X . ClASrt*w^
J" ^ " -; ^ . z ^" ^ )
Verbal Noun.
^
V. ^? VIII. J'
mTTT T"\r
b^jLoyO VI. jUaj l^L. (j:
G . o O.
VII. :uuoJi X. g.
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
161
Conjugation of the form Joe:
Ol* (for J^) "to fear".
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj.
Juss.
Imper.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
Vocabulary.
etc.
(The letter in brackets after a Hollow verb indicates the
middle radical.)
y I. to rise, IV. to
set, place, stay.
!
( (5 = ^-b->) toJeBf
( II. to terrify,
(i) to flee.
oU
( ( 3 ) II. to give rest
I to, X. to rest.
(,) to die.
(5) to say, (followed
by ^t and the
exact words used;
not by ^i and
indirect speech).
(., = 3j~^) to be
long, II. and IV.
to make
I lengthen.
9Ul survival, life.
Arabic Grammar.
long,
(^5) to become;
(with following
Imperf.) to begin.
) (with negative)
\ never.
((5) to g> journey.
way, journey.
(3) to turn back,
IV. to repeat,
VIII. to be ac-
customed.
(plur.
gestion, agitation
(to make; (with
| following Imperf.)
I to begin.
| (^) V. to fancy,
\ imagine.
) IV. to come
upon, afflict, X. to
approve.
11
162
First Par
art. n . n
AAAO/S misfortune. ^|j
i 3 ; tu letJi giuuy,
II. to make giddy.
*b thrust (of a lance). ^; (^j V III. to increase, c^
U* while. / T Y!^ pride.
jLo y V. tojmagine.
(}} IV. to obey,
e. Pt^y r 7 ^ 7
XJlils caravan: C IN (
X. to be able to
e '
1(with accus. of
^JNJ: lunch.
1
the thing).
" ' \ I
^} to incline, bend.
313 HI. to hand over) visj^ setting (of the sun).
(with double ace.). o .
, ;- o tongue.
(icImperf.oLuand . / " o
Joas> to guard, -b-^-^ f***l
. ^ [J C^VH)' to spend the
)j '* ~^^ j j
ji |*J^N9 1
to protect.
night. / ', :
O 1 ^ *
^) to betray.
o! y IV. to wish. <*
^ \
\ * 1 rx -J ^
JU^ left side.
6 '. ^i
/ Z st
^^j right side.
( 3 ) to oe easy,
Jj y to visit.
IV. to insult.
fj_ * j ^
(.) IV. to endure,
Xjii. company. 1 L>iji fc f**^* fe (3
"suffer. P-1S5
jT succeed. .
G/
(jp> right, truth. ^1L>
i
III. to contradict
PP se V^^i~ '
^ftxib> true.
VIII. to take ven-
r.v* ** j (***' i.'
wo^.^ public, general.
geance on -(^J.
^ w
& L (^) to sell. ^5^5 who ( masc - sin g-)-
* ^ o
<r jcil to buy. ' \1 .
(^5) II. to determine, \
^ * f O
G ,
6 ^ Kplur. o_^c>) troop, . .
) army. \ o
appoint,
f y 11., III. and IV. 1
to help. /
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
G,
Friday,
auction.
y II. to marry.
(^5) VIII. to choose.
(.) IV. to answer.
(^ = v^v^), to fear.
! 3 mother.
(^) VIII. to hunt.
- f y III. to be neigh-
^ | "^bour to. >}jj
C* (plur. ,.JTU|) place.
amiable,
steed,
lead. ^J;
AAS'UO. bullet.
III. to defend.
"(5) II. to terrify,
II. to threaten.
G /
Jaj'bto officer. /
,%Ui () to lead.^
^ sparks.
163
VIII. to need
(with lp.
to live.
sir.
Isire (used of Sultan
or Khedive).
be good, quiet.
IV. to lose,
evil, (sb
\ L) IV. to inform, ,
I benefit.
5 ) to go or wander
round.
Governor.
(5) to last,
battle,
towards, about.
inclination.
to be worthy,
6^ \ fitting.
3^0..
jo^ wife.
sjoli advantage.
there.
3 sleep.
11*
164 First Part.
,,,,., to be absent, s o.
, VOAJ eggs (collective).
I go away.
Il3 (3 = l^SJ to^ sleep. **j*p- government.
*^J -- 5/e*^
protection. 'Lb (^5) to fly.
Exercise 51.
j o
! i y ri
O i ^
l r A
^^ ^| ^O OJ^
ois dUo JJU JJij*
j (Optative) Jlif lilu ^U
* 5-.> ^^ . I .--"
I Jo I
J '
O ^ f * ) ) * M + )%,*'* *
ioj L'uc^o
(Intro. 9) oo?
^ ^ - ->5
^
HJsJb
Twenty-seventh Lesson. 165
faJUu
tO > > Z -O > * (J * * , L,*,
"as regards" . . .,) L*/ Jo^i (Less. 21, 5, b) oUjj
J (see Less. 42, 2, f
U +i .-^jj jsjj (Proverb) dVJL> *JC>L> . \ (Aj
\. ^ v ' (Dz .
(what .... of insult = what insult) XJltfjft ,- *^J) i J^J
O < O
o*
J Kxi Uj i jo >UJi *
("which the lions fear", see Less. 31,4) JOL^J U.x
J >0-o > _^ ^5^
li| 3
> j (Less. 21, 5, a) Oulu^j Jy
^. . *
c '
rf +.*
'L> lii u*i
166 First Part.
-0^ o ;. S .o j , - i
.
"as regards" . . .) Udj ^L Luxj6f (Optative) o c^xj
^J ^ L5 - ( see Less. 42, 2, f
^^^
lL (Proverb) oli[
-> - o oo..^
CT* 3 (j^w.ua
c LJt 3 I 3J U^. Q ! ^i (Less. 34, 6)
^O^O^O ^O-.- O
LsJ^aiyw! ^^- x
"<>V
JOJO^^J * ^
^ L^oJ^sf
/Exercise 52.
Rise O girl, and let us sit. We wish to stay
in this city half a year. - - A great misfortune has
come upon us. You were afflicted by (uj) a great
misfortune. 1.0 woman, go away and do not return.
What have you said? We said, this is not fitting.
Do not say this. Dost thou wish O girl, that I
Twenty-eighth Lesson. 167
thee the truth? - It was said, the king had
died. He did not die and will live long. - Truly
we yearn to see you (to your seeing). - I wished to
visit you, but was not able to (that). Go my son,
in the protection of God. - The merchant, who lives
(Part, of *l5i) in Cairo will visit us. - - We wish that
God may lengthen your life. - He fancied in (the)
sleep that he was flying. We flew from joy. -/f- Eat
and drink and rest. They handed us the coffee and
after the handing of the coffee we rested. He wished
to sell these eggs, but he was not able. - You- have
made us giddy with your speech. - Did you spend
the night in Damascus? No, we did not spend the
night in that city. -HfThe government appointed him
governor. - Trust in God and fear not. J-- The coward
(fearing) does not attain the reward. Repeat your
question. I have already repeated it. He will
approve our opinion. This stuff ((jiUs) will not last.
(The) obedience (Verbal Noun of "obey") is our duty.
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
C. Defective Verbs.
O .Go
((jaSli J-4)
- \ - i t *lX2Z-^.
1. The Defective verbs, which have 3 or ^ as third
radical are conjugated according to the following rules :
A. If the 3 or ^ is vowelless:
1. It is dropped, when nothing is added at the
end, as in the Jussive and Imper. e.g.
From Uo (= _^io) "to call": Imperf. Indie.
> o * t o&
Juss. cvXj, Imper. pj|.
I
168 First Part.
From wo. (- ( -* ; ) "to throw": Imperf. Iifimc.
y, Juss. rj j, Imper. rj [. ,
From iiJ "to meet": Imperf. Indie. L, Juss.
So also in the II. form (and other Derived forms):
forms Imperf. Indie. ^Jo, Juss. cjo, Imper. cj>.
The elision takes place even when the Personal
t 3 (>$>
Pronoun is added as x^o! "call him".
2. If there is an addition at the end:
a) aw becomes au; ay becomes ai e.g. 2 nd Sing.
Masc. Perf. I. of Lei is o^eo; of ^x, is o^,.
b) iw and iy become 2; uw becomes w; e.g. 2 ud Sing.
Masc. Perf. I. of j^. is ^^o^\ of JU is ^>^J; of
3j l "to be noble" is o 3j ^.
B. When the 3 or ^ is vowelled:
1. If the second radical is vowelless, the 3 or ^
G c^
is retained; e.g, Verbal Noun (of the form Joe) of |^&
(= jji) " to raid " : 3/5 f ^J : L^J'
2. If the second radical is vowelled, and
a) there is no addition at the end:
a) aiva and ay a become a, this a being written
with alif when it is derived from awa, with ya when
it is derived from aya; e.g. 3 rd Sing. Masc. Perf. I. of
is^i, of ^ is ^oj.
p) ^^aJ^OJllgs_J?/a, ^a remains; e.g. ^> ; becomes
\ Pass. Perf. I. ^> becomes o; remains
^ ^
unchanged. So in Imperf. Subj. I. ^^ remains
unchanged.
Twenty-eighth Lesson. 169
-
IB mva remains; e.g. 5J ^, Imperf. Subj.^cOo, ("//"
does not occur).
3) mvii becomes u\ e.g. Iigperf. Indie. I. _^Xj
becomes _^jJ, (uyu does not occur).
y o +
e) iyu becomes i; e.g. Imperf. Indie. I. ^A^ becomes
o
. (it(w does not occur).
' v
C) awu and ay^ become a (always written with j
^ ^ o * - c> *' y * & *
; e.g. Imperf. Indie. I. ^^j becomes ^^^jj; ^-j (from i
"to pasture") becomes ^^j.
The same changes take place in the Derived forms,
where however ^ always takes the place of ^ (see below
rule 3); e.g. III. ^lo becomes ^lo; Imperf. Indie. ^iJo
becomes ^iJo etc.
b) Th^eJajHJjjjJIJgj^^^e^end :
a) The ^ and ^ are retained when immediately
followed by fm_alif (in the Dual); e.g.: .. *>+> *">* =*~~
3 rd Dual, Perf. I. |S J Ui UiiJ.
3 rd n Imperf.
2 nd Imper. i^Ioi etc.
In these cases however iwa becomes iya\ e.g. \_^o^ i^JSL.
-- ^j
becomes Lu; Pass. Perf. lo becomes
o^ i
'[
P) If M or z follows (as in Plur. Masc.; 2 nd Sing.
Fern. Imperf. and Imper.) the following changes take
place:
awn and ayu become aw, and so atvuna and aynna
become anna: e.g. 3 rd Plur. Masc. Perf. I. I 3 _jio becomes
; 3 rd Plur. Masc. Imperf. I. \^0j becomes [^ and
becomes ^ b becomes
170 First Part.
iwa, iyu and mvu become u and so mvuna and
y ^
iyuna become ma\ e.g. 3 rd Plur. Masc. I. l_^j becomes
\Jo\\ l*jJ becomes |Jj; Ull becomes ull: 3 rd Plur.
****
iwnv*Akv Masc. Imperf. .. j-yo-j becomes
;e and y? become ?; e.g. 2 nd Sing. Fern. Imperf. I.
*0^ JO^ O^
becomes ^ejo'; Juss. ^J^JG* becomes ^Jo
jand ^-^yy becomes Q^J'.
L ""' '"" . .o.
a?/^ becomes ai; e.g. 2 nd Sing. Fern. Imperf. I. ^f^S
* o ^o < - o
becomes r ~JiJlj; Imper. Sing. Fern. ^JiJi becomes
Y) When the o of the 3 rd Sing. Fern. Perf. is added,
the aiva and aya are first changed to a and then, to
prevent the meeting of two vowelless letters (see Intro.
o ^ ., ^ o ^ -
13, 3), the aZi/ 1 is dropped; e.g. o^o becomes
.
then c^co; ^>wy; becomes oU, then
Thp.^Fpm nf jj^ia Dnal is (irregulaply)_Qrmed by
analogy from the. Sing.: 'uOo ;? bio.
-
The following forms are regular; ^^^ (since iiva
* ^ * o.. ^ ~ * * t> * y * * * > *
changes into iya), Dual bu/i^; c>.^ ^J; 5j^ ^**
Note. The ^5 as sign of a at the end of a word is changed
3 * *
into \ whenever a suffix is added; e.g. alo^ "he threw him", (see
Intro. 6, Note 3).
2. In the Active Participle iwun and iyun are
6 - - .6 -
changed into m; e.g. _^!o becomes fo; *\j becomes
*L. These forms are declined like 0^1$ in Less. 6, 3.
Singular.
Nom. Gen. cfi; with the Article ^iSJi (iivu and
w become .
Twenty-eighth Lesson. 171
Accus. Uc!o; with the Article ^|jsj (iya remains).
Dual.
Nom. O llci3; Gen. Accus. ^.jllcio.
Plural.
Nom. Q^ti^ (uwn and iyn become #), Gen. Accus.
o (iivi and iyi become $).
In the Part. Pass, of verbs whose third radical is
3 the two waws are contracted into one written with
O > o * 2 . o ^
tashdtd', e.g. ^^J^A becomes _^x/>.
In the verbs whose third radical is ^5, the of
the form js changed to and this is assimilated to* >r
O ,o. S o-
the ^5 of the root; e.g. i^yy* becomes .^j*- C**u*
3. The verbs jwhQse_lhird radical is ^ are treated
in the Derived %ms as if their third radical were (jr:
e.g. from Uo: II. Ji, III. ^ii, IV. L ^o? etc. ^>^
^ 4. a) The Verbal Noun of the II. form is of the
6. o.
pattern *!*& (as in the case of the verbs whose third
O^ o ^ s -
radical is liamsa. See Less. 24, 2, h); e.g. &+**? from -^.
b) In the Verbal Noun of the III. form the is -
O- - 3 ^ *
changed into alif\ e.g. ls^to from J.S5 "to meet".
c) In the Verbal Nouns of of the IV., VII., VIII.
and X. forms, where the third radical follows an dlif,
the ya is changed into a liamza (without bearer); e.g.
<o5 ^o
IV. from ^fijj "to throw": 9lfiJ[.
- ^o - o
VII. from ^^AJ[ u to come to an end":
VIII. from ^^ "to buy": 9jytA[.
^ o - o
X. from L5 *^ "to ask forgiveness, abdicate":
' ^. \ /^ ^ ^o fc
172
" Firs? Part.
d) In the Verbal Noun of the V. and VI. forms
s &--
becomes w, tt^te becomes *; e.g. JiL* becomes
>^^ ^^ w^ ^i
j becomes blj; with the Article &ti\ and ^^UJI.
5. In the Participles of the Derived forms iyun
becomes in; iyu becomes f; ayun becomes an (written
becomes a (also wri< < ten with ^5); e.g.
becomes (jJU>, with the Article ^ydi i ; Part. Pass II.
* Z, - > s-joS
becomes ^5JL, with the Article ^.aUi etc.
Conjugation of the Defective Verbs.
a) Conjugation of the verbs whose third radical is :
a) Of the form '*-*-
"to call".
3.
ingular
magcy
j*^*
. fein. ^
2. masc.
2. fern.
1.
Sing. 3. masc.
,, 3. fem.
,, 2. masc.
2. fem.
Perfect.
b.d.
/ '.6^,
Dual *'
^ ' ^ "/
Plural |^
3. masc. I
y^^> /3.
masc. i~co
te T
- o - ^
3. fem.Vi I
^3 3.
fem. o-^^
2. ui
^3 2.
masc. ^Jj^-*
2.
fem. ,.*.jV&3
1.
ijjjiij
Imperfect.
Indie.
Subj.
Juss.
cJG'
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
Indie. Subj.
173
Juss.
Dual 3. masc. ^
3. fern. ^
2.
Plur. 3. masc.
3. fern.
,, 2. masc.
2. fern.
Imperative.
) (j{>
Sing. masc. gM
0^>
fern, ^o!
Part. Active.
Sing. nom. masc. ? lo (with Art.
* J &> 3 O {>
Dual iof Plur. masc.
fern.
G ,
fern, i
accus. u
,, gen.
Dual. nom. masc. Q^^ fern.
<j * *
,, gen. accus. ,,
Plur. nom. ,,
gen. accus. ,,
Part. Pass.
- 1
174 First Part. o^t'^ >b '^
ert is
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fern.
55
0-0
,, 3. fern. ^Ucjo
^ _ O 3
2.
Plur. 3. masc. ,
^ O - O J
3. fern.
- 0^0
2. masc. ,
o ^ o ;
2. fem. ..vxcjvj'
I-
Passive Perfect. N Jl ^.i>^i
^.3^-nt Sing. 3. masc. <jO Dual ^o Plur. V
^*,jr',7 3. fem.
2. masc. c>
2. fem. ^
1.
Pass. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
- O 3 -C 3 * O J
ing. 3. masc.
e*
Dual 3. masc. ,
Twenty-eighth Lesson. 175
p) Of the form
^toj "to be pleased". 5.
Perfect.
Sing. 3. masc. ^ Dual u^ Plur.
n
. o
Dual 3. masc.
3. fern.
2.
Plur. 3. masc.
3. fern.
,, 2. masc.
2. fern.
1.
3. fem. ^.c^yuC:
,, 2. masc. OWAX^ ,, t-**a*w, n
2. fem. v^^uto; ,,
1.
-
Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
Sing. 3. masc. ^^. ^s*
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fern.
. o2 .oS . o
176 First Part.
Imperative.
Sing. masc. o^l Dual Uto^ Plur. masc.
" fem *A > fem -
w S
Part. Act. ^r tolf Part. Pass,
* * ^ >
Pass. Perf. i (s. <jo) Imperf. Indie, o ^ (s.
Verbs of the form Jots (as 3r * u to be noble") are rare
! \*>J*> "
b) Conjugation of verbs whose third radical is ^5
a) Of the form jj;
^ "to throw".
Perfect.
Sing. 3. masc. ( ^ Dual U^ Plur.
,, 3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.
Sing. 3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fern.
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
177
Tmperf. Indie.
Subj.
Juss.
Dual 3. masc. j
'
,, 3. fern.
11 2.
Plur. 3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fern.
Sing. masc.
fern,
Imperative.
- o
Dual LyJ Plur. masc.
fern.
Verbal Noun
Part. Act.
Pass. Perf.
Go.
Part. Pass.
Imperf. Indie.
etc. = etc. =
P) Of the form
-^ ^
aj "to meet" is conjugated like ^y^;.
Arabic Grammar. 12
178 First Part.
c) Conjugation of the Derived forms of all Deleave
verbs. V^
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
III.
IV.
V. ^
vi. &
vii. ijG;
IX. Wanting.
X.
/aXX^wO
rn Verbal -Noun.
II. iusii- "V. (&*#> VIII.
III. llsii and 9LiJ tx VI. ^^5^ IX. Wanting.
^o \, ' - .o
IV. 9lsJJ VII. slsJlit X.
-
i ^ w> cfc. ff*^u*> (*-< t x^junuN jf* St*< pJL
Vocabulary.
Jo to weep. ^y*. to run, flow, happen.
b-j to hope for. ^ to f o r get.
6 9 - - f to go, V. to wander
J J^ excuse. ^^c about
^^ ^^^
> to read. J^ (also KJL^) haste.
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
179
G o
6 o >
V. to breakfast.
I to stretch, V. to
stretch oneself,
( rest.
V. to take supper.
G . o
(plur. v^L^cl) herbs. , , \^**
avWj
1 1. and VIII. to be '*
watered (suffici-
butter.
I dried dates (collec-
I tive).
o tobacco.
crj
Go.
rain.
G ..
= ^U; . time.
winter,
to remain,
rest, remainder.
G , ,
f (pi. J^cis) section,
season.
to go away, Part.
Act. past, last.
to call, to pray for,
wish (with j of
person
of
So
to pasture, feed on.
thing) VIII. (see
Less. 21, 5, b) to
claim , X. to
summon.
G..
(plur. ;<4>) seller.
VIII. to honour.
to approach. * o? IPTffJfy.
i (literally "to let
1 live") to greet.
r.
G- o
A
[ I. and III. to meet,
Ui to bend. & nO c
j IV. to throw, VI.
and VIII. to meet
; ;7,
UC to complain of (^J.
one another.
yas brevity.
IV. to give (with
two accus.), VI. to
< ) to be sufficient for, 3
give one another.
L5 i:=3 \ III. to reward.
sheep (collective).
jc+> collecting.
O s . -
G o -
(substitution, ^ ^jo
,jo amount.
instead of.
~s
G .
j^o wealth.
wheat.
straw.
III. to be anxious
(about LJ).
12*
180
First Part.
lif" to be much,
jflfc drink, wine.
to intend, deter-
mine (<A
|Sj III. to call.
Go
lap.
4^
L$
- T
II. to comfort.
III. to endure,
to create.
| II. to recommend,
{ charge.
a - f recommendation,
(exhortation, charge.
Ji> flight. /?
Lip to escape.
i f .
pledge.
f to decide^yill. to //
{ require, seek. fi\
o -
to pardon (with ^).
I to be hidden, con-
\ cealed (from Ji).
J,l V. to be slow.
f the merciful =
( God.
to cover.
fc he fainted.
c. she fainted,
walk, gait.
'_r~ a LkftftWtQj *"X/ A ^* 5
V. to wish,d^^
o ^
9^> man.
j
" - f IV. to overtake,
'V 1 reach.
,eO to build.
o
to water,
firmament. (
to be pure, clear.
Satan.
^ II. to train up!
5 decision.
V. (Pass.) to die.
i goodness,
to guide. \
path,
straight.
sbG weeping.
Sj
^o bitter.
) to be content.
J*
Go-
II. to name, call.
month.
Twenty-eighth Lesson. 181
V Exorcise 53.
*** IOSA^O
* - O.O O x .o x O >0 x OS
Jdu J^JL, ^^0^ 'u^o.l
ls$T ajj) t (Proverb) J> (for
^ O ^O^
slo
\ ^ x> ^O ^ ^ ^ ^ O^> 3 * ". >w
A BlsbU
AJtLj
^ ^ ^ o^Ox oj^^
QjJyJU lyLj ^i *^ yi - UlLJ i
**)~*3Cj w ^ ^ x^O
LJ'L-> 'uo> iO/j Ik) LJL (Less. 34, 6) L&LJJ
o
ao oxo Jx-j
L wLJl (Less. 44, 5) ^-o (Lr XJO'LO
X XX O.O J X X O^> XX
o-S. LgJjj SjJlyl COu
XX x x
.Lay \Jt (Less. 31, 4) xxc^Cwo
182 First Part.
o ^ o ^
0^ S ^ to^^^O -Off ^ O ^ ^
J ,JN> (as pledge) Li^
^
*JJi (Optative: "May God pardon", Less, 30, 6)
* i, * ' * - 0,0 - O
j ,3 tf-^-*^ J^X
J'
. A,?i
j:Jo ^Jpl \&& ((Proverb)
s jLx'j bi - (Less. 34, 7]
, r^Xj Lo J^ U ixx^UJj X c
u r> :
LxaJ! 1 joi Lo (Pro verb)
O
Twenty-eighth Lesson. 183
3 * &G-0 - * f 0.0 * O - > . *
i j^>^! ^^ j&w il Ujj OVACO (Proverb)
c > o . t> + o i .> o^oc. .> So-o - . > o *,
(Koran, Sura 1.)
1
i/Exercise 54.
When was this house built? - It was built
(Part. Pass.) in the time (js^c) of the last Sultan.
Why did you weep girls? We beg your pardon
(we hope from you the excuse). - - I have read your
letter. - - Do not forget what I have said to thee O
boyl - I have not forgotten it my master. Go
slowly (with u; slowness), -ft When will the time of
our meeting be? - - We shall give you what we ought
(is necessary for us). You have not given us our
due (right). Remain with us. - I heard a crier
(Part. Act. III. of |3o) crying (he cries) in the market
with a loud voice. - The girl wept bitterly (a bitter
weeping). We fell fainting. What you wanted
did not happen. - - What you have said is sufficient
for me. Whither art thou going? Wast thou
content with what I said to thee? I met a dog in
the street. What (how) is this called in Arabic?
I went from the house to meet them (to their meeting).
- Do not be anxious about this man.^ Spare me
(make me remain II). Hast thou watered the horses?
We have already breakfasted and, if God will, we
shall shortly take supper. -- Truly, the merchants buy
and sell in the market. - - Buy what is necessary for
us. If God will, we shall meet in the current
(flowing) month.
184 First Part.
Twenty-ninth Lesson.
Doubly weak Verb.
1. The most usual of the doubly weak verbs are
of the following three classes:
A. Those in which one radical is hamza, while
another is a weak letter.
B. Those in which two radicals are weak letters.
C. Those in which all three radicals are hamzas
or weak letters.
A.
2. Verbs in which one radical is hamza and
another a weak letter.
1) Those in which the first radical is hamza, the
second 3 or ^5; e.g.: OT "to return^,
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss.
- > >~ >'<>* O .
( a ^ so written LJJJ)
etc. VxH etc - V-H etc -
Imper.
o ^> 6 ~
vjj Part. Active ^Ji
^t Pass. Perf. ^.
So too the rarer verbs:
^JT (for vj^f) "t
JT (for J 3 I) (t to come, return".
31 (for jU) "to be strong!!.. II. JJ? "to strengthen".
2) Those in which the first radical is hamza, the
third 3 or ^5; e.g. ^1 "to come".
Twenty-ninth Lesson. 185
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss. ' *j
?* *- -*- I- ix>t'P'*
o -2
* 0. ^ I* I*
^jj\ etc. IB etc. .to etc. oli' etc.
* T-' &}' '
j\ (from\~ot) also shortened o y
Imper. ^ _
>^>
Part. Active oT (with Article ^Sj|)
- i- * - >
Pass. Perf. JL| Imperf. Indie. A_^J.
Of this verb the IV. form is ^1 "ioJaring'; Imperf.
Indie. ,3^; Juss. o^j; Imper. of; Pass. Perf. j^t.
z &
So also \ "to refuse 1 '; Imperf. Indie. U'j Ti^.^' 6
^ -?c 3i ^ ~*^ ^^" * ^^ff * * ^"^
tol "to pay"; II. ^ol (with same meaning); Verbal ^"^ ^
6^ JL.
Noun X
3) Those in which the second radical is hamza,
the first 3 or ^; e.g. ,J^ "to despair"; Imperf. Indie. ' **- ^*
J 0^ o
ywLji; Imper. yjjj. etc.
4) Those in 'which the . second radical is hamza,
the third ^ or ^5; e.g. ^f^ u to_se'. (Note that the
hamza is dropped in the Imperf. and Imper. and in
theJV. form). ' "T
Sing. 3. masc. ^ Dual C^ Plur. U!^
o * -^ x - & '
,, 3. fern. o^
^.-^r
,, 2. masc.
,, 2. fern.
1.
M.
186 First Part.
Imperfect Indie. Subj.
Sing. 3. masc.
3. fern.
,, 2. masc.
2. fern.
,, I-
Dual 3. masc.
3. fern.
,, 2.
Plur. 3. masc.
3. fern.
,, 2. masc.
2. fern.
1.
Juss.
Sing.
j
Imperative.
Dual \ b*
Plur.
c*
Verbal Noun J^ .
Part. Active ^ (with Article
Part. Pass. ^
Pass. Perf. . j' /A* Imperf. Indie.
4 ,
?
Twenty-ninth Lesson. 187
When united with a suffix the forms used are
I . "he saw him"; lj>l^j "he sees her" etc. ^n
"" Of the Derived forms the following occur:
III. ^sL "to dissemble"; Imperf. Indie.
' """"" ^ ^* ^rv*
Verbal Noun 8*^ or sl^.-^ * s <3l -
IV. u^f "tc^ show"; Imperf. Indie. ^c^\ Juss.
G ^
Imper. .!; Verbal Noun stTt or HcLL
sr -J& J&
VI. ^j?s|-j "to look at one another".
S'O l3K>*c
VIII. ijjtijl "to think . ^Jfe/i
5) Those in which the third radical is hamza, the *SJT^
s - ^ ' "*
first 3 or ^5; e.g. J^ 3 "to tread"; Imperf. Indie. LLj etc. ' j^/r
*^ ^ - ~ V^ ^ ~s **>
6) Those in which the third radical is hamza,
second 3 or ^5, e.g. ?L (for ]_^) u to be bad'^mjuTt'
.< j . ,| -' ~ *tfl ,-y^ - J^*CQ
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss.
etc. etcJ>^ J etc.
Imper. ^ ^-^- v /
t> / ' * - o ftVJ
^^w Verbal Noun 5^^ '
^^1 Part, Active *ll (with Article J
Pass. Perf. Imperf. Indie,
*B.
Of the Derived forms is IV. fL*i "to make had";
Imperf. Indie, ^vJ; Imper. .\\ Verbal Noun ssLJ;
Part. Act. ., /
188 {> First Part.
So from *Lto (for TJ*>) "to shine, be bright"; IV.
y/c-tPT* Conjugation of sli (for Lo.) "to come".
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss.
? (also written ^j
Ol>
Imper.
Verbal Noun
j V " ji ^^^l^ etc. Part. Active ^ (with Article L
Pass. Perf.
..
So from sip (for tx$>) II. form Lp "to prepare ;
3^~" " "" "" --- ~~~- ^ . .
Verbal Norn? tt^s. '
Conjugation of sLa (for
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss.
.0 ..i ^ ^ .
^JZ etc. ^Lixj* etc. Lio etc.
Imper. Li ^LSIj^ Verbal Noun J"
Pass. Perf. ^ Part, Act. ^U (with Article ^ll/f).
u. ",^ ' B. & ^fe
3. Verbs in which two radicals are weak letters.
1) Those in which the first and third radicals
are weak letters. These follow the rules that govern
the conjugation of the Assimilated and the Defective
verbs; e.g.
Twenty-ninth Lesson. 189
Pcrf. & "to_ua!cT; Imperf. Indie. -j\ Juss.
Imper. Masc. Slug. *; Fern. Sing. ; Plur. |
Part. Act. *\l (with Article |p|).
VIII. form 'J& "tojear (God)".
Perf. J "tnJiaj^.Tnplfit.p, fnlfi l (a promise]' '^
IV. form $ "tojujfil a vow^; Imperf. Indie, jjl;
oS
Imper. ol; Verbal Noun sUut.
v "* "P-
Perf. i^ "to be near"; Imperf. Indie. Ju; Juss. jj; > u ^-
Imper. J. '
2) Those in which the second and third radicals
are weak letters. These retain the second radical (see
Less. 27, 4, Note 2); e.g. ^ "tojoarjate".
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss.
o
A
r. :. e ^ c -
etc. etc. etc.
SS S o.
Part. Active ^ (^IjM) P art - Pass. ^^
Pass. Perf. ^J Imperf. Indie, ^jj.
^ 3 J "to be well watered" (of cattle, land, etc.). ^
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss. Imper.
etc. . etc.
etc. etc.
190 First Part. J^v-
In the same way are conjugated ^_^ "to be worth":
Conjugation of ^o* also written ^> (for ^
live"'.
Perf. Imperf. Indie, (tn cj> /o I
.0. .0.
.^e (also written Lsdf,
d^
^ /.A
^C5> etc. *
*- c^r*'
II. form L> "to let live, greet"; Verbal Nouti' ?
contracted KA^'. 4fc--^ > b **frfr^ x^ :K -^^
" M * x>^ ', jj ^ j|t /
X. form liiu*! "t^* spare alive'^i/in the sense "to
* rrt
be ashamed" generally written with one ^: Perf.
-i. "Imperf. Indie.
4. Verbs in which all three radicals are wealf letters.
The only verb of this class, which is in common
use is ,cJ ^to seek refuge"; Imperf. Indie. <5u; Juss.
UMf Y* V-X> i , ^>
3 tT; Inrper. _jj; Part. Act. 3 T (with Article ^^\\ II. form
H L5? "fcO-g^QW hospitality to"; IV. form ^ I (with same
meaning).
Vocabulary.
school. o.o | (pi. f>fjt>) dirham,
to swear, X. to ' ^ , i j
make to swear 6
'J . . O .
or uj 5L> (literally UJI only.
I (plur. oL>'L5> or
"to come with J, s - .- v ;
to bring (with ^^ ) ^i_^i) need, affair,
accus. of person). - .
'
Twenty-ninth Lesson.
191
GUI*
J*U
6 y
food.
drink.
|(plur. ,3101) people,
\ inhabitants.
length.
life, age.
friendship.
to injure.
V. to be late.
I Salrna (name of
{ woman).
O
existence.
O .02
(plur.^t) light.
6.01
II. to flee. '
o! flight.
(pl- u^>) army.
week.
/(Persian; literally
_o I "the threshold"
j e of happiness)
( Constantinople.
Go G ^tif.
i (plur. jus)) deed.
Exercise 55.
o.., G - - J
O ^ ^
U-ui ^5
sJOJ? JJ>?
a
192 ;; i*^*^ First Part.
Jfc^tutt^
> ^ o ^
Jo
,>H~1 ;1>^ oslto U (Proverb) l
o2 ^ ^ O
Lo c>
l (Less. 47, 8) *tfc Co
j-o ^^ ^
o ^ ^ o
LJ'LX^JI t J\P JJU" js- " J
Exercise 56.
Have you seen us corne (we come)? - - We did
not see you come. - - I wished to see him, but he
refused to see me. You have come to us at a most
seasonable time (the most blessed ^1 of times). ^
In the coming week I will show you the goods I have'
(what is with me of goods). We shalF bring you
what you wish, ir- After the greeting we inform you
that we have come to (^t) Constantinople. -4- The
physician promised me that he would see me every
day. The master saw that I was ashamed (saw me
I was ashamed). Show me the books thou hast
(what is with thee of books).
Thirtieth Lesson. 193
Thirtieth Lesson.
Quadriliteral Verbs.
g -J G o ^
1. The Quadriliteral verb is of the form JJUi e.g.
^ "to translate".
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss. Imper. ;
o . . o^
etc.
etc. etc. etc.
G o.j G .
Part. Active *>.x/> Part. Pass.
Ka^>j.. /
Verbal Noun iufj ^ *$**
.O J^O.J
Pass. Perf. ^>yj Imperf. Indie. f>Ju.
Derived Forms, (st* p^ru^-./^^f ^
* ^ Q * * * ^ & * **&**
a) JJLxaj, e.g. from CT Ii.Lw"to appoint Sultan" ^laJL^o
"to become Sultan".
3 ^ O ^ ^ . O.O..^,
Imperf. Indie. ^-yaX-M^j Imper. ^^loL^o ^
Part, Active ^IJU,^ Verbal Noun
b) Jlil^, e.g. from o tlb, ^U^i "to be quiet". j+4*^i^
Imperf. Indie. ^Uoj ^ Imper.
Part. Active
Arabic Grammar.
G .<
Verbal Noun ...wU^I.
;;;
194 First Part.
There are numerous onomatopoetic quadriliteral
verbs; e.g. Jj: "to quake", 3jjy "to tremble", jj-^ "to
howl (in mourning)", <j*_^ "to whisper" etc.
The Verb , 111. /"- %eP x&)
w ** v *
2. The Verb ^^J "not to be"occurs in thePerfect only:
Sing. 3. masc. L JJj Dual L*Jj Plur.
o^o- ^ ^ o-
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fern.
3 O ^
,, 1. O-wJ
For the syntax of this verb see below 12.
The Verbs ^ and J^.
3. These are known as the Verbs of Praise
,***&!*. and Blame Lo) and occur in the 3 rd Masc. and Fern.
Dnly: ^1 9 ^J/j "to be good"; (JI ^ 9 o^Jj "to be bad".
\Ihe Verb ^.
4. The Verb ^*e followed by the conjunction
.J or . i means u it is possible that; it is to be hoped
"Perhaps (or "it is to hoped")
v that will be".
The other Persons of the Perfect are rare.
Verbs of Surprise or Wonder.
5. To express Surprise or Wonder two methods
are employed:
Thirtieth Lesson. 195
a) The 3 rd Sing. Masc. Perf. of the IV. form
preceded by U "what" and followed by the Accusative;
e.g. |JcjJ cr^^ ^ u how beautiful is Zaid!" (literally
"what has made Zaid beautiful").
b) The 2 nd Sing. Masc. Irnper. of the IV. form fol-
lowed by a word with the Preposition v_> ; e.g. jj^
"how beautiful is Zaidl" (literally "make beautiful with
Zaid").
>The Optative.
6. The Optative is expressed by the Perfect at the
beginning of a sentence; e.g.
aSf xj>, "may God have mercy upon him".
~s
This Perfect may be preceded by ^; e.g. ^6fjsj vi^JLi *$
"may thy hands not grow dry!"
Note. In speech and in popular written language the
Optative is expressed by a Nominal sentence ^fith the verb in
the Imperf. e.g.
^*^>jj ai!f (pronounced allah yar^iamak) "may God have
mercy upon thee". ^ _ -y
The Verb 3f- HT^^S
J _ ^ / ' J \>
7. The Verb jlj Imperf. i^j is used with the
negative particles U ? *$ and ^J (3lj U or jt^j ^' or Jjj ^J)
with aiiother verb or with an Accus. in the sense "is
Slilll-or "continues" e.g. ^ Z^<?/L- T?" ^ x^-^y C-^T"
(Lpfj) J^^S vL^' (Jjj p) ty U "Zaid did not
cease to go i.e. goes still".
jjblii (yjjj jJ) y'[) U "they still fought".
^^ ^ '
tw ^ "he is still alive".
Also:
U "matters were
still in this condition".
13*
196 First Part.
The Verb o
8. The Verb oLc, Imperf. Oj*j "to return" preceded
by a negative and followed by another verb is used to
express JSUUEHS", e.g._ ^^ ^^
Lo "be did not return again".
Lo "we did not return again".
Also in the Imperfect:
I ^ J ^O^ O J^
"do not do so again".
^ oS J j 2
"I will not do it again".
Also with Accus. but without a second verb:
_ (J "the journey was no more
possible". The Verb 3^ ~
9. The Verb ol/, Imperf. olXj expresses the English
* 'almost, nearly^ e.g.
"he nearly did it".
A4CfVJt'*4 iiv vi J
- j S o S j j i _S
/(' (oj*l o f) oyif oJsJ" li| "I almost died".
The Verb "&i&*b^j+##q *)&****
\
10. The Verb ^ preceded by the Conjunction Lc
"as long as" and followed by a verb in the Imperfect, or
anj^c^atiye is used ^9 a ^^^ GS ^^J^^^^->,^ 1 ^\ e -g-
l^yM jto U I as long as ^^ c^o Lo [ "as long as
* ,* * - - [he stands". * * *> ,- ( I stand".
L*jl5 *)L) Lo I L^jo o*^w> Uo I PtJ,"
-- nH
r < r The Verbs Jo and oLb.
z^ /, ,, M .^'^^^<^-&^^. } '
ll. The Verb Jjj "to be little or rare" is used in
- the phrase U JsS (also written LJLi) to express "seldom",
4JUL, ^^O ^w- -S^
e.g. U^x> Lo JJJ ('uii) "thou hast seldom come to us".
"^ > J J -
The verb JLb, Imperf. o^Ld "to be long" is used
Thirtieth Lesson.
197
in the phrase U 3lb (also generally written LJlb) to
express "not^jbr a long tiiaa". e.g.
Uttfw (U juL>) LJLb "thou hast not honoured us
for a long time".
The Verb Q tf and its Sisters.
12. The verb Jt used as a copula takes its predi-
o., ^^^^^
cate (+~>) in the jVccusative (see Less. 12, 4), e.g.
L>u Jo; ^ "Zaid was a merchant".
Certain other verbs known as the Sisters of ^
* * >**.
Lj& oij^>!) have the same construction, e.g.
*> o -
y^J "not to be" (see 2), which may also take
a predicate with ^.
^Jii to remain.
*L> to ^continue, last, (see 10).
il^ U not to cease, (see 7).
^Uo (Imperf. ^^u) to become.
^ ^ O C
to be or do in the morning,
to be or do in the evening,
to be or do in the night.
5 ^ O ^ O.,
|jj. Jv-ouw .j^J Said is hot a boy.
= to become.^
> 9
LJL, c
remained well.
we are getting (become)
tired.
198
First Part.
13. The verbs uo "to become", Je>f "to take",
and jt "to make" used before another verb in the
Imperfect mean "to begin to" e.g.
^y^o GjeM or iLo or llLt>- we began to travel.
Instead of the Imperfect of the verb the preposition
,3 or (^ with the Verbal Noun may be used e.g.
we began to travel.
Vocabulary.
IV. to make
excellent. 5 c
J IV. to make
( bad, vile.
since (conj.). I
j kind, sort.
. to be si-
en t with eyes
cast down.
- 9
province.
^^ innocent.
(pl.^o^
narrative,
story.
s - f part of the
jJjO kingdom.
f the Turkish
f to occupy
^ \ oneself.
IV. to reform.
aim.
home, {fk/ii*!****
\fmC.fa
*
V
other than (follow-
ed by gen.). With
j following adjec-
l tive = negative,
incapable.
able to.
attainment (w.
power, ability.
JlL star (in astrology),
*^ ( 3 ) to blame.
II. to cut to pieces.
IV. to please,
to murmur,
to withdraw.
Thirtieth Lesson.
199
, *
before.
-. - f (*) to attain
)* { (with Li).
victory.
building.
\
V. to jconverse.
misfortune.
|(i5TlL to pitch,
1 a tent. / ^i^
**.t)
curtaijL . *. -y?6
very black.
ship.
without.
rudder.
outer, external.
( medicine.
.Jal belly.
( -
6 he died)
to speak angrily,
to wail.
VII. to rush.
i ^
like, able, equal.
Go
a III. to resist.
- | loneliness (with
5 I suffix = alone).
5 he alone.
jy II., III. and IV. /
fc I to help. ^ ]
>> (pi. *jj?) care, anxiety. f ^j
class, O kind.y ^^ ;
*f ^ V '/* ->
J thousand (plur. see
1 Less. 32, 2).
time. AA <r*^f^^^
/?/> ^ (^>i
comfort, joy.
nature.
human.
j despair. <j*+^
i VIII. to expect.
5 attainment.
to wish.
except.
i grave.
- | to commit highway
robbery.
j to curse.
G > 4
(pi. j$J^) breast.
G . o d*? ^
i (pi. &*5!) goods.
r |^fo mention, remem-
ber.
CS
200 First Part.
G o .,
o ., O o - .>
ass goodness, nobility. X*jw cainp. ..- .
G - --- ^ ^' (^f 71 *");
^V cup. ( 6/0 ^3o III. to defend
fti\ t^A- 5 \^-^ &$|J Exercise 57.
vl^ 1 .
^ -oEo^o -^>l -o o- >w-=--
. -ill
^jtj j^. ,&
yff^Cif. - J w -o - I - o oj^ - o
!<J>,5 U o^iJ! IcXS 5 ^AJ 5Uxa9| to
... - ...
'. / LJ ' , " ^ " , -^ '" *-*
4M&
cr
^..
^jj^oj f *
,3 W>jJ M* lirfj
j ^JLi 3ijj : i xlx2i x3]jjT ^
,0-0 -^. 0.0-0 jo^
^OJ^ O w ^O - -- - - -
Thirtieth Lesson.
201
(&3-I
D<*
O ^ Of-
cr
o oj
O - C/X) - I O
J i ^U.3
202 First Part.
o
Exercise 58.
The Emir died (Pass. V. of Jw), may God have
mercy on him! May God prolong your daysl
/ ^ /* /
|_^ \S May God reward you for (^) us ! --.. The woman
,^o x began to prepare the food. God curse his father I
They almost died from fear (Adv. Accus.). Satan
whispers in the breasts of men. pupil, translate
these words! - - I have already translated them. - -
boy, be quiet! - boys, be quiet! Good is this
girl, how beautiful she is! Bad are these goods,
how vile they are! Good morning (May God do to
thee in the morning good), my master. - We still
- o-
remember your kindness./ You are not (j*u$ heros.
>( As long as we live, we shall remember your kindness,
A li-v>) ~ Thanks to God we are still well (sound). boys,
'J > do not do this again ! - We will not do it again. -
y I have not seen you for a longtime. We had almost
} \5 drunk (^> V.) the cup of death (^JU). -L^P iey
continued travelling until they arrived at the canrn of
4^"5^ /o ^,.>b ^ tu^Jn
the enemies. We became [y*s*l) incapable of defending.
- So long as we, remained in this city, we continually
saw wonders. \-L^_yg /&. ^ [^
s
Thirty-first Lesson.
Relative Sentences,
1. The Relative Pronoun
*Z
^^H^Ai-*/./ Sing. Masc. ^JJI, Fern. ^JJ (in all cases), "who,
^ which". ',
,
Thirty-first Lesson. 203
Dual Norn. Masc. ^loJjt Fein. g liH
Gen. Accus. Masc.
Plural Masc. H ,. j^' or jtjl't
(in all cases).
7? L
Note. The pronoun i5<AJ> is compounded of the Article
.-"
i)t (therefore the haraza is a hamzat alwasl), the particle J and
the Demonstrative L>, ^50 (see Less. 9, 1).
Notice that the common forms of the Sing. Masc. and Fern.
and the^Plur. Masc. are written with one lam, the other^forms
with__t_wo.
2. Other Pronouns used in Relative sentences are
( - r "he who", U "that which, what", more rarely ^5!
Fern. Xj? (with following Gen.) "he who" and its com-
pounds ^^j? "whosoever" and Uj? "whatsoever".
The words o ^ and U are always treated as nouns,
-5
i^jJt usually as an adjective but sometimes as a noun,
o
when it has the same meaning as ^ "he who" and
U "what".
3 3 O-0^3 i O-OCE _
3. The Relative Pronoun is called
< >' - \
and the following Relative Sentence KLJ I. This sentence
is treated in Arabic as quite independent and as coor-
dinate with the main sentence; e.g.
sbl ^jJf j^>J? the man, who came (literally:
The man who he came).
ix^ (^jJf j^>^I the man, whom I saw (literally:
The man who I saw him).
S
204 First Part.
A ^S JJt -H tne man to whom I
wrote a letter (literally: The man - - who - - I wrote
a letter to him).
the man, whose son I saw
(literally: The man who - - I saw his son).
The Relative Pronoun must always be caught up
again in the Relative sentence by a Pronoun (called
6 O
joli or ~Hj) either implied in the verb (as in the first
sentence above) or manifest (as in the other sentences).
' - 6 xi '
Note. After * and lo the Jol^ is often oinitted; e.g.
L U for aJuL U "that, which I have seen".
4. If the noun to which the Relative sentence is
attached is indefinite, the Relative pronoun is omitted.
Such a sentence is called a Ka^>; e.g.
I met a man, who had
>
gone out from his house.
o-ytf' vyuLs^ lg-o XJj-Xxi -L&J? Damascus is a city,
in which are many marvels.
5. Certain constructions of the Participle Passive
are to be explained as shortened Relative sentences; e.g.
the witnesses, whose
names are mentioned below.
The Article here may be regarded as a shortened
Relative pronoun, the following clause as a whole
depending on it; e.g. "The witnesses, who (mentioned
are their names)". The following phrases of a similar
nature are much used :
&Jf jJUt or -Jt Ujii the above-mentioned.
-
^ Htt,
Thirty-first Lesson.
205
-^ o,o j j a 2
the man above-mentioned.
the woman above-mentioned.
^ w S
't the men abov^e-mentioned.
Vocabulary.
Mt. Hermon. *<>, I. and VIII. to hear.
Damascus.
I (Elative of J*)
highest,
summit.
IV. to deny.
to embrace,
surround. j
(pi. Lai!) melody.
T_
II. to cut in pieces
G ^o
6 ^ ( (plur. oL/l) liver,
(used metaphori-
cally = heart).
(^5) II. to soften,
hard rock.
o -
(pi- l\tf\ or .V (i) to be tender, soft,
- ^
yj^J) relative.
G ^
I (plur. ^
1 answer.'
cold.
^L> giant.
G
obstinate.
to be certain, V. to
be convinced of.
/ t-'-
''
IP - fin. to be like,
I cc
tender.
as, as if.
misfortune.
KJb (pi. LiL') ]
- '- 1
?b (pi. !.j) J
(i) to break. 'J?
'ii to determine (on j^). ^f
'.V. to deliver.
Ii oppressed. *
******
206
First Part.
IV. to seize (with^).
to fall.
veil.
fresh. ( ^ Tjp
(^) II. to adorn.
rosy.
beautiful, shining.
o '-
UJ> languid.
IV. to rain (trans.).
jjj pearl (collective).(^tj =
^
cry.
IV - to disturb.
(pl.J^)wild beast.
tearing, carnivorous.
/( p l. O f ^ "fold")
\ ' ,.c. ^^
( meantime. N
IV. to advance
GO- ,.,,.
. pierdng, splitting,
(pl. ) partridge.
. , , ,
to be absent,
Jli (pl. ^Lsl^5) wretched.
' . ' s
(pl. ilJ^I) strong.
i_
brave. v.
. -
refuge, escape.
delightful, agreeable.
IV. to free.
tf to shoot.
death.
to cry.
| the day before
yesterday.
^^
struggle.
^^
i (pass.) to be lost.
battle.
to be intoxicated.
blood '
o, *?
iUUo courage.
Thirty-first Lesson. 207
(to carry, induce T -
i to S l o^ mea8Ure
&* family, ^
(V. and VIII. to j2?
consider (with ).*** **- fl " ' / ~
_$>: flowers (coll.).
> ^ , 7
method. - - -
V. to smile.
6.
means.
.,. sa g e -
tef swiftness. x& ,
o 'wlj jJi Mt. Lebanon.
entrance, approach. , ^,^0^ > ^*z
11 Mediterranean.
^o*Ti --
l death. ^ ; ^V. to eny
xxi^ letter, note. ^ (pl.^U-i) prisoner. n^
!4t hidden, absent. ^?li ^; boner ^. "^f- f ^
r
number. mouth.
V. to endure. ^ marshah t;
6S
(^) to measure.( 5^7> ^-^^ l as t-
//Exercise 59.
CT
b , o-o j j o5, , > J -,
O l v^ijJi ^ xXj!^ (Less. 1, 4) w ; lsL
208
First Part.
o ?>*.. -,o-o - I
j\s $
J Osl (jSJ S aoJ^JOi ^, AjJlixH iAP "-h&Jt. (
..
Jw * ^ - w, 'J
&U:>- l^JjJ ,-.
V
J J J O - - ^ K<> ^.0,0 -_ I - > -
XxX^^o j) i cuXJ ) . .LX- ) )i^P Al X.AJ
^>l*^X,
, . . -^ ^
O , ^ . w-o - O SO^) -1^- ^ -O^ OJO^
.35 /I o o o * ^ -Six ^ -
viJ J -O^ ^^ V*v
V \J^j -J \J j I _y
^ oo.
Thirty-first Lesson.
..^^P- , jsli ^SL & Cjl*i -Ct B^ii (Less. 44, 2 B 8)
Sr ^ ^ < f \
rf ^oc o *o^* - ^po ,^l G^^Oi.^ ^o
JLJ Jb
J53'v^r**<*< Pcw'? '
, s r ' @ *' >J * .o^ ^ * * ^o '*/ ^ j
^1? ^oLJt - ioJLc JSJ^o ^ ^j**^ sLJjU'j Iw^fc 'L^JW* wxJ ^
*
OS^) O ^ O.. 0$ ,5 >0-^0,^ ^O* {*
J^U! ^AxoJ Jou 1 J 3 J oJLoj Jo 3 o^LJi j j^t-".
t
O i
'
^
o^fts i^>i j. \ f
(Less. 44, 2 B 8) ji
.
.,Orw*U^fcC~
o> ^-"0
- , X
j* ^o> s- ^-- ,^0,0.. jo>ji^ ~ci- J o J
i> Xft^j K.^I 3 O tf ^5 ^ ^^J^ 1 . ^5 j^ 3 i ^x
" '
so, , I ^o^ ^ ^o i^j^a^-^-
tl)J
^,os^^ ^SJ ^o,o5 sS^i -o
bjwJo (all that) ; u*Ji uxX^JI r W HJ^ ; uxi
Arabic Grammar.
210 First Part.
|>
Exercise 60.
Those men, who are in the market, buy and sell.
Those women, whom we have seen in the street,
are of our family. This is the boy to whom we
^^ have given the money. He, whose tongue is long,
his intelligence is small. The girl, in whose hand
(was) a flower, smiled. I saw girls (oixj), in whose
hands were flowers. All letters, which come to us,
must be addressed to (it is necessary that they be in
the name of) the director of our journal. This young ^
man, whose father we know, is cleVer. / Mt. Lebanon, ';!
from the summit of which you see the Mediterranean,
is a very high mountain. After the enquiry con-
cerning thy welfare (conditions) and the information
concerning thee (thy informing) (as to) which I hope that
thou art better than could be wished (thou art in excess
of what is wished), I inform thee that thy friendly,,
letter has reached me and I rejoice over ( j,) thy health I
and thy well-being^(soundness), which "mayest thou
continually enjoy. -_! saw soldiers, with whom (were)
prisoners. I inform you tha
dition, \ybich you know. A
mouth wKs a bone. The a
is very remnvned. The abov
the owners olthis house.
I ana still in the con-
log met a dog, in whose
>ove-mentioned Marshal
^-mentioned persons are
* * *
i.lV
Thirty-second Lesson.
The Numerals.
A. The Cardinal Numbers.
1. The Cardinal Numbers are as follows:
a) From 110: .
Thirty-second Lesson.
'211
o
1. masc. Jv>!^
Arabic
8 ^>i.
'
|
6.J f
em. -
Jo>!
^
c>
. .0
2. ' c; Utt
" cjM^i
_ / a i BO e,, \
.^
3. xiii Uritten&j;
cu^ii / a ^ 8 ^ ' r^ >**
\\vritten oJLi/ '
r
O.oz
4. $
,!
Oo .
5. &MM^>
' ^-^^
'
S
6. iU~
^i>^
O.o.
Oo.
7. iJtx~
f*-
o. . . / also s- i r
\
) ,, . US / a ^ 80 ' r^
0. o
O c,
9. K*^J
" jr^
r
Oo .
10. 8^
jr^ L
b) From 1119.
11. rnasc. ^^c Jo>] i
... .0
10 . ... ..-.(
2. N, ^Xt U3^
C^A , 'j***" & V*- 1 '
'* .- s j*i!^ , UAA< ^
1 '-^ A ^ VV*MX
I0 - " ?**^
nlli vi^li '^
..o . ..oE *
14. ,, ~cX& X*j.t
s r^ '
.. o . . o ,
r^ u-*^
. . o a
* /- ,'
lU. ,, -UCsfi NA^M
gyi* *-.
14*
212 First Part.
Arabic
^ . w-.*. * - .. o .. ., o - Signs.
17. masc. &z. Xjtx^ fern. ^c. **v Iv
18.
"1 O
1 J . v -XvsC Ot*w J ^ 5 /M'Xi ^..vwO
c) From 20100.
20. , M Jis masc. and fern.
-^^
21. masc. fc Js^i fern.
22.
etc.
30. masc> and
" " "
40.
50.
60.
70.
80.
90.
^^
(also frequently written 'i&^
7? ??-.??
9-
but the alif is not pro-
nounced).
d) From 200 upwards.
200.
Thirty-second Lesson.
* < (
also
written
300.
400.
500.
600.
700.
800.
900.
1000.
2000.
3000.
etc. to 10000.
11000. uTf ^ jc>T etc.
100000. oj] '&*
000000. vjll JJf or "
or
j-.,
Plur.
213
Arable
slgn *-
I**,
r...
0. Zero, Nil ^ c
Declension of the CardinarNumfiers. ^' ^ '
2. The Numerals from 1 to 10 are declined: a) ^uo]
-.,0 <"
and 'uutft as Dual with Gen. Accus. ,.,.^0!
vx
b) the others as Singulars, e.g.
G- O O- - O
214 First Part.
G *
Accus. JjoL- Gen.
Fern. vis
The Numeral O U> is declined like
S o.
11 is indeclinable
12 forms Gen. Accus. j&s. ,c&\\ Fern. ,
13 19 are indeclinable.
The Numerals 20 90 are declined as Sound
Plurals; e.g.
Nom. O3j >x^; Gen. Accus. ^jjAc
The other Numerals are declined as follows:
Nom. /> Accus. ** Gen. '&*
and
Go o2
vJdt; UUJ;
5
G o2 G .^
has two forms of the Plural : o^ f and
the latter being used for "thousands" in an indefinite
sense. Pt*- ^ "*9 's&J+t f*'- ^-> &*
The CarpUeSTnumbers from 3 to 10 are used in
the fermnine form with masculine nouns and in the
masc^with fern, nouns.
Formation of the Compound Numbers.
Compound numbers from 20 on are formed by
joining the units, tens and hundreds by 3 .
The largest number is put first, but the units are
21
Thirty-second Leneon. 215
. >**>!** --- Sot
1890 ji^u ii xXxi ^US ^*H U11
Such an expression as eighteen hundred must be
expressed by one thousand eight hundred.
In_the compound numbers each numeral is de- j
^ o ^ TIE
clined; e.g. Accus. ^i^ \j^>\ etc.
Syntax of the Numerals.
4. The Numerals are joined to the words they
qualify according to the following rules:
a) The_ Nunierals___l_and 2 are adjectives; e.g.
.Ool 3 ' slfc "one heart". t
glJbt is seldom used with a noun, because the
Dual of the noun itself can be used, but when it is
so used, the O us2t loses its final nun (see Less. 7, 1)
and the noun follows in the Gen. Sing.
b) The Numerals 3 to 10 are Substantives and
are followed by the noun in the Gen. Plur. ; e.g.
>* * + > o -
JL>. x>^L3 Three men. l*j J^c. Ten women.
* '< * J
Note. They are more rarely placed after the noun in
apposition to it; e.g.
O ^ * + O^ Oo* ^
c) The Niiigerals 11 to 99 are followed by the
noun in the Accus. Sine-. ; e.o-. (e6u>r>?& jL I* i*
'
c> Eleven men. o^j^ 1 Twenty men.
d) The Numerals from 100 on are Substantives
and are followed by the noun in the Gen. Sing.; e.g.
Ki
Three hundred men. xLJ
ihousand nights.
216 First Part.
e) After Compound Numerals the noim follows
the laws~~fegiilating its relation to the last numeral
mentioned; e.g.
.
&o A hundred and three men. (Rule b).
^O^o--6*
* A hundred and twenty-
five men. (Rule c).
5. The Indefinite Numeral/ "some", when it s
used for a number -between 3 and 10, is expressed lv*
GO e^ o
. the substantive j*u (later also &*u) followed by the
" 7 ^ ' i '*
/, o ,o
Xy^) ^^ some
- .
Note. This word must not be confused with thte word
(ji3j ? which means, "one of some, a certain" e.g. &\JL
"Some poets" or "A certain poet".
An indefinite number over 10 is expressed by
6 M-
word ^juj; e.g.
. . A hundred thousand and some
^
(more) souls.
. .-. .* *
Method of denoting Hours, and Days.
6. a) To express the Hour of the day the Ordinals
are generally used (see Less. 33); e.g.
KfLllf Three o'clock (the third hour).
- Z /O
jfci&J i j At three o'clock (in the third hour
But the Cardinal numbers are used predicatively ; e.g>
<3^ ^ ^ j ^ y, p.
$& KeL^JI It is three o'clock (the hour is three
- - 3 -
Jw>! xcLwJj It is eleven o'clock.
Note. oLcLw o^lS would mean U 3 hours"; x
'11 hours". 5
if
Thirty-second Lesson. \ 217
"What time is it?" is expressed by xtLJl or
o .. 3 + s . ' n
Note. The hours are counted in the East from sunset. _
b) The times of day t in a t>>ft m rTftipPri "in the
evening", u at midday" are best expressed oy the Accus., -
otherwise by the preposition j,; e.g.
j) In the morning,
In the evening.
$ j) At midday.
7. The names of the Days of the week are:
Sunday.
Monday.
Tuesday.
(^) j.jj Wednesday.
^-^T (JL^) ^ Thursday, ^^i/ f
-o^o^, , rf ^ J0rf
Friday.
j Saturday.
The word ^j or ^^j is often omitted; e.g.
Tuesday.
j - o MS. j > op-oS
"The week is Kjt^>5 or ^ % x^ I
_'^ ^,-7 f
The Months of the Christian year.
8. The Christian year is called iLL&LU XJLj? "the
birth year" or iU^^T *LLj1 u the Messiah year" or
*tv**-^l xLlJi "the sun year".-
218
First Part.
The twelve Months are named:
a) usually in Egypt: ;
jj^i July (also ^1|J).
t J O }.
^jlL January.
3 * O
^1^*3 February.
(jj(* March.
Jo^al April.
_jjU May.
/
^o^j June.
b) usually in Syria:
j,lSjT o jJl^ January. . : v
iu^i February.
Jo? March.
6 -
o L^.o April.
^t May.
June.
ii August.
*\ > 0.0,
^x^JCo^ September.
> >oi-
October,
j November.
December.
o >*
July.
ji September.
J-^J November.
^
J 1 ^ December.
- 0-0 * O ,
B.C. is expressed in Arabic by o^Uif JyJs (abbreviated *^).
' ^ o ^> . o .,
A n
" L ^' 11 ?i I? n
or simple j*).
The Months of the Mohammedan Year.
i i o ox) > , s
9. The Mohammedan year is called
"the flight year" (abbreviated after a date to p) or
Xj-lilT X.l^.li "the moon year".
i*' <:*Auf ^ e> ^- r <* 2~nJ+ * a *
Thirty-second Lesson*-*- 219
v n -, *-o -
Dates are reckoned from 16 th July 622 A.D., this
being the day of the flight of Mohammed from Mecca ^
to Medina.
Every year has 354 days. (AI> - .. ._ .-^
The Mohammedan year 1327 began on 23 r " Jan. -
1909 A.D.
The year consists of the following twelve lunar
months '
( the month
. . , 2 ; a "t* ^ S
S^f ^ (Month pf^the r
u./r4rn$ 2^i >TT-nt-^i k^e ^~.r^^*-*- > e-^. o ^^** ^-c*, /t- ^5T < x c .
t^ Some names of these months are often used with
ecial attributive; e.g.
etc.
Mohammedan Feasts.
The Mohammedans celebrate two chief festivals:
1) oLJ j\ "the small festival" at the begin-
e s* %
ning of the month jffc immediately after the end of
the great fast in the month
2) ^JJ7 Jyj*j1 "the great festival" also called
J&il ^ "the sacrificial festival" on the 10 th of the
^^^ '
month x^I 3 6, when the pilgrims offer sacrifice in Mecca.
220 First Part.
Method of indicating Date.
10. To. indicate Date the Ordinal numbers are
generally used. After the Ordinal is put. the Name of
5 o
the Month, with or without the word ^ before it,
and after this the numbers indicating the Year with
s rf
or without \*^ before them, in the Genitive; e.g.
theS^ofMuharram.
lst Jan
1896.
On su(5h and such a date is expressed by the
ccus. or the preposition g t
A^^ ',Jj] dlcation of Axr<2(c *^j>
11. How old art thou? is 'expressed by:
f ^ * <J * * ) O 3
XJLw ^y ^)^ literally "thy life (is) how many
years?" or:
- o s ^ ^ O ^ ^ o
oo ! *^* ^ ^i. literally "a son of how many
years art thou?"
The answer to such a question would be of the form :
"I am twenty years old"?
Vocabulary.
// *^,
Ko minute. (^- ^U^ jJ^ place.
O- i
'^*^ value, price.' P
. > rf
X^i; ,.JJ 13)
Kx^i equipment.
^2f ,, -, - I VIII. to subscribe
\ the first. ^ (to A)
' V 7
o.
x expiration (of time). eUls franc.
Thirty-second Lesson.
221
direction, part (of
the
ij* (pl. bl,U
j>| reward, cost.
IV. to advertise,
page (of a book).
line,
jlo ytpTcvolv*
o revolution.
00*^0
o=
(pl. yio) circle.
- - - J to divide, VII. to
| be divided.
degree,
a second.
surface.
hot. .
| moderate, ^
( temperate.
f the land of
I Egypt-
southern.
Upper Egypt,
IMudirlya (a name
given to some pro-
vinces of Egypt).
as for (see Less. 46,
2f).
beside. ,v** ^~
(pl.
centre.
*.\i^
O ,05
^ (pl. ^Lyoi) mile.
oyj square.
9 <,
^j dry land.
Muhafaza (a name
given to some pro-
vinces of Egypt).
tribute.
guinea.
yearly.
222
6 -
First Part.
list, register,
library, bookshop,
title, address.
| (Turkish) of full
( weight or value.
6- o
/ (Persian) thin
j cotton stuff.
post.
| Alexander
I \ the great.
o o
Alexandria.
3 * '
narrative, play.
jj (pi. l^) wind.
ravel. <"^>j> ^^^
r 5w*-ii north.
LI+- Ibn Batuta, an
*&} Arabian tra-
'J*\ veller, who
died 778 A.H.
= 1377 A.D.
geography.
' v^L^ south. ^/" (i^y-^-'
'*-& east, (^vr^^v ^/i*.
Q> ^f A
v_ yj^i west.
jjU heighth.
<u v ^xx] Amin Bey
^^' slumber.
(a modern Egyptian
r).
^J>^o to spend (time).
Xfc.11 "the trusty
jui VIII. to be strong.
xJlli washerwoman.
guide (name of a book).
eLo xiS, Rifa f at Bey, (mo- v
dern Egyptian writer).
^L packing.
c,. o > *
total. jr
If Exercise 61.
H. to lose (time), be
slow (of a watch).
Thirty-second Lesson. 228
* C
o ., - - - o ^ M j * o .
O
5r o ,5
.xXc X^JUi oL^>-t ^.jLw ^ LCsljS yixc i 1 ^}! A-^V- (f r ) (3*-
* o f, 6 o . o* - o i -o , . . - -TSV" ^ * k*
>| Jfc.fi HJ^I^JI iL^w^J; JGIJ
'' w ^ ^ O J O ^ < O O .. .> O ^ ^ *Oo ^ O w
^ + f-u-0 -O
cr
GZO.O o ^ > * * *. ?**** *. j * Z, -o~ s ~
'j* $** o-^^ (S*** Jr^ 1 '
J^t
6s ^6- ^ ^ o, o^ ^ so^^o>
224 First Part.
i 3 ) <J-0
..C lo
Av*b/C
* Alt* if,.
3 /A ~ e
'/
If.
Exercise 62.
The earth revolves round (ji) the sun once (one
revolution) in* 365 days and 6 hours. - The Moslems
reckon from tne- Flight, which was (and it was) in the
year 622 A.D. Wilt thou honpur us with a visit (thy
,j coming) on Sunday? I will /visit you on Saturday.
Wilt thou come in the rnornangt or the evening?
/'
Jl> I p*-
* ^< ^ Thirty-third Lesson. 225
I will come In the afternoon (after the midday), if God
will. Alexander the Great came to Egypt in the yeui
332 B.C. and] built the city of Alexandria. The number \* f
of its inhabitants is now 231396 souls. How old are
you (two)? l^ I am 25 years old and my brother has
not reached in age more than 9 years. - - How old
art thou O girl? - - Next (on the coming) Wednesday
I shall be (reach) 17. The winds come to this
mountain (Accus.) from the four directions, the North
(and) the South (and) the East and the West, and its
height is 11000 feet.* Truly^, my eye has not ^^
tasted ( xlJ [u]) slumber for.<(sinee) four days. We
j&*"' ** ***;
spend about three months in the mountains, for the 3 j
heat is strong in the city. -- The washerwoman brought
us six shirts and two nightshirts (shirts for the sleep
Go- / *?' '
*^j) and twelve handkerchiefs. Hasan Pasha died i5/ J
in the year 1888, may God have mercy upon him! i*^->
What is the time? It is ten minutes past nine
(nine and ten minutes). - - Thy watch is slow, it will
CF* o,
soon be ten. How much Ju is this book? -
Forty-five piastres, my master. - - This is dear
~f
will give ttjee twenty. Give me thirty, and enough!
Thirty-third Lesson.
B. The Ordinal Numbers.
1. The Ordinals are generally formed from the
G ~
Cardinals according to the type Js*l3 but with some
exceptions : ^ ptvraU *** *j ;
,* w <+*+*&?
^v ^ 1 thf first,
z e. \
\ iUJt^l the second. *
Arabic Grammar. !.'>
226 First Part.
fern. X2JI&T the third.
the fourth,
the fifth.
> - w
the sixth.
the seventh,
the eighth.
-
;J I the ninth.
5_ikh the tenth.
** +
All the above are declined fully.
The Ordinals from 11 to 19 are<ondeclinabl(
-ToT 7T - & s
fem. B,^ X-olif the eleventh.
iljllj? the twelfth.
-- s
XiJliJ! the thirteenth etc.
For the higher numbers the Cardinals only are
used; except that the Ordinals of the Units are used
joined to the Cardinals of the Tens to express the
(^ Compound Ordinals. The Article must be attached to
each numeral used.
^ y o o
masc. and fem. the twentieth.
fern. ^ 3 _xijtJi 3 KjoL^i the twenty-first.
' G~s3jt**td- <$?>t44J
O ^LJ| 5 Ljilll the twenty-second.
,, o ^yLtJ! 3 XJoliJi the twenty- third etc,
i
Thirty-third Lesson. 227
XXL I masc. and fern, the hundredth,
fern. 8J^3f
,/ T ,o, ' the laSt '
Note 1. For the use of the Ordinals in the indication of
Dates and the Hours of the day see the previous lesson.
->s?oc
Note. 2. The Ordinals have the Sound Plural, e.g. J^M
- JiSo
Plur. cppl.
J oS j ^ ,2c5
The word Oj^l has also a Broken Plur. JJt^H meaning
> *~oe > ' ^cc-S
"the first parts' 1 just as f>^\ has a Plur. j^i^^l "the last
i , oo y -o
parts", and ,ia^i "the middle" has Ja~*\*^\ "the middle parts".
These terms are sometimes used for the three decades of the
month.
2. The Numeral Adverbs "firstly, secondly, thirdly"
etc. are expressed by the Adverbial Accus. of the
Ordinals, e.g/w-^-^*/
> etc.
3. The Numeral Adverbs "once, twice, three times"
etc. are expressed usually by the word s^o in the
Accus., e.g.
a-* "once", ^y "twice", oL* c^^li "three times" etc.
(Once = "once upon a time, one day" is U^j or
Sometimes the occurrence of an action once or
twice is expressed by the Verbal Noun with the ending
6 s^ > o
B (the so-called ayo **J) e.g.
^ *)S^ ;^^ ' ^ e turns rouQ d once or twice".
15*
228 First Part.
4. The Fractions (with the exception of "a half"
O o ) G 3 i G ^.oe
are of the type Jois or J**s with the Plural
G - o
Plur.
G o ) O > j G -oE
V* , g, ^1
Go^ G>> G-oE
/7 V'S
GOJ GJ, 'G^oE
Ooj GJJ G^o
/*-**" n
G oj>
G , or-
tLyvbfrt
O, . .
e.g. 2 / 3 ixJ^;
If a whole and a fraction are united, they must
be joined by ^ ; e.g. ^ ^ [//
-" ' '
4 6 / 6 = 4
Note. l /4 is often written, ^ ; V^i <; 3 /4, ^ .
5. The Multiplicative adjectives "twofold, threefold"
j. are of the form jJtL>; e.g. ^juU "twofold"; <^JJL*
9 s-j
"threefold" (also = "triangle"); <c.jyc "fourfold" (also =
O^o j
"square"). "Single, simple" is o^axi.
6. The Distributive adjectives "two by two" etc.
are expressed
a) by repetition of the Cardinal number, or
Thirty-thin! hfisson. 229
^Ufitji***,}***,
," /!*!
b) by the forms ^^ or Jsjuw; ej
or ^j&* t^L^they come two x
by two. 7**^
vi&v ^* (*^j c^^o I passed by people (walking)
in twos and threes.
7. Numeral adjectives expressing thejoumber of
parts of which anything is made, are of the form j,l*, e.g.
^Ji Biliteral.
~ $& Trilateral, or 3 cubits long, or high.
S* -> rt
^pC. Quadrimeral, or 4 cubits high, or a quatrain.
Vocabulary.
e- o . S t o .
doctrine, teaching. yi eastern.
J J o ^
.L<r- Zanzibar,
lesson. J -:->
' -^ | (fem. ic bl^) central,
noble. ^^5
tradition (in Islam).
western '
5, (a sect of \f^ southern.
Mohammedans).
VIII. to comprise, ^|' cape,
contain. ' i ^
6 ,, <to to follow, belong.
s (pi. pji) branch.
._ continent.
^)jtx Maghrib.
^ -s [II. to date, (Verbal
^^ o . ^ i Noun = date,
$T# Algeria. ( history).
, -, - .- fill, to agree, corre-
Morocco. (JP3 { spond with. ^/
W T
230 First Part.
o > >
rsng
of the sun. _
setting ) ^^5 to be spoilt.
.
-:? i u ^ v-j chapter.
H Frankish, European.
o,os o^ vjjoot beginning.
l.^iando^) aioj -;t
letter, particle. go^J^as Spring.
(pi. 9|5) part. 2 Autumn.
- f sura, (chapter of
1 the Koran).
class.
-... -s ftheFatiha(nameof * - ,.
UJI 1 the 1 st ' sura). noble -
Exercise 63. r , I
Thirty-third Leasoii. 231
) > ~ , - ' . O > x C x&- ) w x x * ft -C , _ -
tf ULo. *yjUc *>^u oJtfl x^oUJf xc J!
JC.0 xx <0 > x
lAAV N^ UJ! tf r.
**.*>* - - sro*
r v
i 0x0 0-0 J > ^0<x xxx- xxS-OJGi,, XXX
X O X X O<
rf uaii J^i
0-0 x I O
Exercise 64.
The date of this letter is: Tuesday the 1 st July
1890, corresponding with the 13 th Dhu'lqa f da 1307. -
The 114 th Sura of the noble Koran is called "The Sura
J xo
of (the) men". In the first days (JJt^i) of the month
of May you (sing.) will receive (will come to you) a ^JL
letter from us and, if God will, you will send us the *y^,
answer in the latter days of June. In this night I
have not slept a quarter of an hour. - - I will return
to your dwelling after three quarters of an (from the)
hour. Take seven eighths of this stuff and we will
')
232 First Part.
, ' take the last eighth. Two thirds of this food is
spoilt. - - My servant was in the fifteenth year of his
life. Yesterday I read the first (and) second and
third chapters of this book, and to-morrow I shall read
tJae fourth (and) fifth and sixth."^ How old art thou?
- I am in the twenty-sixth year of my life, for
I shall be twenty-six (reach the twenty-six) on the
th January.' The beginning of Spring is on the
21 st March, and the beginning of Summer on the
21 st June, and (the beginning) of Autumn on the
21 st September, and (the beginning) of Winter on the
21 st December. The doctrine of the Relative Pronoun
is contained (is found) in the 31 st Lesson of this book.
There are three kinds of words in the Arabic
language: firstly the Noun, (and) Secondly the Verb,
(and) thirdly the Particle.
END OF PART I.
288
Second Part,
Thirty-fourth Lesson.
The Noun and its Derivation.
1. Nouns (^[ Plur. gwf) are divided according
to their Derivation into:
6 .
a) Primitive; e.g. uyv r, "head". Such nouns are
to be found in the dictionaries under the verbal stem,
.** -
although in this case the verb y*^ "to be at the head of
a tribe, to strike on the head" is derived from the noun.
b) Derivative:
a Derived from Verbs. Most nouns are of this
..
class, e.g. Jcci "killing" from jJs; *X^* "session, council"
-. ^ 6 . *> *
from ,jJb* "to sit"; ^ "great" from ^S "to be great".
6 - -*
P) Derived from Nouns; e.g. sj^'u "a place in
e -s S.o
which there are lions" from j^l "a lion";
"Islamic" from r t "Islam".
2. The most usual nouns derived from the verb are:
a) The Verbal Noun (^ j^/>) which properly expresses
the verbal idea in the form of a noun, but sometimes
has a more remote meaning and is then known as the
b) The Active Participle
c) The Passive Participle (J
234 Second Part.
These three forms have been treated in the first
part of the grammar, but the following facts regarding
the Verbal Noun of the Simple (I.) form of the verb
should be noted:
G o.
a) The form Joe occurs especially in transitive
verbs of the form Joe and Jots; e.g. JJ3 from Jsii "to
Go. .,
kill"; ^s from ^ "to understand".
G .. - -
b) Joe in intransitive verbs of the form Joe; e.g.
*rr - '
_ji "joy from ^s.
G j j
c) 3^*5 in intransitive verbs of the form Joe; e.g.
<> > > * * +
from Jb* "to sit .
6- G. _ K J,
d) xJjje and xlue in verbs of the form Jots e.g.
6 , , 9^ . - - J ^
smoothness" arid xil "easiness" from , "to
be smooth, easy".
o^ ^
e) xlue especially in verbs denoting an Office or
Trade; e.g. Xii> "Caliphate" from oUL> "to follow";
G- - * ..-*
Kl?Lc> "tailoring" from J^Ls> "to sew".
f) Many verbs form their Verbal Noun with a
o- ^ - ,
prefixed mlm; e.g. Js^oiU "purpose" from o^ai "to
2 o. o.
intend". This form of Verbal Noun is called
g) Other common forms of the Verbal Noun of
the Simple verb are:
i.' ?' uu " " 'f \" I " to occupy
Joe e.g. JJU "business from JoUi | one fe i^
Go Go
Joe ,, *^3 "part" ,, *.^ "to divide".
"smallness, ,,
youth" J** t0 be Sma11 '
Thirty-fourth Lesson. 235
o .
5 f.<r. vJL' "meeting" from ^jjj -'to meet".Ti
"question" / 3H "to ask".
T ,. ' ; ' ( "to be deli-fl
> "deliverance ^Jl^ j vered "
"call" c3 "to call".
"to forgive"
..bUs ...t-ae "forgiveness
o U-> "privation" ,..> "to deprive".) 1 " 11 !
e.g. j^xi "acceptance"
jj "to accept".
"journey" ,, .^~j "to journey". ,v-f
i^i/ "hatred" y k 'to hate".
,. iJliu "treatise" 3S' "to say". />
Note. In the dictionaries the Verbal Noun is given for
each verb. Sometimes several forms are in use from the same
G o .
verb, either with the same or different meanings; e.g. Jv^as and
Oo- ^-^Oo- O-
t&* "purpose" from^Xxai; ^^a^y 'description" and *AAS "quality"
from V_A/OJ "to describe".
3. The Verbal Nouns of verbs whose 2 nd and
3 rd radicals are the same, of hamzated verbs and of
weak verbs are of the same forms as above but subject
to the rules for assimilation etc. given in the earlier
lessons; e.g.
from yb "to think": ^ (for ^Ib) "opinion";
- O ^
from pis "to stand": pLS (for p!j^) "standing";
from jfe "to say": iliJw (for xiJK) "treatise' .
236 Second Part.
It should be noted that the verbs, whose first
radical is ^ which drop the 3 in the Imperf. (Less. 26, 2)
have also a Verbal Noun without the first radical; e.g.
^ * * 6^ O o - ^ - -
from Joo 3 "to unite": KJUo "tie" (beside jJ^); from
6-
"to describe": XAAD "quality".
4. The Verbal Nouns of the Derived forms are
given in Lesson 18, 7. In these forms the Part. Pass.
is often used with the meaning of the Verbal Noun;
- ^o>o
e.g. <*3X&li "that which is necessitated" instead of
., O-o
necessit .
5. The meaning of the Verbal Noun is either
c+
Active or Passive. Often it is both; e.g. jJci is "killing"
or "being killed", sometimes it is only Passive; e.g.
O > 3
"being found i.e. existence" (Active only is
"finding").
The meaning of the Verbal Noun is not in any
O o^
way connected with the idea of time, e.g. Jos means
"killing" or "being killed" either in the past, present
or future.
6. In its syntax the Verbal Noun partakes of the
characteristics of the Noun and of the Verb. As a
Noun it is followed by the Genitive, subjective or
objective; e.g.
o ^ J o ^
j^ JjS may mean "Zaid's killing (someone)" or
"the killing of Zaid" as in
- o^o * *>~&-
o| "the king commanded that
(someone) should kill Zaid".
ft / If however the Verbal Noun has both a subject
y I and an object, then the former is put in the Genitive and
' the latter in the Accusative or has the Preposition J ; e.g.
Thirty-fourth Lesson. 237
or b jj Jjs "the fact of Zaid's killing
Mohammed".
So also ^1^1 ~^- "the love of (one's) country".
or &jJI CilfijT J^> "the youth's love of
(his) country",
and with a pronominal suffix:
"his killing Mohammed".
^ "my love of (my) country".
The preposition j is also used when the Verbal Noun .
~~~^" "Te- +d*>*r4*oA Aoeujg I
is employed indefinitely with an adverbial meaning, e.g. /
v, " ) s * ti ) O )
"I rose in honour of Mohammed".
7. A verb can always be strengthened or specialised
in meaning by the addition of a Verbal Noun (cf.
Less. 12, 5). This (called in Arabic ^JLMt Oj^i\ "the
absolute object") is usually derived from the same verb,
e.g. i+Abr \^>j> - "he rejoiced greatly". (In this case the
absolute object is used "for distinguishing" jxA+ *
but may also be derived from another verb, e.g. )
U*.br \$ > ,-f "he rejoiced greatly".
It is also used with the Passive, e.g.
"he was struck violently".
Sometimes the Verbal Noun is so used without
an adjective, e.g. \tJo Ci^o "he struck a striking". (In
this case it is used jyJlJJU i.e. for emphasising.)
Sometimes the Adjective alone is expressed and
the Verbal Noun is understood, e.g. fjsjo^i ^^ "he
struck violently" for iJoj^i; (?j*o
238 Second Part.
The Verbal Noun may be used thus with a Geni-
tive, or a Suffix or a Demonstrative Pronoun or a
Relative Sentence, e.g.
> "thou fearest the fearing of the
coward" i.e. like a coward.
. c, = .0 ., | ^ 3 o .,
1 0^> ^jy/to "I struck him this striking" i.e. thus.
(i^o vy^ " ne was struck a striking which
pained him".
8. The Active Participle (JoiUJ! +**[) may also be
used as a Noun, in which case it is followed by
a Genitive^, jor^ as a JVerb) when it is followed by an
/ Accusative or the Preposition j, if it is used in the
sense of the Imperfect, e.g.
y
"one, who kills men".
UJT ; "
, who kills men".
"he, who strives after knowledge".
'l u , * *
But if it is used in the sense of the Perfect, it
can have only the Genitive after it, e.g. yUJ| Joi5
4utj~ "he, who has killed men".
Exercise 65.
The ivords iu^the following exercises are to be found in the
Vocabulary at the end of the book. The vowels of the Article and
some common words are now omitted.
Jots i<
|-< < ijOXl O^ .! Li
^ J^ y g _7 (JJ^ j
Thirty-fourth Lesson. 239
*\ jf*5& L> j*jc u *J jj& j-^i^ AJ ./
o - ,G,C.>
,t AJ Ok'* * <-" ,"t* ^-^NJ ,tt ^MrJ ^
^
UU1 . j
" p*.
*o o o^ o f ^.9
LJLs tCi
,
/ / Exercise 66.
^ >J5
We rejoiced greatly, when we received the books
o yjp^ sen ^ (y ur sending of the books). - The love of
'one's land is a part of (^ faith. I praised this
youth's love of his country. We rose in honour of
the prince. - They have done this deed from hatred"
of their enemies. - - After bringing excess of greeting
we inform you that the inducement to write it (i.e.
this letter) is to ask concerning your health and your
* circumstances. - - I shall leave the city (my leaving of
the city will be) on the 15 th of November of this year.
- I rejoiced greatly that your Excellency has perfect
health and security (I rejoice .... at your Excellency's
possessing the perfection of etc.). I
/ [ r O
4
240 Second Part.
i
Thirty-fifth Lesson.
Nouns of Place and Time.
1. Nouns denoting the Time or Place of an action
Jf* ftWl f*4), when derived from the Simple verb
Oo^fj^O^ G.,.,0^
are of the forms Jota/>, Joule and xLta^, e.g. L' **>''* f^
;^ ey f>iV from ^j-Jb* "to sit": U JL^ C "place of sitting, assembly";
from ^S "to write": ^jaCa "office, school";
from f$ "to bury": s^xiU "cemetery".
The Plural of these three forms is Js^lax, e.g. ^Jli^
Note 1. These nouns, when derived from verbs, which
have kasra or fatha in the Imperf. are usually of the formJ**a-;
those froin^_v^rjjswith damma in the Imperf. are of the form
. But there are many exceptions such as
O o ^ fr o .,
v^ws "place of sunrise, East", ^>f^ "place of sunset, West",
G o ^ O o ^
"place of praying, mosque," 5 X>^/o "dwelling place",
all from verbs, which have damma in the Imperf.
Note 2. From some verbs more tliaTiTone form is used e.g.
from \~*XS "to write": ^^.x/o "office" and 'x^X5o "library,
book-shop":
-^^ Oo^ O^o^
from ,<^>5 fi to place": ?tXo^o and joi^o "place".
Note 3. A rarer form in use is *a* (especially from
verbs whose first radical is , or ^), e.g.
.,., G^ G^o
from JJ "to bear children' 1 . J>^tyfl (for ^o) "time of birth":
Thirty-fifth Lesson. 241
, ,, 6 ( , 9-o
from ^Xtj "to promise": *>L*-y (for OLc^x) "time of fulfilling
promise, term";
9 o- 6 , 6,0
so also from the noun si>3j "time" oUux (for ols^o)
"appointed time".
2. These nouns formed from verbs "not sound"
(Less. 28, 1) are subject to the laws which control the
forms of the verbs, e.g.
from ^ "to settle: ^ (for *y) "atx^e"^ y^*^*!^
* , S -. 6,0,
from Jo> "to ah'ght": J^ (for JJL^*) "place" and
"city-quarter";
6,, 6-0, ^ t /^, ^M
from *ls "to rise": ^Ux (for |yU) "place, positioner'
, d i
from ^ "to pasture": ^^o "pasturage", ^r*^'
3. In the Derived forms of the .verb the Part. Pass.
is used for the Noun of Place and Time, e.g.
-
from ^J&5[ u to meet: ^J&k* "place of meeting";
^-0^0 O^O^OJ
from &jcJ "to collect (of water)": jjtUx^a "marsh";
from Jjo "to pray": JULI/J "place of prayer". cf>
r Nouns of Instrument.
4. Nouns which denote the nstrument used in an
action (xj^lf ^1) are formed after the pattemsj ,31*1*, fa*-
e.o'o^^o
and xJLxax, e.g.
, -, 6,0
from ^\^j "to open : Jj&* "a key ;
O G
,,- 6,,o XT^s
from .-^ "to sweep": *L*jjCo "a broom";
, -- 6 - 5 - o
from 3 "to weigh": (for l_^>) u a balance";
from ^ "to ascend": l5y> (for iLJ>yo) "a ladder". W** Jr 1
6*0 '6-,o '>^- 6,0
The Plural of w*a* and iJl*^ is scL^a; of
e.g.
1
Arabic Grammar. 16
242 Second Part.
The Diminutive.
5. The Diminutive (^JLoXJl ^\) is formed from
G o^> < o^ >
triliteral nouns according to the pattern Js.oe, e.g. V yl5'
"little dog" from vll?.
In the case of words derived from Doubled or
Weak verbs the usual changes take place, e.g. from
Ib "shadow":
from L-jL (for ^jjj) "door": S-AJ^J;
from (jcs "youth": ^j&.
From quadriliteral nouns the form of the Diminutive
is JJUii, e.g.
from ^jji^ "scorpion": v_j-jL:.
> , . ^ * . _^'*
6 '-'.
Or if there are more letters, the form j-JL*j is
used, e.g.
G.JO.J *3o^^
from ^AAOC "sparrow": ax/oc.
If the noun has a Feminine ending, this ending
is attached to the Diminutive, e.g.
6*0- O^o<.>
from JUJlS "fortress": xx-JUs.
^ O ^
from (^JL^ "Salma", (name of a woman):
The following Diminutives should be noted:
from v!/l (for^I?) "father":^! (for^i) "little father";
from f (for Jil) "brother": ^\ (for Jlit) "little
brother";
6 o 6 s ^ &
from vi>->l "sister": kxi>f "little sister";
Go O-* S ,j O o*>
from ^j]^ (for _^o) "son": ^yo (for ^v^) "little son ';
O^o Oo 6s^j
from iiot or <^i "daughter": X-^LJ "little daughter' ;
is* *
""
Thirty-fifth Lesson. , ",h" 243
* * 2 - > 2 -j
from 9^ "thing": ^^. (for ^j^} or more frequently
blA "a little thing".
Note. The Diminutives are often used to express endear-
9 A-
ment or contempt. The form 0^** is often used with Proper
<T
names at the present time to express, endearment, e.g.
Oi^ rf o*>o- 6i^ *x>>o
from *U
sfett
Exercise 67.
AJb At
j
idlif 1
o * **
M
* ^ -> OH
^ x^A ,^d3fri (Accus., Less. 16, 4)
16*
244 Second /Part.
., s .> .> ., o
., w .> ^ ^
t
(dUC* : A**d<!U^X' t . , f<*
Exercise68. ( ^^ '
This little dog is very watchful. / This little
man sweeps the room with the broom. -4- I went to
my house and opened the door with the key. Beirut tt
is the residence of the Wali.^-jjr Boy, weigh the wheats
in the balance. - -The visiting 'of masques and tgmjbs
is not- allowed during the time of prayer. I saw the
horses in the pasturageX dear Fatima, give me a
little of this bread. ^The customs of the East and
those (the customs) of the West are different. When
the king arrived, they fired the cannorie. little
son, I ask success from God. - - I 7 bought this book
in the bookshop. Y ,\
b
Thirty-sixth Lesson.
- y * w -o - -> w /o Joss
The Relative Adjective.
1. The ending ^5 attached to a noun denotes
that a person or thing is related to, or connected with
it, generally in respect to a tribe, land, city, business
etc., e.g.
a - . S . ~
"Arahs" (collective); ^.c "Arabian, an Arab";
"Egypt, Cairo"; ^ya* "an Egyptian, a Cairene";
So
"science"; JLc "scientific";
, "day"; ^^ "daily".
' s S_
ti**,)
I ' S
l-jj J
Thirty-sixth Lesson. 245
If the noun has the feminine ending H. this is
dropped in the formation ofJhe^EfilatJYe. Adjective, e.g.
e. - 2 -
Xjuwl? "nature ; ^^b "natural ;
S-" 2
xcLLo "art"; L ^Uo "artificial";
wCo "Mecca"; *J "Meccan".
Letters added to the radicals in the formation
of the noun sometimes drop, e.g. i^uj^o "city"; J,jo
o
"pertaining to a city", but not always, e.g. joJv5> "iron"
"iron" (adjective).
62 OE
The words ^j| "father" and ^| "brother", take back
their original waw again and so form ^^\ "fatherly",
2 -*
ij;y>t "brotherly".
If a noun ends in a or an (I-., ^- . I or r^
^5 ), this is changed into ivaw before the ^5 e.g.
^-otx "meaning" forms <j;>Xx "abstract"; Loo "world"
forms <j;_^oJ> "worldly".
The same is the case with the lianiza in the ending ^|
2
i ' , e.g. 9t^ "heaven" forms <j;$U* "heavenly", but
v "T^*^ 2
LOi "winter" forms ^_^ "wintry" (without cdif).
. o~ 2 o. r 2 . o..
From LJj9 "France" are formed --^JjS, ^c^*o^s and
2 - o^
^cjLvJj "French".
The Plurals of these adjectives are usually regular,
e.g. J, Jj-lff "the Egyptians".
246 Second Part.
2. The Feminine of the Relative Adjectives often
adds to its ordinary meaning that of an abstract idea,
GS..O
17 ^ O w * W " 3 - O
e.g. o Uo[ "man", J,L*Jt "human", jLul*o( "humanity".
4 "God", ^! "divine", i^h "deity".
Go ^ S o ^ Gs o ^
2$& "month", ^M "monthly", '^^ "monthly
wages".
Adjectives.
- y o
3. The following forms of the Adjective (x^o **J)
have been already mentioned (Less. 10):
G ^
a) Jo^'vi Active Participle.
G ' -
b) J^o6 (sometimes also used in Passive sense, e.g:
J^xs "killed").
c) 3**s.
^
e) Joel (for Colours and Defects).
f) ^ili Pass. Part. (Less. 17, 4).
4. The following forms are also of common occur-
rence:
G o..
g) Jots especially from intransitive verbs of the
> Go - > -
form Jots, e.g. ^^o "difficult" from ^ot^ "to be
***> ^^^ difficult" .
G
h) Jod, e.g. v - r l^> "beautiful" from Q^> "to be
beautiful".
^^ i) joti especially from intransitive verbs of the form
' v - 1 , e.g. ^i "joyful" from ' 1 "to be joyful".
j) &, e.g. "naked".
Thirty-sixth Lesson. 247
f, -^ 9 5
k) jue (intensive) e.g. ^IJO' "addicted to lying"
from S^S "to lie".
Note. The verbs whose second radical is ^ or ^5 change
the form J-oc into/^x^which becomes J^s, e.g.:
' * r '~^ 6.
from oL> (5) "to be excellent" J^r" (for ^>> and
^'excellent";
"
from ^LL (^) "to be good" -^-^> (for ^^^ and s-.*.
"good".
Q a-
5. The form jbe is also used to indicate one who
exercises a trade or profession, e,g. 3lT (from Jcr "*o
I
carry") "a porter", and so jL-> "a baker"; -bL> "a
tailor"; sliL "a water-carrier". These words use the
Sound plural, e.g. o j-JUr, ^jLi etc.
6. The Elative (J^nilT ^t see Less. 10, 37) is
9
always formed from the three radicals, e.g. Jo_^b (Root
>) "long"; $3 "longer"; lli "excellent" (Root j^>): :
- O
"more excellent".
Some adjectives, such as the Participles of the^;
Derived forms and words of the form .VM cannot form (/>)
Elatives. In these cases suc^h phrases as the following
are used: *fMr**-r &*<* *' &f* /4 Z
are
o
J^ "diligent" loL^c>! tft "more diligent" ht.
lore as to diligence.
>-& s,^A^
o^l "black" |o^ j^i! "blacker" lit. stronger as
blackness.
7. If the second part of the comparison is not a
noun but a whole sentence or an adverbial determination,
248
Second Part.
w
it is preceded by U/> (for U Q,) with a verb or tbe
Preposition cr witb a suffix of the Personal Pronoun, e.g.
o ^ ., 5 ^ o .. 0*3 3 * o ^ ^ os
ij^f ^6 U^o *j-Ji ^ftkll *t*pl "ti 16 weather is
pleasanter to-day than it was yesterday" or:
I lit. "than it yesterday".
30 ^ o .. o-o
Exercise 69.
^ "~ ( Proverb )
., . , i -
ii! vi>o^ r\-i -H- UbUw yJ** o-^J /
Jotib o l o
(Proverb)
Thirty-seventh Lesson. 249
Exercise 70.
This water-carrier is more diligent to-day than he
was yesterday. My ink is blacker than yours (thy i
ink). We arrived in Cairo by rail. - - The Egyptian a j, j^
is cleverer than the Syrian. - - If God will, the weather -j ' ..
will be better to-morrow than it was yesterday. This
^Englishman is prouder (stronger as to pride) than that
Frenchman/ The poi^grsjire more diligent than the
tailors. The crowdat the festivities was greater than ,/
we thought. We went furthe^ away than we in- f jN
tended. This wine is excellent, it is more excellent
than that, which we drank yesterday. f^L^s^Si^
-f+*. JW )f^(LC ' ' '
( '. ' ' fe**,,
Thirty-seventh Lesson. , y,
1. Words may be divided according to their meaning
O &.0 JO > ^ ^ CC
into: a) Class names ^^ f*-^!) : b) Proper names (Jl*JI).
2. The Class names are divided into:
o ^ ) o O J ^
a Concrete .. *^t whether Nouns as
.
"horse" or Adjectives as wJ'fj "riding",
"sitting". t ^ <t|| ^ jiiM ^ **. 3j*~(+tZ*>
S !> * JO Oo
b) Abstract ( ,jjw ^t) whether Nouns as JLc
"science", j44- "ignorance" or Adjectives as ^AA
^? -* o j
"understood", ^x^ "concealed".
Abstract nouns when used in a general sense and
'ithout further determination always take the Article, e.g.
6- ^ >* .
xJLycci KcL^uiJi "bravery is a virtue ;
also with names of material, e.g.
o b.x*x> &aaJUj w*ijJj "gold and silver are two
letals".
250 Second Part.
Proper Names.
3. Proper names are always definite and so can
O > - G o^
be the subject of a Nominal sentence, e.g. J^ j^
"Zaid is a man".
Proper names are either Simple or Compound.
The Simple may consist of three or more radicals,
G G- G.G-
e.g. joj Zaid; ybo- Ja'far.
The Compound may consist of: ^ fc.jcek
a) Two names placed together, e.g. d^*i Ba'albek,
or b) A noun with a Genitive, e.g. ji uXxc 'Abdallah,
" -- - - ~ *
I O w -o ) O + G<* O-o >O
O*:^! jy^'Abd-errahman, Lr JiJI ^1 Imruulkais,
* ;;.,
or c) A sentence, e.g. fyfc Jajij Ta'abbata sharran (lit.
he carried mischief i.e. a sword, under his armpits.
4. Personal names are of three kinds:
Oo Go^O^o^
a) The Name in the strict sense (*-*4) as jo;^ j*>.
G^oj (!J,-H-t- 77-3 3 (fi^t}t^ftt^A.T^2lt_ .
b) The Kunya fcutf) c>r nam T e containing a term
of relation such as '^father, mother, brother etc.", e.g.
*
c) The Nickname (v^SJ) usually given to a man, when
he has grown up referring to some quality in him or
event with which he has become associated etc., e.g.
idol (properly "a duck"), xii (properly "a basket").
Note 1. Some Proper Names always have the Article as
3 ..OB
c^L^-J (lit. the ploughman).
Note 2. The name 'Omar is distinguished from c Amr by
the fact that the latter has always an otiose 3 at the end in the
Go-. G- f <J
Nom. and Gen., e.g. 37*^ and *,*+. The Accus. of both is t r*^.
For the Declension of the Proper names and for exercises
see Less. 41.
Thirty-eighth Lesson.
Thirty-eighth Lesson.
* x % *} > i O JO..
251
The Feminine./-^ t&rwM n*m rf>
1. For the formation of the Feminine see Less. 2.
Certain Substantives are feminine without a special
ending:
G oS - -
(jto,l earth, land.
*oS
^\ viper.
/i weU.
- f war (sometimes
rir*" i masc.).
staff.
eagle.
scorpion,
axe.
.io house.
coat of mail (some-
times masc., always
masjc. when used
f Paradise (masc.
{ whenjt means
' I
catapult (some-
G o ^
- | bucket (sometimes
1 masc.).
mill.
f wimd (sometimes
\ 'masc.).
sun .
*-**->
G y*
I hyena (sometimes
\ masc.).
foot (of verse).
son" in count-
ing, it is masc.
G ~
; 'breath"
G .
is masc.).
2. The following words are of Common Gender:
veil,
finger.
X jLgj[ thumb (usually masc.).
hare (usually fern.). x
252
Second Part.
v j man.
O
i<u a
i^jj breast.
Jjjti fox. c ' 2 .f^ t _
r * (wing (usually
) might (masc. with
) meaning" Sultan").
peace.
ladder.
f heaven (masc. with
{ meaning "roof").
market.
. .
Barley.
f
{
a measure used
for corn etc.
way.
peace.
"6 -
c
natural disposition,
way.
hinder
\ ptials (masc.
wlth the meamn g
or
neck.
f spider (generally
i fern.). u)>a3i!.
T v
horse.
boat.
| kettle (generally
neck.
bow.
people,
liver,
shank.
ton g ue -
I night (general!}^
( masc.)
( musk (generally
| masc ;) &
I intestines (general-
( ly masc.). .y^j
salt (generally fern.).
f people (generally
| niasc.).
Thirty-eighth Lesson. 253
3. Collectives denoting irrational living beings and
from which nouns of unity ending iiT% (Less. 2, 4)
a** wu+iumJ+X* *o^ o
^annoLbe formed are Feminine, e.g. J-c> "horses" Joj
''camels".
4. Those Collectives from which nouns of unity
O o^
can be formed are of Common gender, e.g. J^ u bees",
*''
XJL^' "a bee" etc. The names of the Letters of the
alphabet are also of Common gender, but are gene-
^,0 ) ,. m
rally used as Femimnes, e.g. jj*&L\ U^^\
5. The Feminine ending ^^- (the sL*ti ; ^*^ ^jl
O, j o^ OS
or j^xo&o v^Jl see Intro. 6, Note 2) is used in the
following cases:
a) Some Substantives have it, e.g. ^^b "remem-
brance"; LJO "world" (properly fern, of the Elative of
^o "low"; LojJl is used for "this present world"
y~ *&-.
in contrast with H^^l "the future world").
) * & *
b) Adjectives of the form ^l*i take as their Fe-
minine Jjo, e.g. ^U*^ "angry", Fern. ^ac. (but not
6 .o. G , o .
adjectives of the form o bUi (with nunation), e.g. C) Uxj
G ^ - o ,
"repentant", Fem. &Ux>).
c) The Feminine of the Superlative is of the form
|, e.g.
JL/ "great"; '^?i\ "the greatest" (masc.); ^Jjcfl
"the greatest" (fern.).
&' "high"; JJ3T "the highest" (masc.); Lull "the
highest" (fern.).
254 Second Part.
d) The following should also be noticed:
Masc. Jj!M "the first" ; Fern.
c "the other";
"feminine"
(no Masc.)
"pregnant"
6. The Feminine ending f_JL (the so-called
Cl ^ * __
"the lengthened alif") is used:
-* o ^.
a) with some Substantives, e.g. iL^o "desert",
"greatness, pride".
b) with Adjectives of the form jjijj denoting Co-
lours or Defects (Less. 10, 2), e.g. o**i "black", Fern.
7. Some Adjectives have no special ending for the
Feminine, e.gS* those of the form Juuc when they have
"" a Passive meaning as J-oi xLl u a ""slain girl" falso
-< those of the form 3yts when they have an Active mean-
^^. f^. ***^ m
G > - O,o --"'"' (g)
ing as ,_^o iubl "a patient girl"; also certain Ad-
6
jectives which can only refer to women as -W^
J r:
O o ^ 6 ^
pregnant" <u&^ "one who gives suck", jsL "barren".
^ J
Note. Foreign words are treated as Feminines, even when
3 *, ><tj ) o ^ yy
they were originally Masc., e.g. _jJ'^Uax$ "consulate",
"protest" (legal).
Exercise 71. ^^4^^^^
~~ *
^c/o ^ (Less. 15, 3 a) ^II (supply: JJli b) Us
Thirty-eighth Lesson.
255
oe **
I U
i* * 2 a
tf LJli i
U3 JIS
o * - -05
xJLc
, v5lS
U
^* ' '
US JI5 L^-'^l Ui Jo JI5
^ it
^
to
lv>j
^ I
' * <d
S^ 6J 1^
c
^o ^ JI5
jfc
**** +
J* jLIaJi
^
ls> Ui
Xiliir
o, > o j j ^ S
Mb -ii' jl5 *i'uf i cJ
256 Second Part.
jla
Exercise 72.
When I went out of the city, I met two women,
the one of them (was) white and the other black. -
The lazy girl has not done what I commanded her. -
This world is the house of transitoriuess, and the other
world is the house of eternity. The sheikh gave me
many horses. The memory of the friend will be
lasting. No tree is found in the deserty The
condition of my friend is not (jlll) good. My soul
yearns to meet thee (for thy meeting). - - Hind is a
patient girl. -- The pride of men will be punished. -
The minister has received the highest grade of this order.
Thirty-ninth Lesson.
W /O 3 & Z, ".
Number.
6^ o )
1. For the three Numbers : Singular (o^),
O o -
and Plural (*#:>) see Lessons 3, 4 and 5.
O O o
2. The Sound Plural (pL* +=>) Masculine is
used for:
1) Masculine Proper Names (except those which
end in g), e.g. S.
Thirty-ninth Lesson. 257
2) Diminutives of Proper Names and Class Names
which indicate ationaj) beings, e.g. jfr* (Dimin. of
1U), Plur. ^I^; vkr>-j "Kttle man", Plur. O _>J.
3) Participles, which form their Fern, in s, e.g.
lotf "writer", Plur. *^;%! "official", Plur.
"believer", Plur. O _^L
4) Nouns of the form jL*s which denote workers
9s-
at a trade or profession (Less. 36, 5), e.g. J^L>
"tailor", Plur. ..^bll^-
2
5) Relative Adjectives (Less. 36, 1), e.g.
ft*
"Egyptian , Plur. ^.^J
"
XH
6) Adjectives of the form Joiil denoting Elatives,
J-.OE ^ j^oZof.
e.g. J^l, Plur. 03 ^J.
The following Plurals should be noted:
Oo 9^ > ^ *e>S
jt son (for ^j), Plur. ^o (also 9Lu|)
9..-
^J!c world,
. * - *
foj\ earth,
^l (also
)^>i family,
o-*^ ( a ^ 80
-.**
3 master, O3 3
9,. - .
Also the Fern, x^** "year", Plur. O- ^ (as well as
Arabic Grammar. 17
258 Second Part.
3. The Sound Plural Feminine is used for:
Go 5
1. Feminine Proper Names, e.g. j>j>, Plur.
.
also for Masculines ending in , e.g. XsJa, Plur. ofe^b.
o. ..
2) Many Class names ending in , e.g. g^L^. "city-
6 - -
quarter", Plur. or,L>.
3) The Feminines of Adjectives, whose Masc. takes
6 .. .,
the Sound Masc. Plur., e.g. oloK "female writers",
6 . s . ^ O a o
oLbLc> "tailoresses", ol^o* "Egyptian women".
4) Adjectives the Feminine of which end in ^5
or *Ll_ (Less. 38, "5, 6), e.g. ^^S "greatest" (fern.),
Plur. olfJ/ (rare); i\^> "green" (fern.), Plur. of.>^>r
5) Names of the Lelters,._of the_alDhabet and of
the months, e.g. v_aJ? "alif ', Plur. olilf; ^ the month
Muharram, Plur. oLo.^ 9 .
6
6) Verbal Nouns of the Derived forms, e.g.
"written work", Plur. oULJ&; OyoS* "disposal", Plur.
But the Verbal Nouns of the II. and IV. forms
6 o.
have also Broken Plurals, e.g. _^ "picture", Plur.
) * f "e- -nouns rtt
"false news*', Plur. ^^^c^^^/^^^^a/s
7) Diminutives of words denoting things and irra-
6 <,> " e ^o- >
tional beings, e.g. ^^ "little dog", Plur. oL-^.
8) Foreign words, even when they denote male
persons, e.g. Ul (Turkish) "Aga", Plur. ot_^f; (L>l^)
*=*&> (Persian) "Sir", Plur. ob*t>i; ^o (5^j) (Tur-
kish) "Bey", Plur.
Thirty-ninth Lesson. 259
Note. ja3 (Less. 38,7, Note) makes Plur. C
9s j G . 9 > o
Another form is is-JUaJls, Plur. oLJLaAJJ.
Note the two following words:
0*) U "bath", Plur. oUui; ^ "heaven", Plur.
ofjUl (or otj^) cf. Less. 36, 1.
Note 1. The Sound Fern. Plural of the Participles (espe- ^,
cially of t^ Pflflp,, paj-O is often used with a Neuter meaning,
e.g. ouo or oo^-j./o ''existing things", oJJ^JL>? "created -^ '
things". : < A ^[^iSis^Mtor^^- <^J'^ ****"* &l
Note 2. Of words derived from verbs' that end in or ^
6 - - 9 |
typical Sound Fern. Plurals are: from s^Lo (also written s^JLo
9 .. , Q .,
cf. Intro. 6, Note 3) "prayer", Plur. otjJLo; from slxi "j-oung
9 ..- 9 ...
girl"; Plur. oLy3 or ot_^3.
Broken Plurals.
4. The most frequently used forms of the Broken
9 5 . 3 9 o .
Plural (ywwjU -*>) are:
A. From triliteral nouns.
1. <JM* (rare).
9 9 . 9 o .
From J^b;e.g. ^oUo "companion", Plur.
'
2
a) From jJtil (adjectives denoting colours and de-
fects^e-g. ^]! "blue", Plur. Jj; o^Ti "black", Plur.
9 3 ' > .os . 9 9 of
. .
-oi "white", Plur.
b) From ^Ui (fern, of the preceding), e.g. *lS
"blue" (fern.), Plur. l*.
17*
260 Second Part.
c) From Joe, e.g. -jJTl "lion", Plur. vxlf; Jfo (for
"house", Plur. *J, cf. Note to 5.
3.
G-o 6^
From iJL*5 (rarely *JUs), e.g. xhs "piece", Plur.
G .. G 'G^C, G ' G..
" S; XL* (for iOJU) "religion", Plur. JJU; ^ "manner
of life", Plur. ^; Ii "tent", Plur. l>.
6 *^
4. Joe.
6*0^ G^OJ G^, 6s>
a) From xJL*s, e.g. xoV, "rank", Plur. ^oV, ; xo
6 .> 6^ ^ 6 - j
"dome", Plur. v^Jj; ^^o "form", Plur. j^o.
b) From jli (cf. Less. 38, 5), e.g. ^'JJj u other"
(fern.), Plur. ^T (without nunation); ^JXlf "the greatest"
(fern.), Plur. ^XSf.
c From *Jje (especially from words with medial
G.o^ 6^^ O^o^
3 or ^5), e.g. xl 3 o "dynasty", Plur. J 3 o; xiyi "village",
Plur.
G o G *o .
d) From xLe (rare), e.g. x^i "beard", Plur.
- -*
G ^^
5. Joe.
a) From 3l* (but not from words in which the
second radical is doubled or from those that end in
6
* or tA e.g. UuS "book", Plur. voT.
o *
b) From J^oti (but not from words, the third radical
O O j t
of which is 5 or ^5), e.g. L "way", Plur. b.
* rf --
c) From *JU*s, e.g. AJU\X> "city", Plur.
Thirty-ninth Lesson. 261
O , 6 , ..
d) From 3y, e.g. Jj^ "messenger, ambassador",
G J >
Plur. ^.
& o* Q +*. 9 o ^ G > t
e) From Jots or Joo (rare), e,g. V_AJU, "roof, Plur.
Ooj 9 j G
Note. Jotf is often met with beside Jots (see 1), e.g.
o >l> G o&
"lion", Plur. J^\ or
6.
a) From ^Ii, e.g. v "dog", Plur. vir ;
G : 2 G
"lance", Plur. U ; ; gj "wine-skin", Plur. %l
'G - G G -
"garment", Plur. oLo; ^. "wind", Plur. 'y,.
b) From Jots, e.g. Jo*^ "man", Plur. v5l>>.
G -- G G -^
c) From Jots and id*s, e.g. J^ "mountain", Plur.
G * ~ 9 - G- G , -
.o*; xjSj "neck", Plur. ^v,; ^to (for J3 o) "house",
' G -
Plur. J Lo (with the meaning "land").
G
d) From Jusas (but^ not when used with Passive
G ' 9 ^
meaning), e.g. ^S "generous", Plur. ^\S.
e) From ii*s, e.g. iUs^ "piece of paper", Plur. e^.
f) From xixs, e.g. x^J "sheep" Plur. _L*j.
oi^
7. Xoti.
Go^ Go- G*
a) From Jots, e.g. jyji "slave", Plur. Axxc.
b) From Juts, e.g. ^U> "ass", Plur. 1^>.
8. * "
a) From Jots, e.g. CJ& "heart"; Plur. v.^;
"science", Plur. *jjU; jvj^>. "troop", Plur.
262 Second Part.
G , , Gf-
"right", Plur. j*^\ ^ "head", Plur.
G >
"house", Plur.
b) From Jo6, e.g. j^vl "lion", Plur.
"king", Plur. ^jJU
c) From j^b (but not when second radical is
G
doubled, or the medial radical is 3 or ^), e.g.
G J >
"witness", Plur. o^-fc.
G y,y
Q I
From JyB& e.g. I^b> "judge", Plur.
"sleeper", Plur. J. c
6 8 , /
10.
G - G G a ,
Only from J^li, e.g. ^ok' "writer", Plur. t^Ui'.
\ G -x^
11. *J
Only from Js^li when it denotes rational beings
n
and has not 5 or ^ as third radical, e.g. ^ol^ "writer",
Plur. iLi?; L "seller", Plur. xj) (for lull).
12. xi*i.
Only from J^l3 when the third radical is 3 or ^
and the word denotes rational beings, e.g. j^ ''governor",
G^J G-^, , G*,* G^_.
Plur. g^ 3 (for iuJ 3 ); (j^is "judge", Plur. HUas (for K^si).
G o,
a) From Joe in words with medial 3 or ^5, e.g.
Go- G-
^ "ox", Plur. 8.^.
Thirty-ninth Lesson. 263
b) From Jo when the third radical is ^ or ^5, e.g.
1! (for jj$l "brother", Plur. s^L
9 9 O-o
c) From jUs, e.g. ifji "gazelle", Plur. iJp.
o
d) From Jwx*s when the third radical is . or ^5, e.g.
S ^ 6 0,c
(for ^XAAJ) "boy", Plur. iu^o.
9 joE
14.
So- O o
a) From Jots, e.g. "sea", Plur. ^\- ^ "eye",
O
Plur.
b) From j, e.g. J "foot", Plur.
c) From JJi, e.g. jjg "bolt", Plur.
d) From Feminines, which do not end in g, and
which have a long vowel between the second and "'
third radical, e.g. go "arm", Plur. ^JSI; ^.^ "oath",
Plur. ^|.
15. AJU* (rare).
o *, o_ ' o, . Ju>ir
a) From Jots, e.g. ^ "stone", Plur. bjL^-.
b) From j^6, e.g. ^v^Lo "friend, owner", Plur. ^
(and ^^
16. iJyti (rare).
'->"
From Jii when the second radical is doubled, e.g
S- """9"
"uncle", Plur. ^^
17.
a) From jli (Jsli especially, when the first radical
is 3 or the middle radical is^ or jjr), e.g. u^i^ "person",
264 Second Part.
G -oS 6 o., G ^o G o^
Plur. (j^Ls^l; oOj "time", Plur. olSjf; O> I "colour",
Plur. ^jjl; *JJ "day", Plur. *C? (for *|Jj); ^ "thing",
*0. O
Plur. u<&f (without nunation, cf. Less. 41, 2 a);
"suckling", Plur. jllbl; "spirit", Plur. *
b) From Jots, e.g. v_^* "cause", Plur. v
(for J>) "condition", Plur. j|>; (for ) "son",
Plur. '
c) From ^li, e.g. <o "friend", Plur.
s ' ^ o
d) From J^ots (not with Passive sense); e.g.
"noble", Plur. L; (for j) "dead",
S >' ^
e) Note specially ^Xc "enemy", Plur.
18. i
G .d G - ., ' G^ oS
a) From L*s, e.g. LxL "food", Plur. x^Ll
"physic", Plur. ^ 3 o!; _bU* "weapon", Plur. x^O
Gs G /
"Imam, leader of prayer", Plur. xjf (for XiUfj); 9b[
"vessel", Plur. xlIT; vI)U "dust", Pliir. i^if.
b) From J^oti (especially with Adjectives, the second
radical of wbicbjs doubled, or^of which the thi
"*~~" - g" *- ' ~^ --- "G^. o G
is 3 or ^), e.g. ^A "loaf", Plur. XAii; J^
"proof", Plur. o (for if);. "valuable, dear", Plur.
Gs G-
l (for B
c) From vW*s, e.g. o+c' "column", Plur. s
d) Note specially oty "valley", Plur. iu
G., o
Thirty-ninth Lesson.
265
"friend", Plur. dsjwol; w^xl> "phy
19.
G .
From J^*i (especiajjyjroni roots with doubled second
radical, or with final 3 or ^5), when it refers to male
persons, e.g.
sician", Plur. *lb (for *'u>); ci u rich", Plur. ^i.
' '
20. j^.
o
a) From Joa6 usually with Passive meaning, e.g.
* ^o^G- ^o*
yS "slain", Plur. JJ3; gu^ "wounded", Plur. ^s>f*\
w.^ O ^ o ,
A/> (for vi^j^o) "dead", Plur. ^_^/>.
b) From ^ilS, e.g. ^ll? "idle", Plur. jJLy.
21. ^lii.
a) From jL*i (of male persons but (not In words
with doubled second radical or ending in 3 or ^5), e.g.
**> o ^ ^,,
jj* "minister", Plur. ^^; .*& "poor", Plur. ^Uij.
G O - ^ >
b) From J^g, e.g. ^U; "poet", Plur. ^^jci.
o/ ^ -, j
c) Note specially &uJL> "Caliph", Plur. ^UL>.
O o,
22. c
a) From Joii (especially from words with medial
3 ), e.g. jl r (for Jy) "fire", Plur. ^t^J; ^ (for ^L?)
"brother", Plur. 4
b) From Joe (medial 3 ), e.g.
Plur.
G ,
"large fish" T
266 Second Part.
c) From Jl2, e.g. JU "gazelle", Plur. ^Ji;
boy", Plur.
G S G -
d) From J^*i, e.g. "boy", Plur. Lx
e) From J^|$, e.g. ^\ "wall", Plur.
G -o>
23. iUi.
G-. G -- G - *>
a) From Joti, e.g. oJb "district", Plur. o lJJb.
G
b) From J^li (used as substantive, but not medial
G '. G .o, g ^ G
3 or ^5), e.g. ^b "rider", Plur. o l*/; v 1 ^ ( for v^ 1 ^)
'"youth", Plur. ^llL
G^.> ^'? G^o>.
c) From jUs, e.g. i^ "brave", Plur. o l*^.
d) From JoSI (Colours and Defects), e.g. lf "lame",
Plur. ^.
Exercise 73.
(see Less. 38, 7)
^)
Thirty-ninth Lesson.
/
L* r rtr IxaS j. ^^Ij
J3 (supply: "good!" Less. 47, 6)
-J-, >^- ---
is aUa*J
Exercise 74.
The Commander of the Faithful sent ambassadors
to the kings. - - The governors are the officials of the
.Caliphs. Praise (belongs) to God, the Lord of the
] worlds. I have not seen my friends for (since) fee
| years. There were noiny vegetables Tn the market.
- We sat down to take (3G VI.) the food and drink
^i (what was with us of foods and drinks),
yers on each day are incumbent on the
- The highway robber (cutter of ^the^ways)
money from us. The manner of life
of the first (Plur.) will be a warning to the last
A reacher wished to say, "Improve your
we
- Five
| Moslems.
i demanded
(Plur.
Phir.
f
hearts", and he said/
iarewell to our^ (the) der
(youths) and ^slaves.
school* for boys, .i ^
^vour
ien'ds.
- ^n Beir
dogs". - - We said
Kings have pages
there are many
268 Second Part.
Fortieth Lesson.
o w
Broken Plurals of triliteral nouns continued.
24. .
O - 6 - > ~, O
a) From J^ls, e.g. jjls "rider", Plur.
"coast", Plur.
-iVr .
b) From xJUls, e.g. *&>lp "novelty", Plur.
s : * " *' e , / i.^
**o\j> (for Xjya>oL~>) "nobles", Plur. ^Ij^ (for
xb* "slave-girl", Plur. [y>- (for ^5|>>) cf. Less. 4L
25.
From Feminine Tinyyna ^ivhifih havp a long VOWP!
Q
;
Q .
between^the second and third radicals ? e.g. ;_j^ "old
woman", Plur. ^L; jdl-k "letter", Plur.
"wonderful thing", Plur. v!oL.
o j , -
Note specially ^xo "pronoun", Plur. Ujto.
26. $i*z (with Article
a) From $U, e.g. ^^c. "maiden", Plur. ^IvXc (with
Article ^\o^). *v- /^'^ ^*7>
b) From A*i, e.g. ^j& "legal decision", Plur. u.
6 o~ -^ '5 o*
c) Note specially J*J "night", Plur. JLJ; J^i
"people, family", Plur. JlS>! "inhabitants"; ci^l "earth",
Plur. MtoM "lands".
Fortieth Lesson. 269
27.
a) Is used with 26 a, b; so <^!J^ and ^Ixs.
b) From Jolts (Feminine, but not that ofjhejjluper-
lative), e.g. ^s* "pregnant", Plur. iLj>.
c) From Q^, e.g. o btlj' "idle", Plur. iUJ".
d) From JoL^ (with jjnal ^ or ^), e.g. iUxi "gift",
Plur. Glli; xIU "fate, death", Plur. Clli; SLj" "flock",
Plur. UL^ "subjects".
e) From xicli (with medial ^ and also final ^ or
o^ -
e.g. ju^J: "corner", Plur.
B. Broken Plurals of quadriliteral nouns.
1. The three forms that occur have been mentioned
already in Less. 5.
28. JJU5.
"star", Plur.v^ly'; Jbs "bridge", Plur. U5.
Nouns formed from trilateral roots by prefixing
o, * and \ take the same forms of Plural as quadri-
literals, hence the forms: UUj J^lo and Jwcbt, e.g
> '-^ O *%^
experience", Plur. v-'up; v-^JJCo "school", Plur.
(for jb) "place", Plur. l (for
^ ,So
"the greatest", Plur. J "the nobles".
29.
From quadriliterals , which have a long vowel be-
tween the third and fourth radical, e.g. o lkL "Sultan",
Plur. ^Aki~; JLijJs "lamp", Plur.
270 Second Part.
y * * O s
"coffer", Plur. /ojoLu^; ^L~ "window", Plur.
"throne", Plur. !/; "desert", Plur. .
So (as in 28) from triliterals with prefixes arise
3 ) * + 3 ^f. O O ^
the forms J-^lai', J^l^> and Jtt$$T, e.g. ^jj^j' "picture",
Plur. l^u^i (cf. Less. 39, 2); JiL "key", Plur. ^i'lSi;
xi "letter", Plur. v^uul&; f*&| "crown", Plur. J^i;
"false news", Plur. vjut (cf. Less. 39, 2).
.> Q ^ .
There is also a form J^i_j3, e.g. (j^yiL> "buffalo" r
Plur. ^uof^-; 15 "law", Plur. Jl^.
O -
Note specially: jLu^ "dinar", Plur. .ota;
"diwan, collection of poetry", Plur.
6^ .*
30. jJJUS.
a) From many Relative Adjectives (cf. Less. 36, 1),
2 o+ ~~eV ^ 2 **.
e.g. ^yw "Moor", Plur. x^ijw; ^50^ I "Armenian", Plur.
o. .s" S . o^ o^
b "man of Bagdad", Plur.
b) From certain quadriliteral nouns indicating
persons (whether with long vowel before the last radical
or not), especially from Foreign words, e.g. ^L> "giant",
o, ^ ^ G ^o^~ o - -*
Plur. BjLj^; oLc*i (Persian) "teacher", Plur. gJtf
s "philosopher", Plur. K^w^li; ^Aiuvl "bishop' \
Plur. X65U?; ^ "angel", Plur. H&JU.
Note 1. In nouns that contain more than four radicals
j .o^
the extra letters generally fall out, e.g. Ojx&Lc: "spider", Plur*
c, but not always, e.g. >j "interpreter", Plur.
Fortieth Lesson. 271
Note 2. Many nouns have different forms of Broken
G o^
Plural with different meanings (see Less. 5, 3, Note 2), e.g. ^-jAt
G >o$ 9 , ,
"eye, spring, notable person", Plur. ry^f and ,.,**& "eyes,
G . o So.. O ^
springs", Q^-ui! "notables"; Js>f. "slave, servant", Plur. Jy^
G > 0-5. o -
and Jvxtl "slaves", oLj: "servants of God".
Note 3. From some Plurals a second Plural is formed,
o -
sometimes Sound, sometimes Broken, e.g. /ifjy-s "way'-, Plur.
e,, G.J, G. 02
^jb, Plur. of the Plur. olSja; Jo "hand", Plur. JuJ, Plur. of
-2 6- ~ * . -
Plur. Obi; Slit "vessel", Plur. iUJt, Plur. of Plur. -At.
2. In igagyjlelative Adjectives the Feminine ending = jj
H gives the~sense" of the Plural. (Properly itis an
S o.
abstract Collective cf. Less. 36, 2), e.g. ^^i "mariner",
6s o- '~ S j "Os
iuys^ "mariners"; ,ij^ "Sufi (mystic)", X.o_^o "Sufis".
In like manner the Feminine of some words of
O ^ G 5^
the form pUs is used, e.g. (j^lyj "bowman, Cawass",
ilwUS "bowmen, Cawasses".
3. The following Irregular Plurals should be noted:
pi "mother", Plur. oL^oi andoUi.
jU "mouth" (cf Less. 7, 2), Plur. l\\.
G .. G^ G -o G . G ^ '"
9U "water" (for^L, for_^),Plur. i^>i and wy> (for '
& "lip" (for ^Ii), Plur. 9li&.
^^^ - -
"sheep" (for KJyi), Plur.yUi and 8 UA. / ^ \
^ G ^E
"maid-servant", Plur. 9loj and ol^oi.
. G * o ~~~ G o
"woman", Plur. sL*J and y*o and
272 Second Part.
O . o S -'f 9
o l*ot "man", Plur. ^Ul usually ^
Go. " g S J
"bow", Plur. i> and
Exercise 75.
.
'Mr 1 '
j.| JliaJ (5^* ^t 'Lo i
o . w . J >
i j,! ^aJ *^J* to ax-T- li Os-ciJI jLas
J S \J *
&*
o . . s o .OH> . .5
-
os
.OS S J .OS . o^o,
U Juw&Jl to
P o * 6
1 b S a*^. -315
Fortieth liesson.
273
A certain philosopher had a slave (from the slaves),
,,one day the philosopher said to his^slave, "I wish
^> to one of the* baths." - The soldiers bound the*
prisoners with (the) chains. - This man was,,gn,e.x>f'
the de^eslf of his friends. Who will pay the expe~nses
of the journey? In this land I saw many schools,
in which the scholars learn the sciences; and their
teachers are of the learned. -- Inform me soon of thy
condition (Plur.), for thy friendship, is dearer than all
1 existing things. -"'Kiss the hands^t)f the brothers-and-
sisters. - The most honourable ruler anchjthe most
noble Sujtan, possessor of the greates^happiness^and
of the nighest (Superlative of *u*) rank, God perpet-
uate his days and raise his standards! Amen. - All
'the travellers both men and women (what was be-
tween the \nen and the women) were smitten with
seasickness. V The rains pour down like the mouths
of the wme-s}dns. y
<^U
Arabic Grammar.
if i/- S
'
18
274 Second Part.
Forty-first Lesson.
3 ^00x)^ -9-0 3 O w
Declension of the Noun.
t-^0 see Lessons 6 and
S o
1. Nouns are either Indeclinable djrUxi), e.g
"Caution!", JJoS "Qatam" (name of a woman), or De-
6 So 3 - .~- -
clinable (^M*).**^*^*^.
O .oj
* 1 "'- The Declinable are either Triptotes (oj^aJuo) i.e.
having three case-endings (Less. 6, 2 a), e.g. $>. "a
man", or Diptotes (oyoJU -^) i.e. with two case-
endings only (Less. 6, 2 b and Note 1), e.g.
"idle", 1U "Omar".
*** / \.
nts 2. The following are Diptote: v .^
Broken Plurals of the forms
j and .LJlis also the Plurals
(from | "first"), y (from "other") and *Ui]
O ^
(from a^yi "thing").
^o, ^o^ ^? *o
b) The Feminine forms bUs ? { ^B > joe and Jje
(Less. 38, 5, 6), e.g. *i> "desert", ^U^ "white", Lf lo^
^ O O >
"angry", ^^.3 "remembrance", ^5^ "greatest".
^ -o
c) Nouns of the form Jotsi, the Feminine of which
- O - ^ O >
is ^^Us or Jjo (denoting colours, defects or elative), e.g.
o^ll "black", rf "greater".
I
Forty-first Lesson. 275
O ^oE
On the other hand J^t "widower" makes a Feminine
iJUjI "widow".
j + & ~
d) Adjectives of the form Q^J^ the Feminine of
which is Jjli, e.g. o L*^i (Fern, ^^f) "angry".
On the other hand ^LOo (Fern. XJloJo) "companion
at table".
e) The Numerals which end in when they stand
i-s ->o >. .. .
alone as pure numbers, e.g. xx^ v_o>oj xiblS "three is
f) Most Proper names (see Less. 37, 3, 4) includ-
ing all that end. in a whether Masc. or Fern. e.g. (0
(rnasc.), xLU, XCo; all that end in t\JL or ^.l
e.g. */j, ^^f.; those that end in ^t_l, e.g. ^UJLl, <
ic; also the Proper names that correspond in form
with a verbal form whether Perfect or Imperfect, e.g.
-*& (name of a tribe), ^x*s>i, Jojj; also many others as
*. 9 ^J^ (name of a woman), ^^.^T>/;^ 2 ^*^^5^
r names on the other hand are Triptote
*v Go.Oo O o J Oo
when they are^l) of the forms Jsj^ jo^, Joii, e.g. j^j:
"Zaid", 3 "'Amr^'Noah'', j& (but also
and so wit^ other names of\women); 2) originally '
Participles or Adjectives, e.g. ^^j^-^roperly "beauti-
ful"). Js-oti (properly "happy"), oi^x (properly "desired"),
Q -., \
(prop rly "praised"); 3) certain single \tames as
etc.
276 Second Part.
3. All Dip totes, when they are made definite by the
Article or a Possessive. .suffix or a^ following Genitive
are treated as Triptotes (see. Less. 6, 3), e.g.
r i from the matters,
o o
(lr from his matters,
f. O
from the boy's matters.
4. The nouns, which end in in - (arising from
6 '
iwun, iyun and uyun) e.g. cio (for _^tio) "caller", (j&
e . ^9rfU
(for ^*>l$), "judge", y (for ^J "wish", change:
^^ * s
iwun, iwin, iyun, iyin, uyun, uyin into in,
iwu, iyu, uyu, into u,
iwi, iyi, uyi, into I,
iwu, iyu, uyu, iwi, iyi, and uyi into I (cf. Less. 6, 3,
Note 2 and Less. 28, 2) e.g.
"judge" Nom. and Gen. Sing.
Accus. Sing.
^Lwtoli "two judges" Nom. Dual.
o^
Gen. and Accus. Dual.
l "judges" Nom. Plur.
Gen. and ACCUS. Plur.
With Article: ^LsJf "the judge" or "of the judge"
Nom. and Gen. Sing.
. >. -0
., Accus. Sing.
t r : The Broken Plurals, which are Diptotes and are
derived from verbs whose third radical is ^ or ^, have
as endings in the Nom. and Gen. in, in the Accus. %a,
6, .,
e.g. from *jL> "slave girl", Plur. Nom. and Gen.
Forty-first Lesson. 277
* - * o *
Accus. t^, ty?-; from ^5^X3 "legal decision", Plur. Nom.
and Gen. 3 Us, Accus. ^Lxi.
* '
5. Nouns, which end in an (written I" or^__)
* - O - - 9 J O,J
as Lac "stick" (for _^A&), ^vXP "guidance" (for (^XP),
^y&uo/o "Mustafa" (for y&uaJ) are alike in all cases of
i> o
the Singular; so also are_the Diptotes as ^ qS^ "re-
^ o y
membrance", Loo "world".
6. The noun ^jj "son" drops its alif, when it
comes between the name of the son and that of the
father. The Proper name preceding it loses its nun-
ation, e.g.
3j li ^ j^j "Zaid the son of c Amr". But if ti
^j happensto_begin a new line the alif is retained, j
) o
It is also retained if the word ^\ is used predicatively
(cf. Intro. 11, 4 b), e.g.
JU '..^\ Hi- "Zaid is the son of c Amr".
^F & J
Exercise 77.
^ O* 3 *~ + <i.
fO 3
(see. Less. 7, 2) l3 -
^^*
jlfl S^XXS
278 Second Part.
f jls ills SJi? X
.C J>~
ail! ^Xxc bi LJ J, oyb
J ^uJbd Lo ^.yJL^jIt j-yot LJ *!!!,) jyjls i^)sjys -i^t
li
Exercise 78. s ^
Strike him with the stick. Five is the x half of
ten. The Caliph el-Mu c tasim was acquainted L.I?
and Imperf.) with c Ali, the son of ei-Junaid el-Iskaft
, . and el-Mu c tasim said to the son of Harnmad, "Go to
/ the son of el-Junaid and tell him to prepare to be-a-
guest to me" and he came to him and said to him,
"Prepare to be-a-guest of the Commander of the Faithful,
for to be a guest of Caliphs is a great thing (is great).
It was said to a boy, "Does not thy teacher clothe
thee?" And he answered^'Veriiy, if my teacher
had a house filled with SeMlesfand Jacob came and
with him the prophets as intercessors and the angels
as pledges, to borrow from him a needle with which
to sew the garment of his son Joseph, which was torn,
P* he would not lend (Perf.) him it; then how should he
clothe me?" lu*** 1 *^ *J'A^ /
'?b^X* *^*'
^ '^/ * t^orty-second Lesson.
t > ' C&$* ^ u^b
The Use of the Cases.
6 >o*
(A word in the Nominative is called p_^/> i n the
O^o^ Ojo^ GJO-
Accusative v-^oJwo, in the Genitive or (
Forty -second Lesson. 279
Oo^
1. The Nominative (j^) is used for:
a) The Subject in a Verbal sentence (jUli) and that
of a Nominal sentence (stjjCx*). See Less. 11, 6.
b) The Predicate of the Nominal sentence
See Less. 11, 6.
c) The word following the Particle of Address Ljjf
(always used with the Article) and after C (in the Sing.
without nunation), when it is not made definite by a
following word. See Less. 48.
d) The Attribute of, or word in Apposition to
another word in the Nominative.
Note. The Predicate of sentences beginning with Q^ or the
kindred particles (see below 2 h) is put in the Nominative.
G o.
2. The Accusative (^>oj) is used for:
9 jo,
a) The Object (xi jyuU), e.g.
"I struck Zaid".
"Thee we serve".
xvjys "I struck him".
Note 1. In Arabic most verbs denoting *'to come" are
O O
transitive. The transitive verb is called ^jrJotXi jw, the
3 - f C, Of- _^- .. .1*...
intransitive r ;^U I JouJ I. ^>i - ^^^ & H- Pifit
'< , / /" fr+
Note. 2. For the government of theAccus. by the Verbal
Noun and the Participle see Less. 34, 6, 8.
b) The Absolute Object or Cognate Accusative
see Less. 34, fc J&- *^- rt - '^
*V
c) Determinations of Time and Place (o^b) see
Less. 45, 5, e.g. j^Jj "to-day", Ijvi "to-morrow", b>L^
"in the morning", XjL BsX* "(during) a whole year".
280 Second Part.
w 3 Ux+j^ki "he looked right and left", f^j
"he travelled by land and sea".
To this class belong many words in the Accus.
- o *> -- o -
used as Prepositions, e.g. v_aL> "behind", *ji "above",
v~^' "under", etc.
d) Determinations of the Aim or Purpose, e.g.
*i ^ lo\SV\&*S "I rose to honour him" (cf. Less. 34,6).
6
e Determinations of Condition $iz> ' for which the
Participle and Verbal Noun are used generally, e.g.
sL> "he came riding".
.
f) Specification (JAA+J) with the meaning "in regard
to, in", e.g.
o u Zaid is greater in regard
to knowledge than e Amr".
LUJ v_*-b "be good in regard to soul" i.e. "rejoice
heartily".
g) The Predicate (^>) of ^ and its sisters (cf.
Less. 30, 12), e.g.
Sl4^ -\fj o^ "Zaid was a man",
h) The Subject after the following particles:
^t "truly", * \s "for", ^ "but";
^1 "that", ^ "because", ^LT "as if";
_^ >^J "0 would that!", jjj "perhaps"; e.g.
Ijl5 ijs^' y\ or Jjs.^' ^ Jjt "truly, Zaid is standing' .
i) The noun after the $ that denies absolutely
;J? ^j& ^ i.e. ^ for the denial of the class) cf.
Forty-second Lesson. 281
Less. 45, 3 p 3. The noun loses its nunation, e.g.
l ^ "there is no escape", eU; ^ "there is no doubt",
^ JLlI ^. (or iJL^ *$) jo *$ "there is no escape from
the matter" i.e. "the matter is absolutely necessary".
j) The Noun after the Particle of Address b if it is
ww -O * O + ,,
followed by a Genitive, e.g. *JJ| j^ G "0 Abdallah",
'yuLojT Iwo! C "0 ruler of the Faithful 1"
k) The Noun after the Conjunction , when it i
^ > . g. 6 o.
means "with", e.g. L>U Jo: "Zaid with his brother "
1) A word, which is an -Attribute of, or in Appo- /*-**3*ffi
sition to another word in the Accus.
Note 1. Many verbs take two objects in the Accus. e.
jQ
"I thought Zaid (to be) a physician".
Note 2. The Accusative often stands in single expressions
especially Exclamations , where a verb is to be supplied, e.g.
"welcome!", where ^^>- is understood, i.e. "you
9 O ^
have come to friends and an agreeable place"; ^U/> "slowly",
where ^ -go" is understood u<| ^ rw A^ A*.
^ / Go.
3. The Genitive or aa> is used in the
following:
a) A Noun which is connected with another by
6. ..
Annexation (Xi'uto^), see Less. 6, 4.
$*/ fj^ ^
Note. Arabian grammarians say that the ASuto^ has the
O O. > ~i
force of one of the prepositions 0, ^t or ^, e.g. >X^ ^s. =
s Ji. '- ~ 9 - w o-
I "the boy who (belongs) to Zaid"; ^^- V-J^2 *+i*rieJL
o Go. o.o-o j~ | .
CT V-^ 1 " a garment of silk"; ' '- rt
"the prayer of sunset".
282 Second Part.
b) A Noun after a Preposition (^i vJ5>) see Less. 44.
c) A Noun which is an Attribute of or in Appo-
sition to another in the Genitive.
In connection with a) it should be noted that
some nouns combined with a Genitive in Arabic corre-
spond to English Adjectives, Adverbs etc. :
1) Js/ "whole", i.e. "all, every, the whole", e.g.
f_jj J^ "every day"; J^t 3 ^S "each"; *gtXU Js/ "the
whole city"; ^l J^T "all men" (also
^ jj" "everyone who"; U J^ "all that (Rel.)".
6 Gs.
Similarly ^^ and '&$ "whole" are used for "all",
e.g. y^tl]? > or (j*^f "^ u all men".
,
2) (j^xa properly "a part", i.e. "one, some", e.g.
*Ljf jiajJ "one of the poets" i.e. "a certain poet" or
"some poets".
3) JoU ."likeness" corresponds to the English "as,
o * ) o }y o
like", e.g. Joj JJU "like Zaid", &JJU "like him", or
"as he".
4) ^j.*, properly "an other" means "except", e.g.
jJLxj] ^j*. "except science".
5) ^s. properly "an other than" often corresponds
m ~*C0 JCl*.
to the prefixes non-, un-, im- etc., e.g. u^J1 ^ "a-
non-Arab"; ^^ ^ "im-possible".
6) ( .^ Fern
Gen. Accus. ^li^ Fern, ^xx
E.g. ^IL^pT ^S "both the men"; L^^S "they both"
(cf. Less. 7, 1).
"both".
Forty-second Lesson. 283
7) v^ "a many of i.e. u many a" always followed
by an Indefinite NounT^g^ "*^^ r
y * Q + * > * z >
ci^JiJ oo p+ Jo^ ^ "many a noble man have
I met". '
Emphasis.
or
4. A noun can be emphasised by:
a) Repetition (s\ jy/bJI "literal emphasis"), e.g.
sL> ''he came running (quickly)".
U I saw thee" (cf. Less. 43, 3).
b) The use of special words
emphasis according to the sense"). Such words are:
O o ^ O jc/E 6 o ^ 6 y o
(Plur. .j^ajl) and ^.^ (Plur. ^1) "self, e.g.
O O^
"Zaid himself came". One can also
say X^A^J of
The words JJ', ?**+=> and tt\S are also used for
Emphasis (see above 3, 1).
The Permutative.
"the substitution").
5) The Permutative must follow immediately
word for which it is substituted aJ
There are four kinds of substitution:
a) The substitution of the whole for the whole
^ w JClX) ~>~" +
^^ JsXJi jjo) i.e. where the Permutative is exactly
equivalent to the word for which it is substituted, e.g.
> "Zaid, thy brother came";
284 Second Part.
<3y%>">* oj-^., - *o> Jo^
of
o .,0.0 * ^
the city, the great and the small, came to me".
b) The part is substituted for the whole ((^2*+
) e -g-
-c JOw .,
^ "kiss him the hand" i.e. "kiss his hand";
JJT "he ate the loaf, half of it" i.e. "he
ate the half of the loaf".
c) A possession or quality is substituted for the
^ O *>Cl*> > * *
name (JUx&^l jjo i.e. Permutative of inclusion"), e.g.
wy Ooj ^y-J-^l "Zaid, his garment pleased me" i.e.
y ^ Q y tfO-* y G*-*
"Zaid's garment pleased me"; j.*^ jjo^ ^z>j^> "I
praised Zaid, his beauty" i.e. "I praised Zaid's beauty".
d) A word is used to correct the previous one
(JjiilT o^X-j "the Permutative of error"), e.g. , *3 ^^J5u
, * _ ' ' L*r.j
"I passed by a dog (no, I mean) a horse".
Exercise 79.
> 0*2* O-o 3 >
jJlx^i f3
^ J^ ^ i
M-Ai* t^*^
u * > oS-
to t*
Forty-second Wesson. 285
iu! yj
xlST
V-
^ o j j oS^ r,
/
^ ^ * * \ / I '
a ^ ol b^Ixi />LC
6 GoS
wi *Jl
_ j
b scX^ oLyuaJl
sO>
xJlc 6 U vJ'
..,,> . ,
" *^ ^iiJw* '^ UJ! ,>xi-j
r
,>xi_-j
286 Second Part.
J>i^i IS aUf
(used as an exclamation) pJaxl\ AJJL ^M zj* bJj 3>> ^
f O ., S s O ., O
(be comforted!) Luc. _>., L*aj was
Exercise 80.
It is necessary to go away (there is no escape
from going away). It is necessary that I give thee
what thou demandest. The captain was extremely
astonished at what (I**) had, happened to me._ The
jto - *& [ ^jb-t^jfF*!
sea was calm and the atmosphere clear and the weather
still. I travelled in the direction of (making for jJ<
Egypt and you travel&in the direction of Syria. I
pray (3L1) God that he may bring you safe to your
country. We wept bitterly and that hour was a
very grievous hour. -- That man was intelligent, pious,
of noble character, of noble soul. - - Verily calamities
, do not ceas& following me, since I went out from the
* J>\ c ^' Sh^ sighed in despair (the sigh of the despair-,
^7.\ ing) and her sighing was increasing my pain ancP
.*^ sorrow (me as to pain and sorrow). - - I have no
^y> 'power to withstand calamities. We have only death
65 c /2-^ s ^ e ^ re us (there is not before us except death).
^3 Throw us both into the sea, or preserve us both. ^
r!- f Since the main purpose (most important of purposes))!
/ i i "i*y" "^ . i / 1 1
of our high dynasty is t the rooting out
of encroachment and of evil byrsea anfl land,
legally and morally compelled to (that we) /make
on
all ships of/ the Corsairs.
of the causesj\X
^
&
Forty-third Lesson. 287
Forty-third Lesson.
Pronouns.
o
3. The Personal Pronoun ( J x4jcs) is either Independent
or Suffixed (cf. Less. 8, 1), and may be in the Nomi-
native or the Accusative.
For the Independent Pronoun see Less. 3, 6.
Note. If the conjunctions , u3 "and", j * * verily " jure jpre-
., t ' * o - ~ o,
fixed to^P or J, the a sometimes loses its vowel, e.g. _^j, ^9 etc.
3. The Independent Pronoun in the Accusative is
as follows: x
3. Masc. bj him. U$>bt them both j?bj them.
3. Fern, lb] her. UTll you both
2. Masc. i)b] thee.
2. Fern. ^
me.
4. The Independent Pronoun in the Accus. is used:
a) With a verb to emphasise the Pronoun, e.g.
"Thee we serve".
b) If two Pronouns are Direct Objects of a verb,
e.g. L[ ^LLc? "he gave it (to) me"; but it is also
- o
possible to say xoLtocl. It is also used as the Object
afteiL_a.jyerbal Noun, e.g. bl .-SUae) "my giving it
(to) him".
c) Independently as a Warning, without a verb, e.g.
i)U "take care I", see Less. 48, 2.
288 Second Part.
5. For the Suffixed Pronoun see Less. 8, 2, 3.
Note 1. The letter ^ is often omitted in the cry LJ^ for
<Vj "my Lordl" (cf. Less. 48, 1 Note), and in the Pronoun ^ e.g.
jw -> a
j&'j (for ij&* "fear me".
Note 2. The Pronoun often refers to a whole sentence and
t a -o 3
is then called a .LiJi t?v&', it is translated "it" or omitted in
6. If the Personal Pronoun is to be emphasised it
is repeated in the Independent form, whether it has
already been contained in the verbal form or expressed
* ) o ^ ^ ^S -* ^
as a Suffix, e.g. Gl -oOj/to "I struck", lj| ^jo "he
struck me".
The Emphatic Pronoun "myself, himself" etc. is ex-
9 o ^ O jog O o -
pressed by the use of y^aj (Plur. j^aJl), ^x^ (Plur.
G^o 6^ O^., ..
or ^ (Plnr. ot3) with the Pronominal suffixes
j^^^ ^^
(cf. Less. 42, 4 b), e.g. X^AJ o^i: or *^&>b ^o: "Zaid
-
*)
O 5 .o ) O
himself"; so also s^^-ixJi ^^ji "the matter ^self, this
same matter".
^u,
7. The Reflexive Pronoun in^the Accus. is also ex-
O o ^ -~"
pressed by JJ*AJ, ^t, oiJ (with their Plurals) and the
Pronominal suffixes, e.g. ****j Joi "he killed himself".
If the Pronoun depends on a Preposition, it is
Z<J *. " 3 o^
enough to ujeJ^LePronominal suffix, e.g. bx$ ^ o jsj>i
"1 took somethingToTlnyself".''
8. The Reciprocal Pronoun "one another" is expressed
*ir, - "A'S'V ^^o. ^o^ .
by the use of (joxj "one, some", e.g. L^*j l;^ju bjs^L.
u we have helped one another".
O o^
After Prepositions the ^p*i need not be re-
peated, e.g.
Forty-third Lesson. 289
lij "the soldiers approached
one another".
9. For the Demonstrative Pronoun and the Inter-
rogative Pronoun see Less. 9 ; for x the Relative Pronoun
see Less. 31. jL^ . <jtuuM, , ^
Exercise ' fc(
. OS - s - .. s J-^ > * ^ . ^
9liU
o ' jyuXoj La-
lt
_
Q* ...UL-ftJl bo UJ
' <V '
r, Oou ^p Llcaxi j,^ ^Ixo
O
CTS o*t
'/*^- *fr*AW
I*
Arabic Grammar. \ 19
*
290 Second Part.
Exercise 82.
You have struck us. We ourselves have com-
manded this. The beggar demanded an alms from
, us and we gave it him. My giving it was (a) good.
You will offer yourselves to destruction. You
have demanded the sarpje -matter as we have demanded,
The two parties weitf^entangled with one another.
sJThose shepherds asked me if I was the person sought.
-**^ began to com|ort^ myself and cheer my spirit
(raise myself) with vain hopes. Truly, what has
befallen me is by reason of my deceiving thee. Let
us throw ourselves into the sea and iflie at once.
The captain commanded a sailor to separate us from
one another. - Remember my freeing^ thee from the
hands of the robbers.
e
Forty-fourth Lesson.
5 .o -> O 5
Particles.
1. The Particles (^f>] are divided into Prepositions,
Adverbs, Conjunctions and Interjections.
Prepositions. afiiflirf
2. The Preposition is called ^ oy>, the word go-
verned by a preposition is j^-=^, and the preposition
with its noun is ^^ili^ J^- \r~ 0( ^L&^f
3. Prepositions are: A. Inseparable, consisting of
one letter always attached to the following word; B.
Separate, which stand alone and are either true par-
ticles or nourP in the Accus.
A. Inseparable Prepositions.
1) ^ "in, by, with M etc.
. u r r ' r ' : ' J '
Verbs denoting "to adhere", "attach", "seize",
B* 1 ^^ "begin", are construed with vj e.g. ^jJLc "to hang on",
fjo "to begin with".
Forty-fourth Lesson. 291
"To believe in" is ^ ^1, e.g. ^L, ^Ux! "I believe tA ***fa
in God"."-
"To swear by" is u; HJif, e.g. L* v^J^f "I
swear by my head". Sometimes the verb is omitted.
After K3J "Seel Behold!" LJ is used (but the noun
- ifi i '
o ^ > -* ^
alone in the Nora, may be used), e.g. v| jo Jo*r? 1^?
9 * * - * * .
Behold a man came (or Jo*-j iojj.
In negative sentences, if the predicate is a noun,
vj is often prefixed to it, e.g.
ub -j he is not a rider (or
' / o, - ' .
xllxj j? U they are not aware (or
Many intransitive verbs of motion become transi-
tive, wHen they are followed by uj and the object to
which the motion refers, e.g. ^ ( c^ ^ he came
a thing, i.e. he brought it. (This LJ is called x
Note. The expression oof ^Li means "at the price of my
j father thou art to be redeemed", i.e. "thou art so dear to me,
'that I would redeem thee at the price of my father". (This is
OR
called xjvXftxJi l>, the ba of redemption.) P" 7 ^
2) and 3) o and 3 "by" in an oath, e.g. tti
i*. .
ailL "by God", (o occurs only in this expression.) If
however a verb is used in the oath, uj must be used.
4) j "for, to, because of".
j is used to express the Dative and denotes posses-
sion (= "have", see Less. 8, 5).
As a Conjunction (with the Subjunctive of the verb)
it denotes "in order _tibat,__so_Jhat ff .
19*
292 Second Part.
It denotes the English "of", when it follows an in-
o^ 6 ^
determinate noun, e.g. j^ ujlxi' a book of (belonging
to) Zaid"; i ^.s>Lo a friend of me i.e. one of my
friends.
J 4* It is used especially for the editor of a book, e.g.
j:lJ sUJSff J*& The Stories of the Prophets
of (i.e. written by) Tha'labl.
j also denotes "for the benefit of" (opposite of
>VA^XT _ J^) and so denotes a creditor (^ the debtor), e.g.
^ O 3 O ^ O .
?O V_AJ I gVJlfc j thou owest me a thousand dirhams.
I
It is also used to denote the Purpose and the
Cause, e.g.
^4$ I rose to help him.
for this reason, therefore.
Note 1. j oft "to say to" often means, especially in the
Passive, u to call, name", e.g. *I (<3Lfij) J-^ he was (is) called.
Note 2. ^ is changed to 6 before Pronominal suffixes
(except with the 1 st Pers.), e.g. *J ? LgJ etc. It^ is also changed
to (3 after the particle of address LJ e.g. VS^ LJ "0 wonder",
o ., ^
Jcjjj LJ "0 Zaid!" (i.e. come and help O Zaid!).
5) ^ "as, like" is usually counted among the '
prepositions, although it is really a noun meaning
"sjmilarity^, e.g. js^T "like Zaid".
It is not used with Pronominal suffixes.
Forty-fourth Lesson. 293
B. Separate Prepositions.
1) &\ "to, unto, until".
Is nearly related in meaning to j and serves to
express motion towards a place, e.g.
it A=>- he came to the city.
In relation to time it expresses continuance up to
a certain point of time, e.g.
&[ ftfJocIST Q-. from beginning to end. cf.
Notice specially *j~>\ j| (abbreviated #J[, see Intro.
16) "and so forth "7"eTcaetera".
With suffixes: JjJ "to him", It "to me", etc.
2) j> "up to, as far as".
Is not used with suffixes.
It is sometimes used to mean "even" and then
exercises no influence on the case of the following
^ ^c.. s.. ^^,so )&*".
word, e.g. l^*^ j&. xX^Jl v^Ul^i "I ate the fish,
even its head".
3) Ji "over, on, against".
o * ~ ^ ~
With suffixes: \JLt "on him"; ^ "on me" etc.
W "O --
Used of place: (Jjj^i J* on the way.
_G-o ^ ^ * * * *
he sat at table.
a city on a
Notice specially:
,
-aj* to look (with pleasure) at a jhing.
to examine into a thing.
294 Second Part.
*Ldc (or ij+sA) ^.A he fainted (lit. it was made
dark upon him).
fjdlfi p^UJf Peace be on you! (the greeting of
Moslems to one another, the answer being J.3UJI f^Jii^),
God's mercy be upon him.
Jll Juo God give him blessing and
peace (see Intro. 16).
Used in a iostile sense :
.*-
_p. he went out (to war) against him.
So with verbs denoting anger:
O ^ ., ^ V " ^
^iLJLc o^si2c I was angry with thee.
Used with Adjectives:
^^^^,,^^^^,^^^^11 i ----- A * ~-jr
- , J" f, ^ 15~"er*" ^ I
( eas y) ^ r me -
"To incite to" ^ vi>o; "to induce to" J^ J^, e.g.
-^ ji \xlr I have induced him to (do) something.
Ji is also used to indicate that a burden, duty
or debt lies on one, e.g.
^ ft - ^ f^ O ^
j a duty incumbent on a man.
s the duty of such and such a one.
\i you owe me this (see A, 4).
* a preference over.
Common expressions with J^ are:
ji siij according to V:
os rr*
..I At on the supposition that.
^J
Forty-fourth Lesson. 295
jo Ac so far as possible.
bring him here to me. ^
(lit. on the head and the eye)
willingly, with pleasure.
dill I conjure thee by God.
4) ^ "from, instead of".
With suffixes: ^ "from him", J& "from me",
lit "from us", etc.
Used of place = aw^y from, and so is used with
verbs denoting to flee, avoid, restrain oneself, forbid, /
hinder, defend (with many of these verbs ^ can be I
used), e.g.
o o .. ..
(or ^ ^ *j** to prevent from ....
(or ^J ^ ^J^>-[ to avoid . . ,-f
^ o o ^ o - ^ ^ ^
to defend someone or some-
thing.
It is also used with verbs meaning to uncover,
reveal, open and jasl^ e.g.
to uncover something.
^ 3 1 u^=^ ^c Jll to ask about someone or
something.
In the sense of the Latin de "concerning", e.g.
* ^O^> O^ ^ y
^U-JLw ^c jC> it is told concerning Solomon.
To indicate the source of information, e.g.
^iLi? 0^ ji it is told on the authority of
ash-Shafi'1.
296 Second Part.
It is sometimes used _of time^ e.g.
"shortly, soon".
Notice specially:
aJ^c. aft? \&>j May God be pleased with him (see
Intro. 16).
o ^ *-. o
b apart from. ^ > t
5) "in". '***
With suffixes: ^ in him, in me etc.
It expresses rest in place or time and answers the
questions "where?" and "when?", e.g. ^loJi ,3 in the
- a * .1
house, XJi*J! L\P ,3 in this year.
Sometimes it expresses motion to a place, e.g.
j, jSj he fell into the cistern.
o
It also denotes "among", e.g. Lu ^ who among us.
It is used with verbs of speaking and thinking:
j to speak about
to think over ....
$-, g J^oli" to consider something.
Also after the verbs of desiring: j vl^. to wish
for something; j ^b to yearn after.
I "To^multiply by" is 61^, e.g.
! MCUW ,i la^S LJ-^I multiply three by seven.
'^
6) oJ, ^j, fj "with" (Latin "apud").
With suffixes xS jJ with him, ^jj with me etc. ;
a^^
with him, oJ with me; is rarer than
Forty-fourth Lesson. 297
7) <li (rarely o) "with".
With suffixes *JLX> with him, ^t with me etc.
It denotes association in place or connection in
time, e.g.
A L* he travelled with me.
? viU> I came to thee at sunrise.
It often means "to have something with one", e.g.
o- .,
:<sL~ ^ I have a watch with me.
It also translates the English "besides", e.g.
z - o - - ^
L-JJ j^ 4 besides his being a stranger.
Notice specially:
eUo * in spite of that.
* ' E - -
o ! ^o in spite of the fact that, although.
8) ^ "from".
JO 5
With suffixes jju from him, lLo from us etc.
Used of place (often interchangeable with ^&):
^o^P^> ^ ^ ,
^> he went out from the tent.
It is used with verbsjienoting to go out, to free,
to forbid:
jjiJl p JlC J>j^| I take refuge in God (to free
me) from evil.
Used of time:
sL^J.1 J,{ ^L*aJT ( - r from morning to evening.
_^ & jy^ ;_ ^
Sometimes used (like A>u) to mean "since".
o ., ., o
since two years i.e. two years ago.
298
Second Part.
It is also employed with .verbs and nouns denoting
, as iSo, v-jjS e.g.
^ ojj3 I approached the enemy.
~' O
U* v^j* near us<
Notice specially:
^opl^he sold to him.
.-& ^ (<^J^j) v^ to wonder at something;
other verbs of feeling:
o
jj^ __s to rejoice at ^
?"'*"!
o^ J^NM^ pleased at
The word "than" after a Comparative is expressed
ty e 'g-
v^J^jf ^ c^l swifter than the dog.
o
"A certain" is often expressed by cr preceded by
a word indefinite in the Sing, and followed by the
same word definite in the Plur. e.g.
.
6 ,
>k a certain merchant.
It is also used partitively
followed by a
definite noun in the Plur. to indicate an indefinite
number or quantity, e.g.
\jbT y* ff\J Jo he has already shown you some
of his signs, and to indicate material, e.g.
a chair of wood.
It is very often used after u to explain (^.^xxXJ
what is intended by the particle, e.g.
Forty-fourth Lesson. 299
o ^ U what is with me jn_the way
of wealth i.e. the wealth, which I have.
U what you have done to
us in the way of kindness i.e. the kindness, which
you have done us.
9) JUU, >x* "since" (for 3 o ^J
Is not used with suffixes.
It is sometimes followed by the Nominative, e.g.
o . 9 > -J * * Jog. ^ \
-^j (L\XJ) JUx> tiUji, U I T ,
( I have not seen
jo. o >
^j (Jut
. (you since Sunday.
J
Nouns used as Prepositions.
4. Of the Prepositions, which are really nouns in the
Go .
Accusative (vJ^b), the following are the most common:
1) rU "before, opposite" (of place):
before, opposite the castle.
before the judge.
2) Jou "after" of time or rank (opposite of
oSLTl jsll after the birth (of Christ).
3) "between".
When two words are dependent on ,-v^, then if
c
o
both are substantives the ^ need_^iot be repeated, but
if one (or both) is a pronoun it is always repeated, e.g.
between Zaid and f Amr.
between thee and thy brother.
between me and thee.
800 Second Part.
,1x1 U and ^xj U*s are often used with the same
meaning as ,^0.
( .jU Lo and ( ^ sometimes mean "both and" or^
"partly""^ ~ partly^ :
^d.^ ^ ^u Lo iLsli both poor and rich came to us.
/) ^ \
.o J "opposite" (= sjjo>).
/- f 9 tr \ I I A J. v /
1 5) sLftJLj ^ /^r* /
6) vJ^ 1 ' "under^ bejow" of place or rank (opposite
/
jS^ ^^' uiider a tree.
* .o* x o^ /
gUi! v.:^' below the king (in rank).
V _ -/
X il7) siL\^"opposite": ( ^j f
'
opposite the house.
- o ^
8) j^.5> "round about".
K>ujU! 3^s> round about the city.
9) Jd3> "behind":
o ^ * o ^
? v^jaJL^ behind my back.
^^ 10) ^^o "on this side of, under, without":
o on this side of the river.
J& O3 o may the cheek of the enemy
be under thy feet.
) } Q
With the meaning "without" ^oo or . )3 o ^
may be used instead of J J3 o:
- I ^ o , . ,
J (or ri3 o ^.^ or o3 J^j) ^.^o without that.
Forty-fourth Lesson. 301
Note. For the meaning of viUjO and fiy) see Less. 48, 2.
11) jJL "with, at":
Used of place:
j^c v-jlli I sat with (beside) him.
Used of time:
he came at sunrise.
It is often used with the meaning "to have".
O . ^ o
OU (or ^ or i) ^JOLc I have wealth.
^ ffip Note. i*-X^ ^JJLc means "according to my
.-
_,
12) (jto^fi (or ^c Lto^) "instead of, in place of':
I -. '* ^_ t J O ^ c'
^U3 o^& |J^ ojc>i I took this in place of that.
^ o *.
13) *^3 "on, over, above": of place and rank
-* o *
(opposite of c^ 1 '):
> on the tree.
above the king (in rank).
14) jj> "before" of time (opposite of
o> ^ o^
5 jJ.s before the birth (of Christ).
jJ "before" of place (more often
jtjjf fiJo before the house.
16) ^ "towards":
O -O-o O -
v >jiH _^P towards the West.
^ o ^
Note. _j^' is used as a substantive in all Cases with a
following Genitive in the sense of "like" or "about".
o- ) o ^ Oj-
a man
302 Second Part.
>^u c^yo I passed by about a hundred men.
"behind, on the far side of:
behind them.
behind (on the far side of) the mountains.
5. Two prepositions often occur together. In this
case, if the second was originally a noun, it must be
put in the Genitive, e.g.
O ^ O
cr
jt from between them i.e. from the midst of them.
M from over i.e. above.
under i.e. underneath.
v - r , from with.
^ ^ o
^s. Q^ from on i.e. down from.
)3 cr or o-5^ without.
o^ o
L*jj (j^ before.
Ooo ^^ after.
Exercise 83.
(JL* JsJis
c:r
_ _,
00 ^ Sli; ^1
J ...s
i k^J| if __3* ^ v,
'
v.,
LJLi xJ^ oLAwu |Jo| Jot)
'
Ji-^ J <. ., . O -50^) ^ f,
Forty-fourth Lesson.
308
.
> > , <
xoU
j.t L,
. o
(jr*
s - o y i, ^ Q * >
U:
Tfc_M
. -
0^
LJ
'
N /
.U*^'
*
or*
5-
304 Second Part.
(j;jf
o j > * w
o i - } ^. *$
- o ^ 3
,
UJ A xJLe ^'ixJl *pJia
*^ I. Cy
Exercise 84.
I have (in) this day experienced (tX0L&) indescrib-
able joy (what is not described in _ th^rVay of joy). -
O .,
I shall speak to thee about this matter L.Lfc). I was
very disturbed on examining your letter which x came
s_f <i-*- ' (CJ>x5 li>yJ x 'j
(o^ Part. Act.) to his Excellency our lord and father
{the excellency of our lord the father), may God protect
jl5 him!, and although I almost turned away (in spite of
* / \ rny being I turned awaypK-omTlHe mind of his Excei-
^/ lency what disturbed him, yet I was not able to con-
vud tent my thoughts with the least (of what is) possible,
-rT> and for this reason I find myself ^disturbed (of the
mind), hoping that you will honour me (the being ho-
noured Verbal Noun of *j by giving me in-
9 - ^
formation (sob!); and we pray for you the continnu-
ance of healtfe'and wellbeing. What I have learnt
Forty-fifth Lesson.
of thy indisposition has grieved me, and I have prayed
God that He will clothe thee with the garment of re- '
co very, for He can do all things (He over every thing
is powerful). - - Perhaps our lord will bring thee what *
will rejoice thee. -- The^ sheikh was extremely astonish- 2
ed ,t our x answer. l>
answer.
Forty-fifth Lesson.
Adverbs.
1. Adverbs are either 1) Particles, Inseparable or
Separate, or 2) Nouns used only in the Nom. or Accus.
Inseparable Particles.
2. The Adverbs, which are Inseparable Particles are:
- " ip
a) \ a particle used to indicate a question (= jj>
^O O O -o JO**
see Less. 2, 5) (called the Lpx^^i O>); but only when ^
no Interrogative pronoun occurs in the sentence, e.g.:
* ^o^^ o^ ^o^^E _/AJ * J
(or c>Ji* J^>) u>JL5l hast thou done this?
but |jvj> sjii who has done this?
oS o
J.J I in a double question; see ^i.
/ b) ^ a particle used to give a Future meaning
to the Imperfect (see Less. 13, 4). It is a shortened
form of sjjjl u at the end".
>>~o& * o * >>*<>'.*
(&U&I o^wv) x\,xiww I shall do it.
c) j a particle used for Emphasis, "certainly, truly",
often omitted in translation, e.g.:
Arabic Grammar. r.* m ^Sd 20
I " * "
\ 111 u^^.. n x -+ D iuO^y*c \
306 Second Part.
i truly, I have done it.
Especially with the Modus Energicus (see Less. 15):
5^ o. r
eUdy&3 I shall certainly strike thee.
Also in an Oath:
H
by thy life. M
j is often used before the Predicate, of a Nominal
^JS*** sentence, which begins with .1 (see below 3 e).
is often used to introduce the apodosis of a
- o *
sentence beginning with ^J (see Less. 47, 5).
Separate Adverbial particles.
3. The most important separate particles are:
2,. a) yj[ and & (related to KM, see Less. 46, 2b)
* / Jr,"in that case, then", e.g.: ^
5 let us go then.
b) ^ (for and i) "not" in an Interrogative
sentence :
ILiit ^| shall I not do it?
0.5 o_
So Ji for I and
[
, &
c) f u or" in a double question:
shall I do it or not?
d) U (for and U) "not" in an Interrogative
sentence:
> . o ^ ^ .
Ui hast thou not done it?
e) JjJ "truly, certainly" (see Less. 17, 5).
,.,^ introduces Nominal sentences, the subject
fir i^' s
I following in the Accus., the Predicate often strengthened
by 3 (see above 2 c) following in the Nom., e.g.:
Forty-fifth Lesson. 307
verily, Zaid is intelligent.
It may be used with Pronominal suffixes, the
pronoun then being a subject, e.g. *J| verily he, J.I
and J^[ verily I, lit and lilt verily we.
{-5 St 5 ff, 'Jilff
_ - - ^ m '
f) UJ! (for ^ and U) is always at the heginnj
of a sentence and limits the word or clause i\i t
^ end of it by its meaning "only", e.g.:
^ifo. _v A _7J| L^Jt the alms are for the poor
o *
"i.e., that is" (= ( j^)-
"where?" -
"whence?"
"whither?"
U>ui "wherever". ^ >OX>V^K^. >XA- io'^.o^M. />.J(*9
__i) Jo "but rather, no on the contrary, but". - 7 J3
j) ,jo "yes certainly" as answer to negative sentences,
k) li "there". * ^
n *
1) jo before the Perfect expresses the completion **
or cerjtainty of the action and can sometimes be trans- *'
^ted "aTready","^but is often to be left untranslated.
With the Imperfect it means "sometimes",?*3J3J!l!L-
^ m) JTQ "only"Vaiways placed after .the word Jit
A*I4 1^ ^MVj- v^u^-i > iff
modifies.
n) Jbs "never", follows a verb in^the Perfect
a negative, e.g.:
i j j &"_ _^
U I have never seen him.
20*
308 Second Part.
0) ^S "not at all, by no means".
p) ^ "not, no".
1) As particle of Denial (^^ $) before the Imperf.
Indie, with Present or Future meaning:
) j -o -
'^' ajiil ^ I do it not (or I shall not do it).
2) As particle of Prohibition L^i i) followed by
the Jussive with the meaning of the Imperative:
J O O -
do it not.
3) As particle of Complete Denial
(see Less. 42, 2 i) "there is not (no)". It is followed
by a noun in the Accus. without nunation:
: ~ - /' ^ '
__ _ax ^ there is no, escape (at alll , ^ ^ ^
q) j "not" is used before the Jussive, which then
has the meaning of the Past:
J he did not.
^ r) LJ followed by the Jussive means "not yet".
o -*
s) (jJ "not" (see*, .Less. 14^ 3 Note) is followed by
the Subjunctive, which then has the meaning of a
Future:
I shall not do it.
t),U "not" is followed by either Perfect or Imperfect.
^ O
T Note. For 1M I as particle of Denial see Less. 46, 2 c) Note.
f
V?D -Hi) jjwQ "when" also used as a Conjunction.
^ o ^ ^-*
(rarely jtj) "yes" derived from "(what
you say) is agreeable".
w) j> Particle of Interrogation (see Less. 2, 5).
\ixii Jj> hast thou done it. ^ *Ut \ 3
-*> In an indirect question it denotes "whether", e.g.: ^^^
^yo'^o? jj> J-T^f te ll me whether thou hast ^
expected me. v /
- - - " *** ct).'
ilP (for J^p and ^) "not" in an Interrogative sentence.!
x) J^ "here", or in a strengthened form
^^ i
(sometimes written LL^P).
y) 3ll^ and J)JuJ> "there". (-/> /
^V^v>^ yt./^f. 1
Nouns used as Adverbs. *'
4. Many nouns, the Accusative of which are used
as Prepositions, are used as Adverbs and are then
IndeclmableBnding .^always in u, e-g.
> - *' {"after- ^J^ "where".
01 ^ cr I wards". , ^
- U u not yet". ^^ 07 "whence".
or j^^. "before". ^ -H "whither".
J ' ' "above". ^ "wherever".
cr
; ' "below". ^ in the ex P ression ^ ^'
"nothing else, only this".
5. Most nouns used as Adverbs are employed in
the Accusative (see Less. 42, 2, c, e), e.g.:
iUJLi "little". i~>6 "inside".
U ids "seldom".^ " '[& jy ^J> "outside".
"much, very". L*x> "together". J. ,
"often". ^ iLj- "altogether".
/ -f / "for ever" (with
V6ry ' ^ 1 neg. "never")-
310 Second Part.
1,141 "by day",
"one day, once". ^H " on tne right hand".
'& "on the left hand".
- ' (sign of Future
"to-morrow". *" I tense).
"always". ^ " how "'
. ,,,, ,'- ("often" (later
"by night . ^ j u perhap ^ }
(for to ^ ^ "there is nothing like")
*\ *< ..
V "especially". *x '-^ '.T 7
s
(JN.^ (from the noun jj^* "time") in j^x>u> "then,
* ^ ^
^ o ^
at that time", so also 0$&s "at that time",
iilll "altogether".
at one time at another time.
jo> 3 "alone" is used with suffixes, e.g.
I alone, jsj>j he alone, etc.
Note. For some Verbs which are usually translated into
English by Adverbs as ^"^ etc., see Lesf 30.
N^_ J '
i 'J^ and JoJ "perhaps" are often used with suffixes,
T ^6^4 e -& *& perhaps he, AJ (rarely JULaJ) perhaps I.JJJJ
^L J ? - , >.*.,
/ .-vii^J "would that" with suffixes *xJ would that he,
- o^ o ^
uJ (rarely JcJ) whould that I.
Forty-fifth Lesson.
311
L^Lx.
it!
en or _
~ - - >
L ^5 O 1
o ^
J-.JI
^ *. o^o^V
b ollil Js^ot. J
C) l
LSI
-
oLLax>l Lit
cr
''
O > O .
^ cr
3 y^ j'^^o^b yCi- s j^^J; ^J'
U "
312 Second Part.
'
Exercise 86.
Truly, he can both speak and write^tl^e Arabic
language (he knows the Arabic language speaking and
writing). ^J'SSk* me to see ^ rom ^ me to ^ me tnat
trusty sla^^na^ rather the true friend Sa e id. - - You
must nave p*aience my friend. Jamila said: Art
thou trusting in that O Sa'lgl^^apd/ he said Yes.^-r-o
I nope^B'at (Perhaps that) the'jourfie'y will be pleasant
to you, for the land of Egypt is a cheerful land especially /;
in the winter season. - - I beseech thee by the head
of thy father, that thou deliver me from this trouble '
and command thy men to carry me from this place
whither you wish. He gave us permission to dwell, <>
wherever we might wish. One party of us travelled^
northwards and a party of us travelled southwards. -
How can that be? Y~ The prince said: Is she the
princess Salma? He said: Yes O prince. Then
the prince turned pale (the paleness came upon bU
the face of the prince). The best is that we return
3 Cj~ * )
to where we were. Bonaparte (o^Ljjj) journeyed
from Egypt secretly to his country in the latter days
of the year 1799 A. D., then the Mamlukes and the
people of Egypt prepared together to fight the Drench,
and they were not able only to drive tlafem out of it. -
_
* jUf
Forty-sixth Lesson. 313
They two journeyed together to the place where he had
prepared forj them what was necessary. Some of
the inhabitants of the village came to us and began
to ask us "Whence?" and "Whither?" I alighted
then from the back of my horse. I said to her:
What do you think? Shall we sho^v enmity and resisju
them, or not? Arid she said: No, we shall not resist-
them. And I said\; What shall we do (is the deed)?
Shall I hand over \ to them my weapons and myself,
that they may take Vne captive, and perhaps kill me?
Forty-sixth Lesson.
= 0.0^ > i > } fj 5 5
Conjunctions.
1. The Conjunctions are either Inseparable
Separate.
The Inseparable are:
-* - o - > o *
a) and b) 3 and o "and" (called in Arabic ^JL^LC. ^^>
"particle of union".
* joins two independent words or sentences, while
o, which usually joins sentences only, indicates a
development in the narrative and may often be trans-
lated "and so" "and then". It is also generally jised
to join tw4>-^entejQgej.jdlfilLjfcjere_is a^ ^change of subject.
With a following verb in the Subjunctive*^ means
"so that", lie.^^^
For O with the Predicate of Nominal sentences with Ui
BAA S 9 f
see ^f. j,,^
the Apodosis of Conditional sentences see Less. 47, 5.
O l3 with a following Nominal sentence or a Suffix
means' "for".
314 Second Part.
^ between two sentences, of which the second is
a Nominal sentence often means "while". Such a
9 - _ O^ o j
sentence introduced by ^ is called a xJJli- xJu> "sen-
tence of condition", e.g.:
O o-
Jo;
Zaid stood up, while he wept
(Zaid stood up weeping).
also with change of Subject:
60 ^ o c ^ ^ ^'\
^ v^ Zaid went away and c Amr
^ [ remained (while c Amr
remained).
The ^ is usually dropped, when a Verbal sentence
follows : ^
> , o - G &^
^il^u^J jo: sL> Zaid came, while he laughed
(laughing).
<^u-~* r ~" ^ ,.
The waw of Condition (j'l^i 3 ! 3 ) is sometimes used
before a Nominal sentence which has no Participle or
Imperfect :
Jv.j 2 ^ Zaid came, and in his hand
sword (with a sword in his hand).
For _j as Preposition with Accus. = "with" see Less. 42, 2
' 3*J*rf ^^ l
For 3 with the Gemtfve see Less. 44, 3 A, 3.
> | c) j u so that" (for the Prep, j see Less. 44, 3 A, 4)
^*'"*-!
"' with following Sul)junctive:
' *- -- . , o .
ifc.jL/7 i3U t v_^JlLJ J,S'L> he came to me so that he might
fi*^8
demand the wealth (to demand the wealth), ,
o o ^
With the same meaning are used ^ ? jG; and
negatively: ^l ? ilXJ "so that not".
Forty-sixth Lesson. 315
j with the Jussive (nearly always in the 3 rd Person)
expresses a demand:
O JO-
let him write!
With the particle ^ the J loses its vowel:
(see Less. 14, 3).
2. Trie usual Separable Conjunctions are:
a) Jt "when, since, after, because" with following
Nominal r or Verbal sentence. H ^ ^ ^
b) \S\ "when, jf" originally_used of time, but often ~\ 1/2
of condition (see Less. 47); in indirect questions =
"whether". *{ -\ .*&****+ *-*
o *
oi and |Jt also mean "behold!", in which case the
fc a
former is always followed by a Verbal sentence, the
latter by a Nominal ^sentence in which the Subject is
either in the Nominative or takes ^ (see Less. 44, 3 A, 1):
& J >S 9 I
o > . * \ behold, a man camel
ot means "whenever" (see Less. 47).
o
c) . M l "if, whether" introduces Conditional sentences
* {j2
or indirect Questions (see Less. 47).
o o *
O U means "and if, even if, akhough''.^^ = "verily if.
~ } 'r) ' o
("P jrj rv o
Note. There is also a particle of Denial Q^, e.g.:
> y o * OS ^ o ) QC.^ o -
xo4.r-l lyat Lp> ^i>oL ...I I have not seen anything of
-
her, that I despise.
d) 5] (for .1 and ^) has the following meanings:
1) "if not", ^t "and if not" i.e. "otherwise".
2) "except, only" preceded by a negative. (This ^i J
^ O O^o c ^ O -
is called a ^Uixi u3,> i.e. "particle of exception"), e.g.: )
"
LIU* /^ P *, <>^r*4. ,L*
*frt^ 6^* ff~^.fS~GMH. J/ ^-^ '<***
316 Second Part.
jj,-0 ^1
ati\ "$[ aJt ^ there is no god except God (Allah).
w O
e) Ut (for ..! and lo) only in:
ok
H 1
/ J "either or".
lot
f) U "as for" with a following Nominative, the
edicate being always strengthened with a o, e.g.:
O - ft ^ - ^ -> - os-o .> - as
Ui as for Mt. Hermon,
it is a lofty mountain.
w -o 3) ^^ ).fi^>o S3
/jj^LJi ^ iCCxaJb v^J^i Lof as for the dog, I met
him on the road. (According to Arabian grammarians
3 o ^c
is the Subject, all the rest is Predicate.)
O
g) o i "that" with following Verbal sentence, the
verb being rarely in the Perf., nearly always in the
Imperf. Subjunctive (cf. Less. 17, ^f a).
o 5- c2
^ = "as though"; ^ = "because".
With Negative: 5] (for ^T and 5) "that not"; ij
"so that not".
i
h) ^t "that" with a Nominal sentence, a later verb
being in the Indicative.
With suffixes: ? "that he", ^f or Jj "that I",
- a /
uu! or Li "that we" etc.
In xjj the suffix is often ^L&Jj ^x^jco (cf. Less. 43, 5,
Note 2).
In compounds:
95- \
...tf
"just as if", "it is as if".
Forty-sixth Lesson. 317
"because".
! ^, O l ^t "except that, yet".
c - O ., %
OS
-^> i) }\ "or"; i - - Ut "either - - or" (see above e).
o*
With the Subjunctive means "unless that,
uniiLJliat". ^ """ ' "
j) Ulo (more rarely iLJ) "while".
o
^
o
k) f3 "then, thereupon" often followed by o t.
S - ^
1) JN> "until" (= l i; with a Nominal sentence
often
m) ^ or J3 "in order that" with following^' 8
Subjunctive-
With Negative r and xj "in order that not".
o I Si
n) ^xj and ^.yCI "but", the former being followed by a
verb or noun in the Nominative, the latter only by nouns
in the Accusative or Pronominal suffixes: aJyG "but he",
or J& "but I", ukJ or iki "but we".
M ->
o) LJ "when, after" with following Perfect jo be
translated usually by the Pluperfect.
p) _p "if" in Conditional sentences referring to a
mere supposition (see Less. 47).
.;:? Jj often with the meaning "would that!" before
nouns and pronominal suffixes: is**- \ **-<-fJ
^ = "although". <j> h CO f
With Negative: Up; *$ p ^'"if not",
q) U "so long as" (xi^Ixl? U "the U of continuance"),
is often used in compound Conjunctions:
318 Second Part.
U Jsju "after".
.,
and Uxi "while".
U j "before" (always with thejmperf.).
It is often used also to generalise, e.g.:
'.toW r $\ \ "whenever". U JU "whenever".
^
"if ever". LUT "as often as".
) In these cases it is followed by the Perf. or jbe
Juss. in the sense of the Present.
r) JOG "when", U JOQ "whenever".
s) L\JU or jwo "since". i**-
.
Exercise 87.
v -**'.<.<*...*",;*., o , j > o*
Ljli
-.toft wxfi g*AV?.i ,-. ^- jLiii-s U-o
Jvt.5 cr
Forty-sixth Lesson.
319
O
oliUI
c u
!
^.5 -xD'Jill ^Xt >^PAj Jsx- ,3
AUl z'ui o j tiU
ll LJLS
j'Jis
60.
*JoLoi
. o . . o ^> w
iii ULJU3*i LJLi
U J'Ub ibJ
J O . . .
o . .
-o O i ^^ J^UJI f 'uJf i g^?. O l JSJJH wl it
320 f \3 Second Part,
/^Vf ^W
^ ^ ^^^joS >o
U ^Lo L^J-wj ^
o^ ^oS . x
J Lg-4-JUo ^ J, 3 i XJjfjs^oJU) AAxJlj XJlo^i
._V|
XJUii
o ^ o s ^ o
* - S ^ .,0 ^ ^S *^|; o ^ > o ^
20 ol U A Uie LJL* ^Xii
ol
! L iuX/ Ij
Uls
^LsJ! L^l A! Jl eUIi^ i^JUl! ti ^
UJ i] JLsij
I3U lxL LoJsJf ^U
.... %^ ^tlrclse 88.
As for Jamlla, she went out of the hall into the
^ inner court, and behold by the side of the door of the
hall a large door. No one sees him without being
M
* ' \
Forty-seventh Lesson. 321
attracted to Him (except, and he is attached by
love). - - As for Sa f ld, he was amazed I at the pri
because he had not seen during his life a man like *
him. - - And when the prince had determined to jour-
ney to Egypt, I he called his two sons to accompany. . ifl *i >
him. And wnile they were so engaged (were in that), "/T '
there was a knock at the door (the door was knocked) j J ** j
and behold the servant. - - I have not seen any good
in my coming that (o) I should return. - - And the
two, and those who were with them continued travel-
ling, until they came to the pool of the Ezbekiya, and w ,
, behold a park, which a canal encircled. And.it was,
> when he rode his steed, as though he and the* saddle ^^"c**
1 were one piece. - - While I was examining one of the
books, I lighted upon the following sentence. -- After tftf -r*- 1
all had left, I went to my chamber. I had not ,
, finished my speech, when (until) I heard the sound of
( the firing of a gun, and I prepared to defend myself j^ L'*
* as soon as I should see the first person of them, be-
cause it' seemed to me that there was no deliverance v>U^ (
possible (that there was not of anything which was
possible to us in the way of deliverance) except that. /
- I do not permit that, sq^long_as thou hast not said L />*'?/
to me what thy name is. Before I finished my
speech, I saw my friend. Inform me when thou hast
returned hither. - - Then I commanded Hasan to bring
me large stones that we might build for us a fortress ^ ,
safe from the weapons of the enemies. - - Joy came
upon me until from the excess of what rejoiced me, it
made me weep.
? t?
*r ^ Forty-seventh Lesson.
Conditional Sentences.
Conditional sentences consist of a Protasis or sen-
9 c -
tence containing the condition (-byi) and an Apodosis
s - -
or main sentence (9|^> or vj!^- "answer").
Arabic Grammar. y 21
322 Second Part.
&&v3ni
2. The Protasis is produced by the Conjunction
OS-oJO^ O ^ ^
\Jpj&& ^^) o- or ^1 ^ ^ e con dition is regarded as
possible or likely ; by if it is purely hypothetical or
impossible.
3. In both parts of the Conditional sentence the
perfect or the Jussive may be used in the sense of the
EngHsh_JPresent or Future.
There are thus Four" possible cases :
a) The perfect is used in both parts:
,[ , F . GO. .. _ o
*** ^s+$>J JHJ v^so o \ if Zaid goes I shall go-
^,Ve with him.
b) The Jussive is used in the Protasis, the Perfect
in the Apodosis:
3 * 3 O ., ., 9 O^ 0-0., O
c) The Perfect is used in the Protasis, the Jussive
in the Apodosis:
*jw ^^J>i Jo: v^\5 ...J.
V V 'S
d) The Jussive is used in both parts :
) ^ * o ^ o2 Oo^ o^o^ o
^. U**J Note .After 13! in a Conditional sense the Jussive is
ever used. With _}J the Perfect (rarely Imperf. Indie.)
is used in both parts.
4. If the verb in a Conditional sentence is to ex-
press the meaning of the Past, it must be put in the
Perfect and be preceded by ^: ^^^ $**<>&*>
9 OwOic > oj o * o y OfO w - ,,
o^oy>-t ^JS ^ ^jJotJ! ^X*5 excuse (me), if I have
committed a crime. '
o .,
The Perfect is used after ^ in the sense of the
English Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive or Poten-
tial. When it has the meaning of the Pluperfect ^
may be placed before it:
Forty-seventh Lesson. 323
5 w& ^ - -O , - *J- - i- X O -
'J>\ jjJjJl Jocsi ts)uj ui; _jj if thy Lord had
wished, He would have made men one people. (Ko-
ran 11, 120.)
o
b. If the Protasis begins with o i, then the Apodo-
sis must be introduced by vj. ^
a) If it is a NominaJ sentence;
j- joro-o- I *S e
*J ^*^ls gU3 oi^i ^1 if he wishes that, then the
matter is his (i.e. to do as he likes).
b) jLjiJ&|jJgtyaJ sfintftnfifi expressing a Wish,
Command or Prohibition (the verb being in the Impe-
rative or Jussive):
jj jii Ijyfj out, o j if you see Zaid, tell him.
c) ILJt,is_aL, Verbal sentence which begins with
5-C^SB^* B *ip^^ / i/^O-v -~^*_jp/v^i.^^Pit / ^
^ o ^ ; - j & + f + o ^
one of the particles o^(^), vXs, U (not), or ^j;
>o^ o j^O5 * ^ ^ o^^ o o^ t>
J^jj Q^ *I ^i ^^ jsJii ,*jj^J o l if he steals, one
> T
of his brothers has already stolen before him (Koran
12, 77).
* o ^
Instead of o the particles of or |o! "behold" some-
times occur!
If the Protasis begins with jj, the Apodosis may
be introduced bjo: J
* * *
had wished to be treacherous, he would have taken
the purse in its entirety.
6. Sometimes the Apodosis is omitted and must
be supplied from the context:
o ^ > o ,-. si ^ ^ C..O- ^ o o
liVJbSj oyoi ^; 3 eUyj ^s. vi^jt^, Q t if you go back
on your word, (good); otherwise I command that you
shall be killed.
. ^ -* t-\ ?' i 21*
fl . . -. -?* J .^_ x?-.U,^^,Tl^_ // ~LA?L^L, f mr m ft
324 Second Part.
7. "If not" is expressed by l, ( , iJ or
If a Nominal sentence follows j, one can use
-
jj is also used with the meaning "if only" to ex-
press a wish.
8. A sentence introduced by any of the following
words is treated as a Protasis:
- ("he who, if . -? . (
cr I anyone". ^^ "wherever .
** /"which, if any 1 ' UA* "whatever".
^ }
*i, s jk "when .
CT+? "whoever". _ /"when-
M "what, if any- ^ P-i^)| ever".
U I tbing" ^ f "where".
^/"everyone who". Q wherever B
"whenever". 4s ^ite-na^ ^J^ u how"
"where". ^ "however".
o ,
when it has a general sense. In both parts of such
sentences the Perfect or the Jussive is used in the sense
of the English Present or Future:
3l3 3li ^ if anyone seeks, he attains (will attain).
Note. Sometimes an Imperative is used in a Conditional
sense as a Protasis:
1XU ^.J^'S LXA (ji^c live contented (if thou livest cpn-
tented), thou wilt be a king. -f
^ ^ 1 '
-
Exercise 89.
o 1
O j vJls
^ c^y, -V> l '
Forty-seventh Lessor^ *. '
325
> y s, > I - o * o 2 o^ *o ,.
- ^ jjpr y* ^J> oy, . .
O . . >^ a i. 6 . ,s .5 o
-5? -OS -^ O- O^
LoL ^AAvJt ^J'JU OOU *-- _jJ J.
o-oc i ^ V
*-^** , f*4>A**-
j o V s ^^ & \ ] ~~ & o-o^>
5 o'J3 Lf^l f- VJT^ *V ^ r^
^* /<** . *Ut- , *f*^S
(-539
326 w>1 Second Part
W7.fc.
>0 It
3 fe od ) ^M i
Exercise 90. J\
If the matter is so, I will honour thee greatly jand
make thee chief over all my men. - - If a man passes
by you, tell me, and God will requite you with good.
^ f I said to (in) myself: If God makes easy for me a
i?."/- 1 *'/ wa 7 to escape, it is well; and if not, the matter is his
\j> and He will do what He pleases. When the light
mornm g haLjdawngd, myirit was refreshed,
although I had despaired <-6T denverance. - - If I had
&>.- y known that I should happen ta^m^et thee in ^n^ place,
I would have expended all my emtfgy in receiving thee./?
If thou fulfillest my need, I shall be indebted to thee
for such a pleasure, that the kings of the earth could
not pay the weight of a grain of it ; and if you re-
ject my request then thrust rate into this sea. - If I
demand thee (rem.) from thy father now, there is no
tf /^ *^.
, / / ^
S V^ / *'
Forty-eighth Lesson. x 327
doubt that he will send me back disappointed. - - When
(the) age thwarts us, then there is nothing for us but
to take /refuge /in (the) fair patience and to rely on
God./ When she shows rebellion, he shows Istub-
bornness. v %
r 7 O^ >A/ <> '
o \ *j^_ y"*
V Forty-eighth Lesson.
Interjections,
(stSJji ^^>)
1. The Vocative is expressed by the particles C
and L^jl Fernf Ljf (but the Masc. is often used for the p**^
Fern.) or iZl C
"
4-jj and Uj b" are followed by the noun in the
Nominative with the Article:
I scholar! (see. Less. 16, 4 and
Less. 42, 1 c).
C is followed by the noun in the Nominative
without Article (and without Nunation in the Sing.) if
""
the person addressed is present "and" the noun is not
determined by any following words, e.g. >^ Ij
j li" boy ! j 5 Mohamme
but o^l C"0 boys! \
If the person addressed is absent or the noun is
determined by some word or words after it, then
noun is put in the Accusative, e.g.: .*..<-^w/^f^
+& %Jf A f^^Tf^- '
is'uc G careless! (not addressed to any one par-
ticular person).
328 Second Part.
=
UJlb G thou, who climbest the mountain!
Jl? jJI C Abdallahj.
Note 1. [i is sometimes written without alif, when the
following word beginsjwith^alif, e.g. :
1 -- ~ *&*
Lj my brother! ^Ipb welcome!
Notice specially:
~~- * o w- -
b my father! ^-^ sloi b mother!
-?
L-^j C my Lord! (see. Less. 43, 4 Note 1).
Note 2. The noun that follows G often takes thejyocative
o r
L^- (see below on
-
Note 3. For b followed by see JLess. 44, 3 A 4 Note).
k.
2. Some of the commonest Interjections are:
t, t, J, ,1, ,|, t, .y Ah!
i ! 3 Oh! The following noun often has the ending
CL oder k_ in pause, e.g. L**
or Ul? ! O sorrow! A
\} grief!
, /"" - -
Alas! also with suffixes: ^ Alas for theel
o*
Notice also the Substantives ^o^, ^05 and Jo.,
used (also with suffixes) ^s Interjections, e.g.:
' Woe tothee./ jjj .U Woe to Zaid.
The form ^L^ with the Voca^Yfi. ending may also
"be used* '
U> See there!
i
See there he is ! <* h
Forty-eighth Lesson. ^ y .o? 2d y
*;f. 0>^j[J (L
lip Come! with the Preposition uj- Come, let us go!
Far from it l.a! fltf -t o&
oJ, vJJ Fie! uf >4 7-ton)s r ._,aJ <(*f^.* ft ,
o * 0*0*
^ and ^o ^o Bravo!
(Fern, of the Elative ^L] "best") Hail!
. * ^ ^ * )
or tiU ,3^i> Hail to thee!
>^<Ww***A ^ iv>t<pi5^^>A.;so
and in the Plural
(properly the Imper. IV. of vi "to oome"). *
"lw
"give, bring here!" also used in the Fern. ?/ lu
* * 3 O 3 * > I ^i ~ > r *
^J^ and fXi^o "Beware!" (fromtferfy o ^o see
Less. 44, 4). %*~- **>*t***+
U and Ihlt "Beware!" (see Less. 42, 2).
3. Certain nouns are used in the Accusative as
Interjections (cf. Less. 42, 2 1, Note).
Welcome! w^**e^
/^ **fc**rt,7.f&u*v y
Strange!
Slowly!
Welcome!
Welcome to thee!
*- *> |_*^ [(lit. "Hearing and obeying".) At your
servicel
^j li : Alas for theel cU -**'
4. Many religious expressions are used interjec-
tionally, e.g.:
or AJJi LJ or very Commonly ^\ God!
affi dL Jj^ By God!
330
Second Part.
a
atf I
or
Thanks to God!
If God will!
In the name of God the
Compassionate, the Merci-
ful!
God forbid! (lit. "I take
refuge in God").
There is no might and no
power, save in God the
Mighty ! (Expression of
astonishment and alarm.)
What God will! (Astonish-
ment.)
I ask pardon of God! (Used
to decline a compliment.)
Praises constantly appended to the name of God:
\
{
(
j (Perf. IV of bU) - u ' j ,
He is exalted!
o ^
j^ Praised be He!
Exercise 91.
UJU{
(Proverb)
vjjii L^l
L^i La LxP
<^\
Forty-eighth Lesson.
*
331
- xjlj OlJ!
*T3-
& x ** O.
U
...
^ | .}
St****
I
r<
02
sAP
i^ s^ r
""7
u Jl Jb4*]| Lo ^U (jrlx^ U st C*^
o 02
^
Lj J
^y -X
i j ^ Go, 6 \- ' ('
:>*X5 .cOOJ 'wj Jwxftx ^^^ (^
"\ s*W*A*"
&
332 Second Part.
* ^ , . ^
3J> ^5-iJi LAJ :*3i (J XJLJ ^ Ljj Ua ^^
^_ G
twt Exercise 92.
- - 3*'j
Hither, O Arabs, and follow (^L^in the tracs of
this bold man. Come, let us take I a_walk in the
garden ! - - Ah, my God, what is this strange chance
which has united me with my friend in this raging
sea? - - Woe, truly misfortunes come upon me arfd
strike me; Ah, why dost thou threaten us, O sea? /
O would that I had been slain among the Arabs iff
Praised be the Exalted^the Mighty who has<protected
us from dangers and guarded us from trembles /and
brought us back to Beirut safe from ^arn/(Plur.).
Ah, my precious, who has brought thee if* this
place? Alas for his (to him from) disturbing (peam!
*ifll
Arabic Verse.
1. Prose is called in Arabic j& ("scattering"),
G O ^ G O ^
Poetry is *IaJ ("ordering"). Rhymed Prose is ^^.
60 6^ .
2. Arabic Poetry (yt^i) has both Rh}^me (iUl5) and
GO^ GO^
Metre ( O j 3 or ^) the latter being quantitative.
An Open syllable is short, a closed syllable long
(see Intro. 13, 1).
Forty-ninth Lesson. 333
>
Note. The Pronominal suffix and the second syllable in
Lit may be either long or short.
O <i , O ^G
3. Every Verso or Line (^^ Plur. oLui) consists
Oo - 9 - o
of two Half-verses Jx or
At the_ end of the _Ver^e_jjB 1 j.n_Pause (^A) the
Nunation is dropped and sometimes the vowel is omitted
altogether.
In long poems the first half-verse must end in the
rhyme of the poem.
Sometimes in poems in Rajaz metre (see below 5, b)
there is no common rhyme, but the first half of each
verse rhymes with the second.
4. The number of Feet in use is eight. They are
indicated by means of the letters o c j (as in the
forms of the verb):
v
a)
I ' b)
d)
f)
g)
h) ^.jfcUXn i ,
These Feet are subject to certain changes, e.g.
O y > * > >'
a) jjts ^ _ - becomes
b)
334
Second Part.
c) ilj&L+A . - becomes
)
d) JU
e) J
f)
^ >)
\
g)
h)
O J^ ^ )
O J ., >
o > ^ ^
o 3 o ., ., j
- (rare)
\ /
o > ^ o y
If .Catalexis (rejection of the last syllable) occurs
at the end of a verse, then is changed to w _;
_ w _ to _ _ etc. These are also subject to the
changes given above.
A verse is formed by repetition of the same foot
or by a combination of several feet.
o. The sixteen Arabic Metres are:
Forty-ninth Lesson. 335
'/ed
e> > - o .> j- oj>- o * >.
usually with Catalexis _^*i in the second, sometimes
also in the first half- verse:
^ o - ^ o^ ^^o^ a> ,
Jo X^
"How many an evil hast thou warded off, and
how many a dominion hast thou protected so that it
b) j^Jj [ (especially in didactic poems ; such a poem
6- 3 oi-
being called byi):
"Said Muhammad ibn Malik: I praise my Lord
God, the best Ruler."
(Beginning of the Alftya of Ibn Malik.)
In this metre Catalexis of the last foot (change
^ JL w _ to ^ .^ _) is very common. If there is no
rhyme common to the whole poem, the first half-verse
also has the Catalexis, e.g.:
336 Second Part.
"Says he, who hopes in his forgiving Lord, Yahya
ibn Mu'ti Ibn c Abd-unnur". (From Addurra al-Alflya
by Yahya Ibn c Abd al-Mu c ti az-Zawawl).
J
The.
CF* >
"Poor is the greedy man, rich the contented."
d) J^o J? (usually with Catalexis in both half- verses)
J **\ - *- _ . . _
9 LojJl
O ^ ^ O
"Thrust away the world, for it is of its customs
to humble the exalted and to exalt him who is low."
j _,
e) Mj-H (almost always with Catalexis):
e.g.:
Forty-ninth Lesson. 337
"When thou surpasses! men of whom thou art, it
is as if musk were a part of the blood of the gazelle."
-
<
f) JUXJI (also with Catalexis of the second half-
verse :
"My heart tells me that thou art my destroyer;
my soul is thy ransom, whether thou knowest it or
knowest it not." fUmar Ibn al-Farid.)
g) J
O y 3 + O >
(if i *. O
At the end of the first half- verse the tla* is
<> > ^ ~
usually changed to ^JUiLLo.
Cataiexis may occur at the end of the second
half- verse.
"Stay (both of you), let us weep over the memory
of a beloved one and a place at the edge of the sand-
hill between ad-Dakhul and Haumal." (Imru ? ulqais.)
Arabic Grammar. 22
338 Second Part.
h) SyJiJJ (sometimes with Catalexis of the second
half- verse):
J uj
> OX) 5 O J- _ OS
O - O<0
<4 The soul said to me: death has come to thee, and
thou abidest in the house of rebellion; provide thyself
with piety; and I said: cease, provision is not taken
to the house of the Generous." (Abu Nuwas.)
f fie mbuSteA ' (y. H-& WVQ -,*&&$ 1
i) Ja^w-Ji (often with Catalexis at the end of the
second half-verse :
03 o ^ O 3 <J 3 + O>
"Night and the horses and the desert know me,
also the sword and the guest and paper and the pen."
(al-Mutanabbi.)
Forty-ninth Lesson.
T*e * -m ft ***<*
i, * O >(,
j) v^o^II:
o ) * * o
O > G O J
"Imagine not that thou in the future wilt be in
poetry as we; for the hen has feathers but it does
>/.:*.* < Ibn ad-Dahhiin.)
} ^ o^oi
k)
O i Cj
As a rule the o^jxa* becomes obbdw, and the
. C* i o - t> J
at the end of each half- verse becomes ,.,
"The furthest distance of the fair maid is the
miserliness (of her affection), which consists of a distance
such as no camel can undertake to travel."
(al-Mutanabbl.)
22*
340 Second Part.
e.g.:
O ^ ^ ^ O,o
"And when passion pervades the heart of a lover
then every ,eye has a proof of it." (al-Mutanabbl.)
lJn*
m
o * oj ^. o
-g" , - So. .,<,
"The youth has intelligence wherewith to live, in
so far as his foot guides his leg." rtttt ^ iti . fd
" y ' Jo 3 * " 3 "
e other three metres cUal I ioo^l and
are not used by the older poets.
Exercise 93.
Examples of the more usual Metres.
3 * 'W&
LJ.
1 See Less. 30, 5.
). S f
Forty-ninth Lesson. 341
cr
^ -
'LS ^UUI ,~~3 U?
> o^ *, , y ~ -o
^J ri ^ bS O i
1 U# used parenthetically "strange!".
2 Used as a triptote by poetic license.
342 Second Part.
JuaxS^ i'uxif d^l QArfjjJ
jo
JO-0 ^ ,0-0 ,
li O UJ|
050.
Jo I Jou
1 See Less. 7, 2.
Forty-ninth Lesson.
(Riddle.)
i UB ^t
if LT* r~*
"' V ,r
"t; ^ M J of
^ 3lj
* * * *
(Solution: jLc)
^^OX) > - ~
iil
U, t
a
1 A collection of four letters,
* See Less. 44, 3 A, 1. Note.
Exercise 94.
J ..K lle'uA .J ,US
'?
b
344
Second Part.
**
LJLi *U3 xi ' K
j'las
^ i r E o S Z -o ^^ O
U5lj| ^4-* ^UJL I Ju> J^xi
345
Supplement,
Selections.
From the Koran.
Sura 1.
-'-0,0 >~ >
' ! tf
io^LaJj Si^**
o,c-o o^ o o
o.o . . a- - - rv *p
Sura 112.
jJLi ^ J^L'T A&? $ Js^-I A&T
^ * o^ r!5
Sura 113.
. -ft-rt *
^J^v)
i
-
346
^ o ^ o ^ o
Supplement.
Sura 114.
o ^o-o w , &
(from
Fables.
yi, s.
it > * > - O -
* ^ >A
O O ^ ^ 5
j^
^J XJi ^ g hi
oS
Jots
^ Z
U
dJ.
x*y 4*4**v illn|uL
Supplement. 847
f 535 jUtt X^x
U! ZlsJi liL; A; u,
O 5 ;>.. S O *^ x^O, i,<>^ S
dii ^ *i
O y O J - O
y y
JU ^
JoLo ^.,1^
) ~ > > > \|^/
-^o c>jJL ^
j ~ y ~ <j * d y do y*yycjy&* y ~ ~-^ o ^
I Jo ^AOJ* Lo laJU
j'Jis (ji3-ol j^ v5ts ^^ i^U *
' ^**^
348
Jij|
Supplement.
to &s*J!
, . , ^ ,
_ ,5
O -'
LJLxJ
e
p . WA^-S . jj ju^>
(From xDj' xLJ JJ?).
1 See Less. 30, 5. j
li vsU3
i ^JlL f | tiJOUSj j^c
cr
Supplement.
- 349
*
J,t Jlfii jlS
U
350
Supplement.
Us
_
P V.
i Jo
_
P P
JOc
^ r
3 UoO-J
...Oft &
w -^
ft o
-AJo ^x5
jlj
Supplement.
351
Ip^ ij J^OU fJ O^J! O t*X*
* P
LJLs jls
U
U
(From v^wlLJLM v^ilaa by Madame Rosa Sahib.
(o)
Li {
352 Supplement.
v-
U ^LSb X-ouiJi 4
.^ x>Lsi| ^Jb- ^ Uj lkJiJ
Lo li
KxJliJ! BO-aJi tAr>^ &
**
Jai Ub .ilJC^O
Supplement. 353
s* | vaJL^ ^>o Ui
UJLLx.
C)
Description of Kairo.
(From XA9l> ^^ 9 by lJo
cr
^ ! ' * ** ^-^
^Lib ) | ^ s-J'J
t
Arabic Grammar. 23
354 Supplement.
- A-wL *-3j*J ^.^ *i> j Jo
1 See Intro.
XX*JLi
cr
a*
. U XSjJ^ ^j cr.5
H-^LaJ!
Supplement. 355
Jo
Ui
,3'uii
xi: LLi iU
U
-U*U jy^ y
U j.t
23*
356 Supplement.
/g
Js^i:
J .
o> 3 B^PlftJf ^Lo JOLc ,^0 i^Xgi ^j
iy!c jfj
Supplement. 357
la j 033^*
From the Romance
by |j
' I/L, LpJf > C
w
^JLs XJLJJi ^Uj*
io-c J, j
^ ULils
fyJ
358
Supplement.
XJLjlat
ulj
3/4
1 U(c
SuUXt!
Q| -*-*o
cr
CT*
ljjc>I lXo
Li*LA^I Lo
uXP &JyJ
Bji BJsJb
^ La!
Supplement. 359
Lg-o 'U2>jx>ww'u5 Ls'uo
L U iaJU/>
-* x*^ s-ft UJUff o^o U^ HO^JI c^' LJb
o bC/> j
IXc IjJcsr
U
&iittt it ju^i c*3ua .j^ji j5 u^t ^ A):;
Jsju Lij j jU
Xjuaj X-oJsIi d
O
JJI 3 j'cix ^ ^JL- L^OJ 'uiSJLju sj^i; j.1
360 Supplement.
i. * S- f.
lit
w P
;'b v^b *J
*?*
P
<5 l5|j
ULo
w P
Loi
Supplement.
361
Lol
*Ji
L5;
-SJl
LJ
s UJ
cX^O ^J. ^j*~*..wJ) vi>sJ JC
0^
L>aLxi
*^! siU3 Ji
362 Supplement.
it uXiSi.J ...? ...IvXjjf J'JS
p s vJ V^> "V
JJ UULi
I
a^JLi U^
-
,'
* *
UXs Us>^3 li^XJLfi: Jwefe^l UJuUi IO'LS UJ
* ^
Xr? 1 ' Le
vXxxJ
Supplement. 363
Extracts from Journals,
1. From the Egyptian journal ft
LLJt *
ououi
u L^Sij ^.O yoi AJJ|
Q^ (jj-rf (3 ^^>
LLJi ic^ 3 JL x3l 'uCo^
LoUt
^ 3 LoUl J* j O^J
T> JLiJi JJj Uxo L^
364 Supplement.
X-oliJ!
oLJIaJf
LJle i
'uoLb Lo L^-Jt QxaxA^^ L^j/Ju yCicJLi H^JJSJ
L ek^JI |Jv? ^ lostf Jo
Supplement. 365
cr
*
If
Zl io'uiJu 1 x*^
366
Supplement.
U
Ulf
c:r .
x:
XJbUll! o'Lxt^U
Supplement. 367
n
,3
o-
Lo J* cr j^^xijs^ JWC'L^J jjij LJ!J
cr
Lc L, oLJUJi
Supplement.
2. From the Syrian journal
/ ix
Ul ^uj QaaSy & uj^L, Lzul
Jo aJt oo 1 xJLc UxiJw
-l &LJ
jJf U^JL>ol5
*]| jjJ
J^ull xLjLaJl L> Jii ilJ
Supplement. 369
iJJJI ,5 ^JLc uaJL'J JiJi l it
sX*J
cr
jfjjj
f L^" r-^^ Vi> ^ > ' cr '^
i!
U iCj
Arabic Grammar. 24
370 Supplement.
_j3lu ^ jA>^! Jcjyi il ^vJJ a^Ootll
^ jJLo j
XAl Jo
LU, Lg-J
Supplement. 371
8 J uJ! j^ isuxjt ur a
^ cr l sjJUJt ^ js
sLii
y , *>.Jj iC^-^Ja^ LpUi x^\x*
xT !
JXSJL,
1 See Less. 34, 4.
24*
372 Supplement.
3 Le
Letters,
Invitations.
Supplement.
373
/b
Xi 8>| Lo
s'uaist XjuL*J! X^L*J| ^5
0>>5 all!
Private letters.
j,
J 13
374 Supplement.
xilJb
XJLJ| 0ou aJUxil tiU Xftj Uol
Business letters.
J^ LJ
Pi* 1
,3 iux^j
,>
t
Supplement. 375
3 u/
LJ
Jo ! ^^ct f^b p^l tlwXJ>l Jsju
iujj,LJj jj'u^Ji ^
JJUj y^ j O^LJi C
Li ^ ^7. Lo ( > t^rl.t
< ^ y ^ ^^ JsJiLl
,3 stljli il L^J vi>JLoyi ^fdi xLy-^lf j^
*^\Jij' U
Lo
376 Supplement.
aJU LxJLcj (^
SL\> l3tXs5| Jsjj ill
U.
j U ^ KJuIi^ ^ L^cfU ^Ju\ & l io^JLkLl
U. v-jl*^! (j^o^ **>ly i5 &Z+& ijci****] i^xJ^
JJis ^xsJUJI Q^
K-o^xIl jJLxi 'l5
Lo
Receipts, Leases etc.
U1v
Supplement. 377
v^Jl
^jii x&LS ^ o^3l>- 3
X! jUll j^o^ llfJut ^ jr^ cr
378
Supplement.
O
vJI - ij
c:r ,
S a^Ul
Jl - if
JsJLJt
cr
Supplement. 379
il AJuLJt Oi! . . IAS" lJO
J^I U^'u: ^oJy tfJ
i ^JCT ^jj [i ! uu 3 j^od\
U-. yill
^b v5l - s!
J B^JCxIl
Jo sj
380 Supplement.
z
i-* O^LJJ sc\ L
o
ili
LJJ Uxi^l Lr, U: XJjj
381
Vocabulary
of words (arranged according to roots) in the
Exercises and Selections in Part II.
NB. The vowels in brackets after a verb indicate of the
2nd radical in the Imperf. vn. = verbal noun. n. pr. = proper
name.
I particle of interrogation.
s -
j| (with negative) never,
plur. jJJ needle.
o
Ibrahim, Abraham.
Jo] camel (coll.).
Go 6-0
QJ| son &u j daughter, girl
(see _j*J).
S -
LJ! (jji) father -^jJJ fatherly.
y*ijj ^j| n. pr. of the court-
f
fool of Hartln Arrashld.
-
^! (a) to refuse.
-
^X,! (i) to come with ^ to
bring oT following.
\ II. to move V. to be
influenced -
plur.
ruins, antiquities
notable matter.
y>-\ IV. to let X. to hire
o, o o^ .
s->! and S;*-^-] reward, price,
o s ""
hire jtr^ hireling,
o ^ o
period, death - - J^>^
for (the sake of), that
O c O
-, for the sake of.
O .
fern,
one
sunday.
(u) to take, get (with
imperf.) to begin to III.
to blame VIII. to take for
O o
oneself - - vn. j^>\ taking
6 --
- L\>U conception.
' -
-i V. to be late j>i fern.
,o ' :^
i plur. ji*l other
o
and j=>\ last, end
_- o <
fc to the last man.
382 Vocabulary.
G G^ o G ^ o G ^oc
,i! (j3-i) plur. >>] and o tj-=>J v-0;f hare '
G o >' G ^ G . G >
brother oo>l plur. ol_^>! ^X*i plur. ^_j-^i lion.
sister. Gc -s o OE
-s G,S f*\ captivity f-y*u all,
v-Ol II. to discipline v-^ o " '
G s entirely jty^i prisoner of
training v^jp! trained; wa r.
^ E
2 -s ouw! (a) to be afflicted V.
cultured ^\ of good G ^
training. to vex oneself
vexation.
^5 O) II. and IV. to transmit, 3 _ ^ ^ os
carry out, accomplish. X-Jsi^wSl Alexandria.
^ -.
3] when, since (conj.) vi)!3 3| o .os
at that time. f-"] plur. sUv,l name, (see j*w).
> s
^o o
13 \ behold! !<3f when, if iuJLxcUw^l the Ismailia (a
f. .
!3f then. quarter of Cairo).
^ G c ^ o
O 3i to permit (with v->) IV. J-^ ] stall.
. j G o
to announce X. to ask Jwoi X. to root out
?. s o
permission ^| permission origin _ ^j altogether.
6 ^ 60^.
- oy ear. ^\ horizon.
IV. to injure - - ^\ ^jJi? (ai>6evt^<;) sir
damage. my ma ster.
c- ,z ,
^ Uim ' y^F October.
~ *&
~ ,i II. to date. ^ ,s
^^ JS/I II. to assure V. to be
(joj\ plur. (jofy earth, land. assured.
5 s ^^S Gos G,^
.i ,1 (a) to be sleepless - vn. ^ (u) to eat vn. J*t j*U
U - food.
.?1 6 ^ &
^j'- U^j^| clerus.
G -o oc
J^jlji arnauts, albanians. 3 1 the definite article.
Vocabulary.
383
fern,
plur.
yesterday.
who, which.
)! (a) to become accustomed
^
c II. to hope V. to con-
o ^ s r , ^
eider J^of plur. jLol hope.
to II. to edit III. to
Go - 1
be familiar with oJ I o*' ( a ) to be * &fe ~ Iv - t( >
G G >1>
plur. O^t and O^Jt thousand
G i~
iu book.
believe (in vj) VIII. to rely
*-) pain.
G.o 2 -oS
^U I a German J,U i German
LoUi Germany.
*J| a god *&? God, Allah.
o ^
vX] to - unto Q! i| until.
jl or (in an alternative).
g - -
ll mother jUl before (prep.).
Ui as for.
G > ..o
emperor.
! (u) to command, (with accus.
of the person and V.J of the
thing)
plur.
G ^
matter
command; plur.
G
Emir, Prince
Prince of the
S
faithful u? J*^ imperial
G >i*
an onicial.
on - Q^) safety - - AJ.
G .
reliability, deposit - - (^v^
G ty
true, Emin (n. pr.) (j+y*
believer ^*J'^ a reliable
person.
o l and o i that.
only ^1 ^j except that.
M S
Q| truly, verily ~ L^Jj only.
lit i.
a Anatolia, Asia Minor.
oc oc *>o
i fern, oof thou UJo
O >(ic
you (dual) ^i you (plur.).
lo? III. to be friendly JLit
G s
amiability (j~-ot amiable
G .. o G ',
I..LMO] plur. /w'j man
j| woman.
384
Vocabulary.
jj English (coll.)
English (adj.).
.,5 .*
JJ V. to be slow ^l plur.
K-o i and Q!^! vessel.
V. to equip oneself
I
equipment.
II. to greet J^i plur.
j&t family, population, worthy
welcome
ability, worthiness.
g
i or.
)2\ Europe.
&j^l factory.
>j goose (coll.).
o j oE
^1 n. pr. Augusta.
S i instrument, machine 0*, i
fern, ^i first, beginning
j*.^? vij? the day before
> -o
yesterday Jjf^ I the first
parts.
jl (^3!) to come (of time)
Q^H now.
^- O --.
\ and al^i ah!
cjlo place of refuge.
^! that is, i.e.
Jf (JoJ i) II. to strengthen.
Lu2jf also.
QJ! where.
S OsS
/ cl fern. Xjj (with gen.) what
(gee
> 8)>
,J;^j| n. pr. Ayyubid.
^-> with, through, in ^b
s _,
without Q i LJ since (conj.).
uu pope.
Oo G.^-
|U I well.
^jC para (a turkish coin.).
5 ^
ij ,u Paris.
>'V '
j^xJ to be bad \jh
fortune.
L^lj Pasha.
w -
j (u) to decide.
ife VII. to break out.
>c5^ (a) to seek (with
?. plur. jL^ and
river (the Nile).
mis-
1 . steam
1 . steam-.
Vocabulary.
385
O.,o*
: low (in price). <3Utij4 oranges (coll.).
jo* G. ... . . o e
Jc^. avarice Jy^- avaricious. ,-jJ III. to leave ^LJl
s ^ 2 > yesterday.
Jo V. to be scattered Jo GO. o .
o ; > ^j? ^d ^Y ^d (MiO
escape Q-* Jo ^ it must be. G > .
*.. ' 3.
I Jo VIII. to begin
beginning, elements
S . o
;uf elementary.
.Jo VIII. to hasten to j Jo
full moon.
6 o
J an extraordinary thing.
j substitute Q*
G.o . '
instead of XJjo suit of
clothes.
G . .
,.,Jo bodv.
|jo to appear, seem good
Go . S . .
Jo Bedouin (coll.) ^55^
Bedouin (adj.) ioJ^ plur.
desert.
. 0.05
. - -
li Jo (u)
land
to strive.
desert, plain J.!j? outward,
external.
G .. 9 -
ssl^j diploma ^U creator
s
innocent.
Arabic Grammar.
JjU powder.
j j (u) to come out.
. . o ..
<-l>jj to move about, be restless,
^o (u) to lighten -- IV. to
send forth lightning *o
lightning.
i)jj III. to bless t&jt pond.
J o .
Berlin.
n. pr. Barmecide.
G.o.
space of time.
G . o y
UCw^j garden.
J VII. to take pleasure in
G > o~
contented.
G. .
courage J^Jj brave.
J II. to bring good news
G
X. to rejoice jtV-^ an d
human.
n. pr. (
IV. to see.
(u) to stamp.
25
386
Vocabulary.
Joj some (3 to 10) KfLea*
' , ^
plur. *jU wares.
'
- *
hero *JUu idleness.
IV. to conceal within
So.
j belly.
j (a) to send.
1 (u) to be distant - VIII.
to remove -- Ooo distance
JyoiJ far, distant
after (prep.) -- ^X*J after-
o . o-
wards o i ^*? after (conj.).
j one, some, another (see
Less. 43, 8).
i + <J *
&Xju suddenly.
^ o .
^Uaij hatred.
JJb mule (coll.).
lJb VII. to be desired.
Cm ,.
(Persian) thin cotton
material.
J ox.
ib (a) to remain. IV. to
retain 9laj stay, life
Jj and X-^J remainder.
J Bey.
early, in the morning
>*
a ^i n. pr. Abu Bekr.
.. . v
(i) to weep (over Q-.) vn.
o ^
Jo but, rather.
a ^
Jo V. to be wet through.
*Jb nightingale.
o district
,
- land
,_ -
_
native KJ jJUJ } the natives.
to reach - II. to make
to reach vn.
O ^ 6.0-
ebb delivery j-^-* sum
of money.
afJb! piebald.
b (u) to put to the test
ni. to be anxious about
X-Jb plur. |j^b misfortune.
Lo? finger-tips.
AJ seaport,
Q> c,
^oj plur.
. _ _ . son KxJJ and
plur. '^L>o daughter, girl.
and
o
Vocabulary. 387
J (i) to build VIII. to ^3 Beyrout.
build for oneself VUb plur. &<> (go i) to sell -- vn. ^u
O o c O ^ s o , O ^ O* ^-r
'*jyoi, &jLo and ,^y build- and ?*+** " 5-^ plur. Xjl
seller^
ing J^c iLL on the eV-o (Turkish) Bey.
ground of. o ..
9 - iM^rf explanation, proof
^fj cheerful. e- -o-
o ' (jo clear ^ between
_^J) fine, brilliant. _ ^
L4-Lo while.
p V. to take possession. - - s -
o ^ os viU to woe to thee !
V^) P^ ur - S^l^^ door, - -
gate. gj-J (a) to follow, belong to -
5 "
J* (-j* u) to reveal IV. to v - to pursue - go plur.
allow. V? 'r
B ^ p, fll wer ~~ * JL ?- > plur.
J post.
J)*J issue, consequence.
X3^j buffet, bar. G
r, j, go tobacco.
-o_jj police.
*3 o
QXJ straw,
-o piano.
B 5 Lp business ^5
pu (o^o a and i) to spend the
o o. e j>, business (adj.) -
night ^^V? plur. o_j^ G *.'.
house. j^f 1 merchant.
- -. s - .-:
to become white ^^' under (P re P-) " ^^'
lower.
o
white i s^sv 5 tinner
x/> soft, delicate.
o ..
(jtol^J tinning.
<yy> (u) to leave, give up
beer. *?.?
ay n. pr. Turks.
28*
Vocabulary.
Go
thermometer.
ninth,
j to become tired IV. to
G - - G -o
weary s_-ou plur. v-jLxi'f
AJ fig (coll.).
revenge ^-
to take revenge on.
firm, sure.
weariness o^* J tired.
Go.
G .0^
g*-*J misfortune.
v-djti fOX.
G ., o G ., o .
Go^
..Lftj| solidity o^"* solid,
-xi boundary.
strong.
G
G S , - ~
JwxfL; heavy.
&& plur. yixj monastery of
-
*
O w> - - O ^ -*
dervishes.
xa^ fem. O^lii' three
G ^o
^ )^^ -^5<oO^
otytL} telegram.
^.j_ji^Li thirty slj'^U^i ^
G o*
Go G ^
lA-^JLj plur. LX*^lj pupil,
Tuesday wxX3 a third
" ^ -.
G .
scholar.
v>Jlj third.
Sa (u) to read Jlj following.
Go^ GJJ G^oj
(i) to be complete II. and
IV. to complete, finish *>
G ^ g- *S
j.Uj perfection fi perfect,
complete.
cooled with snow.
snow s
then, thereupon.
^j dried dates (coll.).
G 6-
p July.
G .. S -
plur. jUi
eighth.
price
o IV. to praise
G o
j IV. to suspect iU-p
suspicion. "*" *^ i toxt>r*vvN/ .
J u) to repent.
o^j mulberry (coll.).
5dJ (_*>! u) to long for.
9 US praise ,^3 plur.
.o ' - oS .
9Uo'J fold, interval Lo)
*Q -
during ^-)^| two ^u
second i^olj a second.
Vocabulary.
plur.
garment.
Go.
ox -
js- giant, powerful.
- - *>, -
A> plur. Ju*j>- mountain.
G.
cheese.
corpse.
(i) to be new, exert one-
self V. to be renewed -
S 2
grandfather - I wX> very
new.
6
wall jJ^-> worthy.
strife,
oar.
jar.
V. to dare.
jy>- II. to tempt, try.
> plur. f*oiy>- bud.
wound.
plur. Joly> journal.
V. to drink in draughts,
excavating.
>- journal, announcement.
6-
> (i) to rup, flow, happen
IV. to carry out vn.
Go. G . . ..
current (month).
> plur. SU>1 part.
i-ji> plur. ^-j|i> island (also
n. pr. of a palace near Cairo)
jj|j*-t Algeria - ^j^
butcher.
ji^a- respectable.
i> (^i>) reward, payment.
j> V. to acquire information
^j*_^*l> plur. j**xA*[y>
spy.
> (u) I. and VI. to dare
boldness.
> body.
:* n. pr. Ja'far.
(a) to make; (with follow-
ing imperf.) to begin to.
^ o
c> Geography.
(i) to dry.
, rough.
(i) to be exalted IV. to
f^
show honour J-JL> exalted.
390
Vocabulary.
. . . G 3 O J
wJL>- X. to have a thing jj.g.>- crowd, public.
Gs G.o.
and K>o>- demon -
brought.
- (i) to lash II. to bind
(a book) J> plur.
skin.
>- (i) to sit, seat oneself
session.
G >o
hard rock,
clear.
^>- numerous.
Go .
j+z>- burning coal.
Go w 3 3 . .
j ; . 7- plur. j-yoU^>- sycomore.
mosque --
sembly.
week X,
~s *
Friday ?-** = ^' totality, a ^
+z>-\ whole - - X
company ;c*L>- plur.
union, as-
? plur. jU^ Darnel ^l*>
beauty X.,l*.."> n. pr.
3
> sentence, sum total
>lj wholesale.
garden
mad.
Go.
wC> V. to avoid
G
and wold- side
or v*-*^ beside (prep.)
G . . G J .
v-jU> Majesty (title)- Vj-*^"
South 3^*^" southerly
S . o s ^ *%
"i-^^H plur. s^jL>.| strange.
(a) to gather IV. to
determine VIII. to assemble, 9
Go.
unite 5-*^>- assembling
G O 3 *3 3 3
JsjL>- plur. ^j-^* troop.
Go G . oS
i> plur. (j*l^>f kind, class.
^- guinea (money).
cnar S e falsely.
G^o
>. zea l O'L^J>| industry
industrious.
to be ready II. to equip,
prepare
high school.
? (a) to be ignorant
very ignorant.
firmament.
Ljl> (L-)J>-) IV. to answer,
Vocabulary
391
corrrespond -- v!>?* P lur<
answer.
6- >
steed Jy>- excellence
O -
(elative
excellent.
j>- (jj - u) to act wrongfully
towards (ti*) III. to be
"**
eighbour to j$=>- tyranny
jL> plur. L -)'jt^ neigh-
O *
bour l^r*- neighbourhood.
> (; j-> u) to be allowed -
VI. to exceed.
u ) to be bungry
*-,^ .
hunger
hungry.
> u) to ramble about.
* ^ -
Plur. yi>>- jewel.
- ,-> i) to come vn.
plur. LJ^X~- pocket.
Gizeh (near Cairo).
O y i
*p- plur. ^j^>- army.
o
:> century.
*z>- (i) IV. to love vn. >^o>
and <V-^ love ^^^
o - o e
plur. LJ*-^>! friend, beloved
(in the poets) v* 5 *^ more
loved x?^-^ 1 beloved (fern.)-
ink.
- Abyssinian.
',
plur. i^U^- pregnant.
until, so that.
OJ> (u) to incite.
~ *
_s> (u) to make the pilgrimage
S ~ 2 -
vn. **> -.l>- pilgrim
t/ G
> i -9E
- _L^5i! n. pr. al-Hajjaj,
governor for the Caliph e Abd
al-Malik.
^^ (u) to conceal.
o , ^ c o r - o >
^^ stone j^P* lap s.
room.
plur. Q^?" partridge.
S -
(u) to limit J^- plur.
J.Js^ boundarj- J^> op
to Jo Jo iron.
II. to narrate to V.
to relate VI. to converse
O , .c
- v^>oJv> plur.
392 Vocabulary.
narrative, conversation <> & -
ooJo> new JoJ>l=> plur.
j
event.
VI. to come down.
(i) to surround /
o ^ ^
glance
park.
II. to warn
take care!
S
II. to write
plur.
and
x t ^
8 J'-T
hot.
warmth, heat
III. to make war on
G O *. S j j
*-}> plur. v >.> war
^y
plur.
watchful.
(u) to guard (j*;^
watchman,
II. to instigate.
(i) to turn away
plur. ^5j>- letter (of the
alphabet), particle.
burning.
j> II. to move
movement.
f> VIII. to honour X. to
esteem forbidden -
robber, thief ^r^ ^ or ~
bidden (by religion).
o
jp- party.
( jz* (a) to be sad IV. to
O o 3 <J * o E
make sad (M p plur.
sadness
sad.
IV. to feel (v-J)
i, ~ ~
plur. ir'5^ > sense.
reckoning, regard
ah!
IV. to cause to till
tillage o,L>i n. pr.
->i J? name for a lion. *
accordance with
friend.
- in
> o -
(i) to envy
sigh IS.
Bword.
alas!
- to be
know V. to improve
X. to approve, find
o j
pleasing Q-^=^ beauty
G - "
1 ' also n - P r - ~~
a beauty.
Vocabulary.
393
anguish xa> to
make oneself comfortable.
(u) to happen IV. to
O j >
get (money) 0^*a^- acquire-
ment
O - 3 O .,
result CJ*AO^ products.
(u) to appear, come
II. to make ready III. to
converse with IV. to bring v
presence S-
presence (also used as a title)
present, ready.
railway station.
(i) to smash.
happiness.
(u) to surround.
^c
Ji a name of the Caliph
Omar.
(a) to keep, guard vn.
&Juib> truth -
real.
Muhafaza
(province of Egypt).
solemnity, festival.
V. to be verified - - X.
S -
to deserve, be due --
plur.
right, truth
wisdom /*J o plur.
ersian) ruler,
governor, judge a
government, court *jJ
physician, wise A
court.
(i) to relate HI. to
imitate 'i^3*z>- narrative,
story.
(u)to loosen, settle, inhabit
VH. to be loosed
entrance (of a period of time)
S- ..
a thing allowed
S .. o - -
V^ plur. obL^ place
quarter (of a town)
belonging to a place.
(i) to swear . X. to
make to swear,
o, ^
shaving.
dark black.
O , O f.
plur. j^l>I dream,
sweet ^t_jJl> present,
gift ic>i> sweetmeats.
394
Vocabulary.
^ death ^J? fever
isLywjA/a' J? typhoid fever.
& (a) to praise vn. O^T
vX*f n. pr. JS^s? n. pr.
O y e> ^
O^*^ n. pr.
O ->^OC
""] to become red f\ red
<_>
,Lr ass.
(i) to carry, induce to
^ <5 o ^ O ' ^
vn. ^"
III. to tempt
VIII. to be cunning X.
bearer, pregnant
porter.
(i) to protect.
^_jJL^> wine shop.
- o
AS> wheat.
^> (u) to bend.
li ( T >>) VIII. to need
plur. oLi
and ^\^ need, matter.
axis.
ajLcs* possession.
^5 O ^
court-yard.
IV. to surround
to be impossible
- o ~
power, year ^^ (prep-)
<-
round about <il>- plur.
O - o
condition, state
V
condition ^Ls> (adv.)
immediately UJl>- as soon
S - o.
as Al^> present ^p*
O o -
cunning Jjj^ 1 exchange
artful i
it is unavoidable.
(i) I. and VIH. to contain,
where, since.
II. to confuse V.
to be coufused
o ^ *
perplexity B
of a city.
time.
wall.
quarter
-^> II. to let live, greet
IV. to make to live X. to
be ashamed '&*&* or j^>-
o
life ^y=> quarter (of city),
settlement, tribe X-v:
o ..
serpent ...f_j-o> animal.
Vocabulary.
395
*3- (a) to conceal VIII. to Jot^p* cupboard QJ^ ma '
hide oneself.
gazme, shop.
xxx^> rascal.
j^> HI. to get news IV. to
inform VIII. to test -
> plur.
news.
< 3, *
bread j LJ> baker.
(i) to strike, trample on.
(i) to seal, close +z>
I ^*j'L> seal-ring.
(i. u) to serve - X. to
O ^ O
take into service. X
> loss.
^**^wix^> wood.
(j^> (u) to concern
special (j^_^^> i L ^J
2 .
specially. <jo* special.
- ^ <"'.* &
:> VIII. to shorten
service *
O^ -
>- maidservant.
servant -
compendium.
.. r - o
jjd^- plur. ^ ) LJUQ:> eunuch.
^c^> n. to dye.
to become green -
S
ydr> green
vegetables.
jjJs-> (Persian) Khedive, prince
Jo3> line, writing.
^c_^jJ^> khedivial.
o . .
> ruin v-Jj3> ruined.
-j3- (u) to go out IV. to
bring out vn. j> -
~.L> tribute - j*^ outside.
3 * O E
dumb.
and 5L fault.
Ii> III. to address
letter.
III. to risk
li> danger
^ -
I^U3- heart, condition.
VIII. to pierce, cut
Oo -
through vn. ,*!>-
VIII. to snatch for
oneself.
396 Vocabulary.
. O.o
^iuar> light (in weight).
. .
-&> (a) to be hidden (from
. to hide.
> V. to use a toothpick
i i .*
and > fnend, also
canal.
n. and IV. to free
V. to free oneself.
sincere worship
honest.
III. to have intercourse
with VIII. to be mingled.
III. to disagree with,
contradict V. to remain
behind VIII. to go up and
down X3^b> succession
O ^ -
KaJj> successor, Caliph -
OtL> successor - - vJ^L>
o .. - >
other than iUJL^ breach
O . o ^
of law oJLx^ different.
fJls> (u) to create.
> (u) to be empty VIII.
to be alone.
wine.
fern. u^^> five
-
fifty
fifth ,J*WMJ> Thursday.
< ,
JuL> he who holds back =
Satan -
o> III. to quarrel with
> (Persian) sir (used of
Christians).
j^>) (a) to fear II.
GO .
to frighten Oj-i> and
,^
fear.
> u) to betray, deceive.
O .o .
^o> disappointment.
to choose -
r
*> g od ' better -
thread kLo> tailor.
Jyp) V. to imagine
Jop- plur. vi_^> horse (coll.).
*li (fA>0 II. to pitch a tent,
to break (of night) x*-^
' plur. j^> tent.
05 . i -.
Xjfo plur. v!^ ^east of burdei
O.o
. to arrange jLo] flight
Vocabulary.
397
l>0 fowl (coll.).
Tigris.
darkness, night.
(u) to enter - - IV. to
< >
bring in -- u^>O entrance
inside (prep.).
smoke, tobacco.
V -/
O O ^
L-J^O way.
AJ>^O degree.
- -- Oo -
^O II. to teach (j^O
O ., O -
lesson X^jJoo school.
6 o
c .O coat of mail
^O IV. to overtake.
A^O Dirham (coin or weight)
- Plur. f^|/> money.
thyrine (ancient remedy
against poison).
JO
December.
(u)to call, name, pray (for
vi), wish ^J of thing)
VIII. to claim X. to
summon - ^3 claim -
0,0^ -
invitation io induce-
of- a o
ment fX! <^lvX5l yours
obediently ^-*^+c ?**
Attorney-general. '
rudder.
XsO sheet (of paper), book.
JO (a) to pay HI. to defend
o ^
of person),
mausoleum.
c > m
(u) to knock -- AJJO and
jo exactness -- xius
plur ^ minute .
(u) to show -- J-o plur.
jj^3 proof> indica tion
*^
j^O broker, auctioneer.
bucket.
to rush upon.
II. to destroy.
(3^ Damascus.
* ^>
^ tear.
- P r - of a cit y in
blood
plur
398
Vocabulary.
plur. jAJiJO Dinar (a gold
coin).
. *. O 3
> (u) to approach LoO
world J,<J>f lowest.
O time, fate.
III. to crush
dark-coloured.
plur. 8)^O misfortune.
O (fji3) sickness
Jo David.
o x
O (;3<J>) (u) to revolve - - , I O
> ' .' G j o .,
plur. j^O house plur. j 1*3
land jjO monastery
S^O turn B-jjO plur. j%^
G
circle ,f^X* period.
director, editor
I
Mudiriya (Egyptian
province).
XJjJ kingdom K-JlxJl XJj^xIl
the Turkish Empire.
j!i3 (*jO u) to last jl*3 Lc
so long as UJIo always.
. >
Q^O on this side of, before,
without (also ^3^) gU^O
beware !
plur. Qj^l^O Diwan,
Divan.
KtJ> plur. xj^iM medicine.
cock.
o^ ^
and xSiJ religion
w ^5 J O ^
j^j the day of
judgment.
O o
wolf.
-;o3 (a) to slay
slaughter.
languid.
i
= liUJ.
(a) to keep, save.
^O (i) to flow, shed (tears).
3 (u) to mention, remind
V. to remember ^C> and
^,0 O^o^
^5 -^<3 remembrance j o t\j
remembrance s^^= t\j
certificate, ticket.
-^3 (_j^3) aroused also
n. pr.
fern.
*
that, those.
o ^ o ^ ^
33 sin, fault v.^J3 tail.
^ o . j
LJ plur.
Vocabulary.
399
(a) to go -- vn. V-JI&3 n. pr. of a month --
_
- v-^SO gold.
^ fera. OJO master, possessor
o .
(with gen.) olo plur.
person -
day '
stall.
ilJ ( v,.J u) to taste IV.
U U^
to make to taste / *
U
taste.
^; chief, captain.
aspect.
- **>
lord U-v, perhaps.
o '"' *0
plur. 5 gain.
JaJj (u, i) to bind.
i fern. *-*j\ four
. ,oo,o >o.
\\ pjj Wednesday
,jlj fourth Q plur. ^,i
a fourth
square ,-?
mile.
* a square
Jt) II. to train up.
5 1 (i) to lament.
>. (a, i, u) to weigh
^ ^ to returil) withdraw -
111. to look through IV.
' '
to give back - ^j^j return.
VIII. to tremble.
plur.
man
-j) to see, think good c ,
- IV. to show VI. to v
appear [>*j and X-^ sight
opinion - - (j^r*
j (u) to beg, hope
request.
and
, o ,
j>^ comfort V^A.
c^ *
v^j>-j spacious -
welcome !
fi ^
plur. viw^, stage (of a
journey) *
journey.
"j compassion - p&
the all-compassionate i.e. God.
, & ->
permission, permit
-c>-j cheap.
tender.
400
Vocabulary.
o^ (u) to give back, answer,
refuse.
^<J>j IV. to make bad 8
bad.
Oo ^
L>. ruins.
J^ III. correspond with
Cj, ^
IV. to send XJ'u*, plur.
u*, message
y y
*j apostle.
halter.
(u) to anchor.
(u) to sprinkle.
majority (of a child)
y a c
-ywj upright (XxA^jJ) =
O * o y
Harun ar-Rashid ^X^y>
one who leads aright.
9L^ (j-^j) rope.
, lead &0U0J bullet.
II. to set with precious
stones.
^ IV. to suck (of a child).
(a) to be content IV.
^ I. and IV. to thunder.
=; (a) to pasture III. to
pay attention to c!j
shepherd X-^j subjects
= o ^
(of a kingdom) (^y*
pasturage.
(a) to wish (for ^)
wish,
loaf.
05
u) in spite of.
j (a) to lift up, take away
O^o
VIII. to raise oneself 'JOj
JO*O
Turkish
]*sj
a raising _^
o
title ]*s\j exalter, leader.
O^o
III. to accompany xasj
company
companion.
plur.
(i) to be tender, soft.
, III. to observe
neck.
to make contented, satisfy
VI. to come to terms with.
3^ (u) to sleep, lie down
ois^ sleep.
Sj II. to patch "aoe^ a note
(short letter).
II. refresh.
s, (u) to write.
Vocabulary.
401
(a) to ride vn. V*J^j
6 s>
*~*\\ plur. "w^k. passenger
9 '.o.
ship.
o s
centre.
(u) to run.
VI. to be heaped up.
whole, totality.
6 ^
plur. Uj lance.
sand.
,
j pomegranate (coll.).
it is understood among
Oi^o wish, will.
II. to terrify
terror.
5^ u) to wish.
Rome.
O o ,
j (a) I. and VUI. to be
' 6. .
sufficiently watered ^1^
narrative, piece (in theatre).
j ; Mejldi = 22 piasters
30 paras.
cultivated
Plur.
land.
O )
butter.
bli the Ezbekiya (a square
in Cairo).
& %3j u > to be current ( coin )- ^j plur. ^% customer.
- .- O o^ 6 -
u) to go away or ^ . plantation ct.s sower,
TT r.^J TT7 4-^ 44- U^' 0^0
(i) to throw
projectile.
6 6 -oj
plur. Q^ monk.
6
pledge pledged.
astray II. and IV. to permit
to rest - Vin. and X. to
rest -
rest, comfort -
6 . O f . 0-^
A^JJ plur. B-tii wind ^"ol,
C>* *> C** "v C-/ -^
about to (do something)
o ., _
planter '*
'| blue _
field.
name of a
plur. pj smell,
27'
odour ->. spiritual.
,.,
L) (3j) IV - to wish - V t-H
Arabic Grammar.
camel.
vexatious.
^5j) pure,
earthquake.
.
1) P lur -
time.
time Q
26
402
Vocabulary.
Go,
i>J>j modesty, asceticism.
!p plur. l3I flower -
3 oo,o J -P E
the Azhar
.TJ C.
mosque in Cairo.
_! (p-_5j) II- to marry -^
husband '^r^ w ^ e<
O|; (Ojj) V. to take as provision
Ol: provisions.
G '-
jb (j3j u) to visit B,^ visit
G >
-J3; lie -
<5l: (^3; a, u) to cease IV.
to make to cease.
G- ,
corner.
3|: (Jot i) to increase VIII.
G o ^
to increase Js|; n * P r
SOU increase ^Jj^ excess
jJh bidder
^
auction.
c^k (t i) to remove.
II. to adorn.
plur. \Ji^\ cause.
l$I Saturday.
u; n. pr. of a woman.
'
(a) to ask (after ^c), beg
35_^v question, request JJ^
beggar.
-x4JUjw September.
praised be He (i.e. God).
G, o ^
wild beast X**-* fem.
Go- S _ -
-*-sw seven ^^ seventh
G 3 & ^ ^ E
0. ) to P re ede -
precedence
(for g
s
lady - NXAV fem. o^ six
earlier.
e =
plur o
and
,
curtain.
plur<
^ prayer carpet
(small) mosque.
n. to enter (in a register
plur.
prison.
dam, stoppage.
sixth.
Vocabulary.
403
(Persian) head, chief.
(u) to rejoice ,* r
G o .
and
o , os
*lj~ joy - ^ plur.
secret couch
9 ' -
glad.
o to dress.
_.j** (a) to go to pasture in
the morning II. to cause
to go etc.
* -
JO\M street.
IV. to hasten &
-w
haste
plur.
swift.
roof.
' ^
II. to write ^a^> line.
o^ ^ -
III. to help i
happiness
Constantinople - j
(Turkish) Your Excellency -
happy, also n. pr.
n. pr. fern. -
fore-arm.
O o -OE
tw plur. Lx^vi current price,
rate.
(a) to exert oneself
plur.
exertion.
foot (of a hill).
o
L to travel _ ^ journey
'
plur
o
dining-table -
ambassador.
(part.).
G
plur. r^v ship.
->~ (u) to fall IV. to make
to fall VI. to fall one after
another.
to be sick IV. to make
sick.
(i) I. and IV. to give drink
to - To water -
coin,
railway.
(u) to be silent.
,) to be drunken vn.
IV. to intoxicate.
u) to dwell, be quiet
o - -
II. to quieten Q^* an< *
O .. e tt t
xiX%M dwelling, rest jjN^*
O o .
to dwell i*T^***^ dwelling
ur.QbCw inhabitant,
26*
404
Vocabulary.
6
quiet (S-X*" plur. yv
knife.
(u) to plunder, rob
method.
weapon.
O ^
plur.
(u, a) to flay.
^ * *
..LLJLv plur. j^b^Lw Sultan
...
imperial.
(a) to be sound II. to
hand over, greet (with ^c.)
o ^
VIII. to take over j^Lw
peace, greeting - &!
good condition - 111 t Islam
Moslem^ -
safe, also n. pr. - n. pr.
n. pr. fern. ,
n. pr. Solomon.
. (u) to forget II. to
comfort.
** poison.
*cw (a) to permit in. to
make a generous present to.
sUw table-cloth.
* (a) I. and VIII. to hear
IV. to cause to hear vn.
and pU* NcLb
at your service.
o^
butter Q-S^ fat (adj.).
Oo
II. to name ^] plur.
name, noun *!*f*
heaven.
O ,
plur. ^1x^1 tooth, age
O ^ O w
Q'L>LW plur. juLw! point of
' o a ,
lance X-Uv Sunna i.e. Moslem
tradition.
plur.
year
yearly.
sleeplessness.
IL to make easv ~
easy.
^ (^w u) to be
(with accus.)
evil
uw
misfortune.
square.
^ o j - o S
O_^wj to become black
o ^
black '^^ plur. HO
O *
master BJS-^v lady
o- ^
HoLyw authority.
Vocabulary.
405
-. > . *
wall (of city) s^v Sura fUi and ftft Syria, Damascus
(of Koran). 2
y o* , - ^Ui Syrian.
or *J i>*" Syria.
-
lash.
hour.
j^ particle indicating futurity 5^ ( a ) to be satisfied.
distance.
(j^*"' condition
concerning.
2 -
UjLii youth.
u) to drive (cattle),
O y <3 ~VS.
plur. .*
lead
o * *
market .$** driver.
III. to make equivalent
V. to be like
beside , except
specially.
traveller *
extent.
J'
i) to travel, go -
manner of life ,
O o ^ O
plur.
rest, remainder.
J5-^v sword,
cigar.
i) to flow.
VIII. to be entangled
& window.
G + or
* IV. to resemble X-i^
doubt.
>yy^w plur. ,J^ different.
) to abuse.
iw winter.
plur. jLa^ tree (coll.).
> -.
s^ V. to take courage
c '-. -?. -A.
'^c.^ 1 courage * brave.
*x
and .-y* 1 -* way, journey O
avarice.
.
^ plur.
person.
~
i; (u) to strengthen, bind -
VIII. to strengthen oneself
c. o
s.xii violence JyjJvxi
'a c
plur. il^X-iil violent, strong.
S o'^ ^ o *
yi evil j^i sparks jjyi
bad.
406
Vocabulary.
LJ J* (a) to drink, smoke vn. .x IV. to make known
O o 3 O . .
.& LJ! T . drink, wine
O . o . O . o .
- v-J ^o and v--^o drink
,
* P lur - ^" stocking.
.
VI. (literally to be wide
of the breast) to rejoice.
Oyi (u) to wander about.
O o . O j ,
JG& plur. -^j-i condition.
ii plur. cjl^i street
o.
^ legal.
-vi II. to honour V. to
' 4 '" - -
be honoured v 5-vi honour
o
v aj^i noble, exalted.
ty*t east ^yo eastern
O J J
, * * .& sunrise.
g)jw VIII. to subscribe to (with
3) i^r^ 1 plur. l5_vi
companion.
& VIII. to buy %\j&
purchase.
vi plur. ^_bl_j-w coast.
o , ,
.^ou;; plur. \^ijsJ*i tribe, people.
scii (a) to busy, occupy, distract
o. Ooj G.oS
from (Q^) JJ^ plur. jLjLii!
business, work.
compassion.
SL& (i) to heal.
/& (u) to cleave, be unpleasant'
/ Z+A& brother *Ji
misfortune, hardship.
^ii reddish.
plur.
miserable.
-
iiV*& (u) to doubt ^vi doubt.
... O o >
jC& (u) to thank jC thanks.
" ' 6 . oS
-ii plur. ul^-vii form, vowel-
sign.
-& (u) to complain (of Q^).
J-iO (pass.) to dry.
A^O (u) to smell.
O o .
sun.
JM (u) to embrace, surround
VIII. to contain (with ^c)
O o . G ' -
Js^i union uU-w north
hair j^*^ barley -tLvi
poet.
Vocabulary.
407
left side --
northern.
(a) to witness - - III. to
see, take into consideration
ajL^i evidence
O 3 y
plur. ^j-^-v* witness
honey.
* VIII. to desire, wish.
IH. and X. to ask
advice IV. to indicate,
o- ^
advice B^-xi advice.
o 1
^^) VIII. to yearn
- o ^ os
"* plur. ,ij-^) longing.
name of a month.
(i) to roast.
-A a) to wish
thing X
plur.
a little.
old man, sheykh
= " '
mt. Hermon.
i; the shiites.
plur.
character.
*XMO
C/
salon.
IV. to be or do in the
& VIII. to be renowned **
<j o ^ O > oc
~i~vi plur. ff^i and
i Q r^ j **'
<3 O > o ^
month
renowned.
morning r-4-^ mornng
G
-.A-^AJO beautiful.
patience.
o
correctness, health g.^
correct.
VHI. to keep company
o
with one another v^J>-o
o ^ oE 6 e -
plur. ^L^i and v^ 3 master,
possessor, friend.
desert.
rock, peak.
concerning.
(u, i) to go out from -
O>>
plur. J^> breast.
(u) to be sincere -
to confirm VI. to unite -
"
i satan, devil.
sincerity, friendship
V|Olo sincere
CL
plur. ib'Joot friend.
408
Vocabulary.
governmental district (in
Turkey).
difficult
difficulty.
youth, smallness
small.
IV. to hearken.
O o ^
page (of a book).
to become yellow, pale
yellow, pale.
/Sax? II. to clap the hands.
(u) to be pure, clear.
deed (in law).
HI. and VI. to collide.
IV. to persist in.
II. to declare expressly
o
V. = passive f-\? j obvious.
., ^ G ., O ^
(u) to cry out xs
G * .
and -r^jAO cry.
path.
(i) to spend, use V. to o
dispose of - VII. to remove
."".:'
^^oXx Mutasarrif (a
turkish official) - fc
G., ^
(i) to crucify ^
f ame of a street in Cairo '
ko (u) to be sound IL
and IV . to repair, reform -
G ., o
adjustment
plur. ~Xo honest
C v_/
G o ^
Saladin
(or
interest.
II. to pray B
prayer.
II. to determine,
eternal.
strong, powerful.
chest, box.
(a) to make, prepare
VIII. to prepare KJU-O
work x&LLo plur. 5-*^*
art.
Go G ^ o 2 O j
plur. OU-oJ and
class, genus.
jjjo) IV. to hit
X. to approve '^^^ plur.
v-^uUax misfortune
accident.
G .. OS
plur. ot_^ot voice.
Vocabulary.
2
soda.
409
to opposite.
Jo (u) to injure - - VIII. to
G, , G ,
compel ,-*to plar. jly^
IV. to listen to.
V. to imagine - injury , . ^ damflge _
S , j
L;/to necessary.
picture, copy - ^^
picture.
;Lo (Turkish) g-o
a (gold) piastre.
jLo (Q jjo u) to protect.
Lo (^yo i) to cry out.
(.Xyo i) L, V. and VIII.
Go*
to hunt. ^Xjy hunt.
Sidon.
j^x> i) to become, happen
summer.
*o (i, u) to correct 2,
G ^ G
officer Xlojlto and X
police.
> ^
c^to hyena.
to unrest.
to (a) to laugh - vn.
( ,
afternoon
c3 plur. -+fo environs.
-^
strike, coin VIII.
GO,
to be troubled v_ ;-> blow.
(with imperf.) to begin to. double.
(i) to fart.
to IV. to kindle.
jto) beast of prey.
4
weakness
weak ^Jut-to plur.
to (i) to err, wander from
path.
-
o (u) to gather VII. to
assemble.
interior
contents.
to u) to shine IV.
to light.
IV. to lose.
IV. to add
yto plur. v-ij-Mto guest.
410
Vocabulary.
fjwto) V. to feel oppressed
need.
physician.
G o < G ^ o ^
,i^Jb cooking &jJa* kitchen.
O O
(a) to print vn.
G
nature *
printing office.
*..b III. to agree with VII.
to cover oneself, be shut
* '
o Lft^xLu in accordance with.
journal,
milling.
Tripoli.
(a) to throw down or out
o
^Jjb prostrate.
jla (u) to chase away OjJo
parcel.
> * oS
fcjki deaf.
^ **.-*
side, place.
(u) to knock at IV. to
G
cast down the eyes (jf^j-k
G ) y G O
plur. .Ayb and .&*P way
plur. ^Jp
fashion.
b IV. to feed -
food.
G ..
path,
plur.
G.o -
(a) to pierce xotb
thrust of a lance.
IV. to extinguish.
uniform.
(u) to require, seek vn.
G*^ G^o G-o^
demand.
(u) to mount, rise, go out
to (with Ji) VIII. to
examine (with J>^) X. to
get information about &
G ^
countenance JLb star (at
birth).
(i) to be repudiated (of a
w
woman) II. to repudiate
IV. to set free, shoot
absolute,
to quieten oneself.
(a) to desire
greediness.
i-b II. to purify, clean.
Vocabulary.
411
2
b II. to give shade to
2 >
shade JJiw shady.
ipy^JO plur. (j*u^lj-b peacock.
elb (c_j-b) IV. to obey X.
to be able to do (with accus.) - - r
s. .o. fJlb IV. to become dark
obedience - - LA*-* Oo , 6 . ,
^JLb oppression j^Lb
6 -
darkness -- ^Jub oppressor
6 jo .
- (jJLb* oppressed
u) to go round. - ,
at your service
obedient.
^) IV. to be able to
do ioLb power.
.b (U^-b u) to be long II.
6 j
and IV. to lengthen
6
length J-Jj-b long.
table.
b VII. to contain (with
2 6s .
, ,-b fold Xcb enclosed,
to be good, calm
6 ^
oneself vv?- 3 good
hail!
i) to fly - - IV. to
6 - 60 .
cause to fly y'ub and -^
6 - o
plur. jLcbf bird.
60.
^*b gazelle.
6 . ^j
_ftjjb plur. 'ijb witty person,
agreeable, comfortable.
b (u) to think, believe, esteem
,.b plur. ... *>b thought.
i? (a) to seem, appear IV.
to manifest, show X. to
6 , ,
get the upper hand
appearance -- j^b back -
and Sr^ib midday
Pib external.
(a) pass, to be anxious about
- slAH woollen cloak,
in vain.
(u) to worship
e . ^ - I . - , o .
plur. ^t^- slave *!*"
^
n. pr. u^x temple.
f. VIII. to esteem, be ex-
perienced - - Bjxt tears
a.Uc expression.
412
Vocabulary.
*>
(wvLxc n. pr. (j*
the Abbasids.
8.-OJ
Osman Turks.
6 5-
raging (of the sea).
^ (a) I. and V. to be astonish-
o
ed at (with (j-) IV. to
G ..
please ^.^ astonishment
adv. wonderfully
o.
wonderful 'zj^f
plur. v_*jL^ wonderful matter.
(i) to be unable to do (with
o j. > ..
- J j^ plur. JJ^ old
woman.
II. to do quickly X. to
hurry J^p and KX^p haste
G 5. i
paid beforehand
a#y. quickly.
^ (u) to count, number IV.
to prepare X. to prepare
G . . G*
oneself OJs^: and BJ^c
G
number JXjJvc numerous.
Ill: to be j . equivalent to,
correspond to o*-N^ justice
G G . o 3
^Olf: just
temperate.
(a) to cease to exist, be
deprived IV. to deprive
6 *
of (with 2 accus.) pXc
want.
> * -os
Js plur. Si^Xc! enemy
Go.
beside.
sweet (water) x
sweetness V-jtcXc anxiety.
^c (i) to excuse V. to be
Q O J
effaced j<Ae excuse.
arabs (coll.), bedouins
^Ufr n. pr. <3^i an arab,
a bedouin.
) ^
bride, young woman,
throne.
Go.
(i) to offer, give over,
communicate, happen to
V. to interfere in VIII. to
G o.
oppose O^r^ breadth
G
broad.
5,ii (i) to know II. to inform
- VI. to be recognised -
VIII. to confess, grant (with
G. o.
L-J) yw knowledge
"G ^o.
^J^yt/j good, pleasure.
G..
arak.
Vocabulary.
413
'iSjSu* battle.
O 5
jc. (i) to be powerful - - jc
power j^j^ dear, valuable.
pjf. (i) to determine on (with
j^c) _ 'fJ^ic. dinner party.
II. to comfort.
II. to make difficult -
difficult.
plur. J u*^ army, troops
soldier.
w -._ honey,
^^c perhaps.
O o . O .. o
v_ .A-M^e plur. LjLiXc) herb.
III. to be in company
with a^
twenty.
O o ^
fern. SXc ten
Uic (_jAae) stick - ,
rebellion.
(a and u) to bite
IV. to support,
(a) to be thirsty.
o-o -
X.a,->r. turn, side street
plur. v_-b[^e tender feeling.
IV. to give VI. to give
to one another ^LLc] gift.
_j ^
II. to show honour to -
o .. O ., O
ac plur. *LIac bone . t *nr
excellent, extraordinary
greater part,
chastity, trueness.
Lac: (u) to pardon (with
pardon
health.
good
O o -
?
(i) to summon
0^0) <* -
V. to eat in the evening. contract " B ^ P lur
knot.
O j o > ->
plur. .x
evening meal-time,
sparrow.
chief city - -
plur.
sic plur.
Acre.
intellect
intellectual.
and
f n. pr. of Caliphs.
414
Vocabulary.
III. to treat (a patient).
(i) to feed v^alc fodder
manger,
dc II. to hang up IV. to
kindle V. to hold fast to
(with v.->), hang together, be
dependent.
Jit (a) to know II. to teach
IV. to inform V. to
O o O ) )
learn /Jlc plur. **ie science
.
/^J^*- 1 doctrine
mark ^JLe wise, learned
OS. Ow-J
- *Uc very learned
teacher.
plur. ...j^Jle world.
IV. to advertise, inform.
(u) to be high, loud V.
to come near iile high
I-
highest, summit
high, loud, AH (n. pr.)
> > -
exalted jjluS (God)
is exalted ^U/> plur. o'Lx^i
highest aim.
OS - -
tfi on ^1 j^c on condition
that.
pe. II. to make general or uni-
G _
versal - - (** uncle (on the
w .,0-0 > O
father's side) /**J
cousin, wife r^-*^ public,
_ ^ } , ^
universality
2
common people j-vc and
S j ->
public, general
generally.
VIII. to rely on.
O o j
(i) to live long ^ life,
.>..> G O ^ >
age ~*^ Omar ^-t^-
diminutive of the preceding
_, ~*.t Amr -*LC flourishing.
ifx^^ deep.
(a) to do, have effect
IV. to hasten - VI. to transact
business with one another
o ^. o ..o
J^f: plur. uU^i action, deed,
district J^U plur. i3Ue
6 .o.
workman - J.4J^> manufactury.
^ from, instead of.
o
-Le with
y^ obstinate.
Vocabulary.
415
neck.
t
Is. title, address (of a letter).
(i) to concern, refer to -
VIII. to care for 'iUe pain
- xiUc anxiety.
(a) to impose a condition,
know in. to make covenant
Oo.
V. to care for
contract, epoch.
u) to return, become
- IV. to make to return,
repeat VIII. to be accu-
stomed -
o,
plur.
plur.
return
custom
aloe wood,
stick.
u) to take refuge
(with UJ).
u) to need, wish.
penknife.
II. to put faith in -
family.
, *
u) to swim pie year.
^) in. and IV. to help
to ask for help -
helper.
plur.
0-0
i) to blame.
>lxcf feast
Christmas.
shame, disgrace,
i) to live V. to
Oo *
earn a living -- \J^tf- and
Oo * ^ -
K^Xx life - - xJlfr (pet
o i^
name <J^f^) Ayesha (n. pr.
o ^
of woman) -- jSl** wages,
* ^ ^
plur. ^jijLsw provisions.
cry, howl.
x i) II. to determine
Ojo O >
plur. l and
eye, spring *-y^ specimen,
o a-
proof -- Q^t sick.
c after.
Ki to deceive III. to for-
sake.
c V. to breakfast - - Si -Xe-
breakfast - - Ovc following
d av Ijj: to-morrow.
V. and VIII. to nourish
oneself.
416
Vocabulary.
- (u) to set (of the sun)
O y ) <3 O
- sunset c- west
j. western *-?j foreign
o . .-.j
land V^j^ plur. iJj-
^*- <!>
strange, ,_ extraordinary
O o ^
^ybo Maghreb, western land
'So. o ^'
(3?*^ plur. Kjljw moor.
^ o -
to sift.
I. and II. to twitter.
O O j j
f- plur. (jiijfi- piastre.
am.
O . 3
. plur. O^e room.
IV. to drown.
Gaza.
abundant.
fjc plur. Q^^- gazelle.
O ^ 5 O .
raid L5J* 70
moral.
**> (i) to be dark.
(i) to wash.
* to cover
he fainted.
. fresh.
^csc. (a) to be or become angry
- IV. to make angry
o , ,
anger.
c plur. ) covering.
ftc. X. to ask pardon. '
^
ai- carelessness.
thirst.
- (i) to conquer x*
G
victor v_>JLc usual.
c. (a) to make a mistake,
be deceived.
* > *
Jol IV. to speak harshly.
jflc IV. to bolt (a door).
O ., } O ^ o
*blc plur. Q^JL^ youth.
e dear.
anxiety (*j*JW anxious.
> (u) to cover, overwhelm.
)
he fainted
VIII. to seize an oppor-
o.^
tunity (** sheep (coll.)
Cj _
X^XA booty.
Vocabulary. 417
^c. X. to esteem unnecessary fc^'UJf the first sura of the
2 - * O .o
9Uc song ( j^c- plur. Koran r
rich. jj**^ II- to seek (with ^ya or
(Jwt), inspect,
t (cJ^i) X. to call for help. o o
viU3 (u) to rage *&& act of
i u) to plunge. v . olence>
-fci) i I. and V. to be &LXs 8e dition.
absent, depart V'^'
e o. ' ^c^ youth BlXi (_^X9) girl,
absence v^ distant, S"<
s '. ^s2 dawn,
hidden ^uLc absent. s ":
(J>JLS? scrutiny.
c- (jxt) II. to change V. 5 . ( ' G . " OJ
6o- ^T^ and j^Jli* splendid,
to be changed ^-sc other
than, not - JU , r^ I**** honoured.
5- O .
. 4U 5 f -r 3 (i) to flee .13 flight
without ^) ^.xc on the -* n
condition that.
jw esca]>e
Jo- v
xi garden, field. -v
jS \ . to look with pleasure
** J ) to be cloud ^' at (with <>) - ^S comfort,
joy.
iuuc highest degree. ^ . o..
^9 (a) to rejoice 3 plur.
wi and, and so, then ,.". 'V?f '
for. C^ f J^ ~ ^ d O^J 9
heart 03 Vn. to be single, alone -
s ^ Oo.
^3 II. to crush. O3 a piece, parcel.
Oo. - -<JS
g-Xi (a) to open ^J6 opening, u*^ P lar - Lr'j*' horse, mare
capture *-,J^ capture L^J plur. (j^j)_^3 rider.
Arabic Grammar.
418 Vocabulary.
oLi^JU (upholstered) furniture. J^AOJ (i) to divide II. to
G o) Go.
Xx>3 opportunity. isolate, cut out J^xos plur.
Go. G , , G , ,
c j plur. p)3 branch, tributary U^AOS section , season
(stream). G o .
... o J^AAOAJ detail.
j* to finish (with Q) IV. o . -
x\is2> silver.
. o-p
to empty out, (JS^JH) strive _ ,
G . J^cas IV. to make excellent
- '^_)& empty. o o. G j,
... J^ai plur. i3^25 excellence,
lj5 II. to separate, isolate '**
III. to leave V. and VIII. grace ^ ^as besides
60 ; Gi.. O.
to separate f> difference J^iiaj kindness ^ li
G.^ G . excellent.
Vjj fear ^ J 3 separation - - : G . o
^ o M * jio (u) to cleave 8 .Lai religious
/i3 party, division feeling.
w parting of the hair. *+ n - P r - of woman.
o
^ (u) to rub. J* < a ) to make ' do '
6 ? G e '?f plur. 3lii? deed, verb.
OJ 9 plur. Ut oven. ^
6o ^ ,-^sl plur. clil viper.
^o3 \ Frank, European (coll.) **
-^ * t.t
S o-o jvjis to lose VIII. to seek
Frankish, European. 6 o ^
something lost JsJis loss
Gs - o..
J3 plur. io^^o3 french.
T ^ oyyw wanting, not on hand.
G . ^j
G
franc. j-^i plur. i\j& poor, needy.
o .,
roomy. Jaiii only.
Go
IV. to corrupt. ^ jurisprudence.
O 3 w ^
old Cairo. tA (u) to let loose.
Vocabulary.
419
V. and VIII. to think,
Oo
consider (with J.) & and
O.o 6 .oz"
a-Xs plur. jl&l thought.
o. * , ...
iU^b plur. *^l_j3 fruit.
_^I3 peasant.
x5 philosopher.
ii dawn.
,..^13 a certain (person)
a certain (adj.).
o^
A^ mouth.
cup.
+^3 (a) to understand X. to
get information about.
oli (Oji u) to pass by, escape.
ol$ (.3^9) IV. to benefit, inform
?^ ^ ,
- HsXjls plur. JsJI^i profit.
u) to acquire (with v-))
to save oneself.
X. to wake up
v^i above, on.
i beans.
(^s) (only with genit. and
suffixes) mouth.
j. in [+* while.
(jtols (\J&t?) IV. to pour
^ -- S *
flood ajls interest
(on money).
6 ,
;^o bad, ugly.
grave.
s' (i) to seize (with
receive money VII. to
shrink
sezure,
. o.
receiving of money AXOJ>
handle.
i captain.
*J> (a) to receive, take up -
H. to kiss III. to correspond
to, go to meet IV. to
advance to (with J^c) VI.
to meet one another X.
to receive >^ reception
O.o So
XJLo south J^jJJ southern
o o-o ^ o^ oc
upper Egypt
- iJUxiJ tribe (of Arabs) -
xi before (prep.) bLo
o .
before (adv.) Job' coming
O .. o ,
(month etc.) J**JiX~w future.
420
Vocabulary.
xi (u) to kill III. to fight
Go. G
Js^s killing Juy<3 killed.
vi (particle of strengthening
with the perf.) already
(with imperf.) sometimes.
Xs (i) to be able - - II. to
Go .
determine jJo value
G . o G .
amount ,Ob able
to do (with
s (a) to arrive II. to offer,
present V. to come forward,
G >
advance, precede p5^
G. ^ G .
arrival *JO foot
coming, next (month etc.)
fjJo plur. UOcs ancient
Z 3
J> in front of.
i (i) to row.
yS (i) to persevere, be refreshed
(of the eye) IV. to confess
(with LJ) X. to lead to
" G ...
confess j|J> determination
U^t -5 consolation
G*.'
SjiS dry land, continent
j&a residence.
-i (a) to read IV. to make
to read, send (greeting)
vn. ssLs
Koran.
> reading,
J> (u) to be near VIII.
to approach^ l rir* neigh-
G
bourhood s^ojj near
shortly
plur.
G ^
and
relative
u^S skiff v-Jj&* close
s O .
to LuJij about.
Go
ape.
Go G j > Go
pyi plur. (j&jjS (= ^Jw-c-) piastre.
and
loan.
i (a) to knock (at a door).
vnl to marry _
century _ .^J 8pouse
s ,
plur. (^J village.
':> rate (of payment).
o Jo
^Jllt Constantinople.
to divide, share -
G . o
plur. ^L^oi part
division.
Vocabulary.
421
III. to endure.
(u) to narrate to (with
O a
narrative, story -
scissors.
ad (a) to cut, cut through
intend J^ciS and
purpose, aim.
y -
SA IT. to neglect
6 o,
shortness ->e& plur.
castle.
J X. to investigate.
-
oS VII. to rush.
> (a) to crunch, nibble.
^
(i) to decide, be judge,
spend, complete VII. to
pass away VIII. to desire,
seek 9lxsi decision, accom-
plishment, settlement, Kada
ft _
(Turkish district) &*
affair
S cat (coll.).
judge.
S IV. to make to drop -
w O 0-0 ) O 3 O E
the land of
b jLxs to waylay - II.
to cut to pieces VII. to
9* o
be cut off X*Li3 piece -
6 . 6
xbJ flock, herd - toB
S (i) to aim at, make for, cutting.
the rnuqattam hill (near
Cairo).
Joti (u) to sit down a
> - ^
plur. ^Xtl^s rule.
yti bottom (of the sea etc.).
60. O .
Jii plur. ilaS desert.
r
(i) to shut XXslS caravan.
Us VIII. to follow U* back
of head, neck.
JJ> (i) to be less than (with
o . -s. 9*
c) UXi rarely xl5
smallness J-Ji small, few
- . r * S >
- U bLdi seldom JjU
poor.
-, O e^
s VII. to revolve - -
plur. v-JjJ^ heart ^_ct^
cordial.
Egypt,
II. to imitate.
0,0,
iotlS fortress, citadel.
422
Vocabulary.
/JfJLi (a) to be disturbed IV. jllLo speech XJULo article
to disturb /oJli unrest.
in a journal etc.).
ls
plur. jJUiy reed, pen.
| zone.
summit.
u) to rise, occupy one-
self with (with
against (with
-J), revolt
o ^
La *3
let us rise! III. to oppose
IV. to put up, establish,
stay X. to be straight -
.*s moon.
o >*
Ij3 people ^L^ resur-
rection JU-o value, price'
x*jb* list, catalogue -
O - O ) *3
\JLA rank *Ubo and &^>l$j
sojourn jUujli' Kaimakani
(Turkish official) "xyoU+jls
district (governed by a Raima-
is (a) to be content with (with k am) **U&*. j straightness,
O ^ o )
uprightness - -wJLCw^s straight.
a dictionary.
-, O -
LJ) plur. x-wX^JJl cloth
C- s -
M^Uji dealer in cloth.
J shirt.
A* 5 P lur - o
i5 lamp.
Jr o conquering
O .
Cairo j^ conqueror.
-,- O - -
ftj* to withdraw,
coffee.
O ^oc
plur. olkil provisions.
-os bjJs power, strength
strong.
O^o
^Lxftxi measuring instrument.
^ as (with genit.) U-^ as
(with following sentence)
>i) guidance.
j& (3y> u) to say III. to
6 o-
get for oneself u^i and
^ as though, as if
and \j^3> and ^LX^ thus.
sad.
cup.
glass (for drinking).
Vocabulary.
423
III. and V. to endure
G . oS G t t
plur. oLx^l and ^j^
liver, heart, interior.
.
S (u) to be or become large
or great X. to esteem
Go
great or important ^
G , G .
pride -*^ plur.jL*^ great.
S (u) to fall on the face.
writing iwJuu plur.
' G .o.
book, letter ^J^A office
iCyjCo library, bookshop
G jo.
letter.
& (u) to be or become numer-
ous
abundance
Ijjy^ very Jixx rich.
II. to vex jJ^ trouble.
Oj^
Go.
G .
^ (i) to lie.
grief.
3.5 cardinal.
, 3 IV. to honour (with J*)
V. to do one a kindness -
Go. G .
3 vineyard p 3 generous.
3 (a) to hate.
slumber.
(i) to break ~ beast
o f prey.
- .. G > ^
idleness OjMtS very
idle.
(u) to write III. to
write to, correspond with
G^ -
VIII. to subscribe xaUf -
(i) to oncover, examine
O o ^
-fl^/ uncovering.
collection, all.
J in. to reward ja a like,
up to.
Jtf III. to fight hand to hend.
G.
(i) to satisfy ^^
satisfaction.
j^ every, all, whole
whenever.
9 , o -
plur. LJ^ dog.
L^ II. to speak to III. to
converse with V. to speak
G
p'^S speech, controversy
xjll word.
S both.
throne.
n. pr. Clot Bey.
424
Vocabulary.
*S how much? how many?
6-. - -
bill of exchange.
6 5 ..
quantity, amount.
reddish brown.
n ' P r '
perfection, n. pr. -
perfect.
(i) to sweep.
hut
a) almost to do.
'
u ) to be ~~ vn '
e .^ j ,*
O plur.
in his place.
cognac.
wallet, purse -
pretty.
6 -H
^ i) to measure -
meaeure -
particle of emphasis
perhaps ~
even if.
&"*> for ' to V ( con " so
that, in order to ! j>J or
therefore ^J, U
^ o *
and 13 U why? ^3 so that
5
...^ because.
not, no, there is not.
c n. pr. Lavigerie.
pea rl (coll.).
IIL to suit ' be adapted t0 '
to put n (
'GO e ^
vn. , w^J , vwLJ clothes,
u
trousers (j*** and
clothes, clothing.
*. G .
place plur.
milk.
Lebanon.
- to answer in the
affirmative.
(a) tQ persevere in _
- -;
plur. cfU depth (of the sea).
Vm. to tate flig h,
IV " to PP rees ( with
(a) to lick.
III. to remark
.
glance iu
moment.
Vocabulary.
425
(a) to follow, concern -
plur.
tenance.
6 t >
plur. p^& meat
a piece of meat.
^ cursed.
appur- :?:? , . t x ,
AJU (yu) language.
fold lH included.
Vin. to turn to.
plur.
beard.
melod.
G o
at.
IV. to make (sensuously)
pleasant 3u pleasure -
c\JuXJ pleasant.
J (a) to be necessary *;^
bit, piece.
(a) I. and HI. to meet
IV. to throw V. to receive
VI. and VIII. to meet
X. to fall on the back
meeting.
* \
0XJ and 0X5 and
^ but.
and
necessary
need.
o . o
|LJ plur.
plur J -iJ {** ( with im P erf - in sense of
' perf.) not.
O
tongue, Ian-
guage.
S . 6
plur.
robber.
III. to treat in a friendly
Go 3
way \_ ftLiJ friendliness -
friendly, pleasant.
(i) to slap.
(a) I. and VI. play III.
to jest with v**^ P^ ur -
play.
when, since.
i to collect IV. to haunt,
infest (with V-J).
VIII. to beseech (with
cr)-
I (a) to flash IV. to cause
'to shine, deal with.
flame.
V. to sigh,
if (of a pure supposition)
J even if.
426
Vocabulary.
j u) to blame.
9 ^o
plur. Q^5 colour,
would that!
o -
not to be.
i-J i) to be fitting; worthy.
-J plur. jLJ night (coll.).
s
house of correction.
l^j) mejidi (money
worth 22 piastres and 30 paras).
gratis, free of charge.
^ (u) to blot out, efface.
^o (u) to stretch, lengthen
IV. to help, reinforce V.
to stretch oneself, rest VIII.
to be stretched, prolonged
Ga >
respite, space of time
3^%*^
lemonade.
Go . '
o^ to
-S) II. to soften.
_J^> praise.
O
U and i
that.
3Lo what? -- U what,
&UsX*o plur.
i
L>wa since.
Lo not.
G
jA (u) tO p
XJU (or
xilo) hundred.
nmlr hitl
plur. Ol_^o material
extended.
city.
when ?
V. to appear (before a
court) VIII. to obey
G^-
resemblance , fable
G ^oS
plur. oboo! like, as
G / G . o
pattern ulSUJ' statue.
(u) to be renowned II.
to praise Jv^* glory
G . S
noble
make bitter j^y> passing
by, course Bj* time
a.^ once -* bitter.
, Gc- o GSo ^
man si^t or si^o plur.
woman.
_y plur. 3j^ meadow.
n. pr. Mercier.
(a) to be or become sick
(j&jA plur. (j>>ii-*l sickness
G
sick. ,.,,
Vocabulary.
427
-* Morocco,
to murmur.
_. ..._ (a) to enter (in a catalogue
-OS
etc.) t^Mtalt the inessiah,
c v
Christ ~=>S"*wo a Christian,
Christian (adj.).
(i) to seize IV. to hold
9 o -
back \^M^A seizure
poor.
* with, in spite of - o \ g
altliough.
1V to be zea lons.
(u) to tarry, stay.
IV. to enable, be possible
V. to be enabled to (with
9 o >
possible.
machine
(a) to fill.
^UU salted ^-"
II. to wish good evening , G
sailor
IV-i to be or remain in
the evening sLLo evening,
monsieur.
navigation.
(i) to possess II. to
(i) to go, walk - V. to
5-o
walk about X-yiwo gait
o. , --
JLuwU plur. (ji'_^ cattle.
give possession of
ail( i ^.jJjLa plur. ^^1 posses-
o ^
sion, property vi)Xe plur.
J O
-*^ a -Egypt, Cairo
Egyptian, Cairene.
*ZA (i) to go away, be lost
2 ,
course (of time)
past, last.
(u) I. and IV. to rain
plur. ,LLi*i rain.
king
6-
angel --
P lar -
and
mler _ & kingdom
5
_
slave.
>o-
milli n -
who? he who.
mam i u ke, white
428 Vocabulary.
of, from, than. Ow (Oj*) plur. 0\j*) wealth,
S- 5 * - capital LJUx (or i**) a
Q^ favour Q_^ death
GS jo. kind of poetry,
obligation, thanks. . G .
9 Lo (*-*) plur. Ly* water.
since. HJoU (J^yo) table.
(a) to prevent VIII. to ^U (J^ i) to incline, bend -
O o. O
refuse. , . .. ,
J-cXJ inclination Juwo plur.
tux> Memphis. j^ mile>
5_^0o Manuf (a city in Egypt). f-r _
(with accus. of person and
V. to wish Kxx/> fate,
" f \~ "'
death. \^j of thing) Uj news.
O , o j
blood. G -
^xxj barking.
(_/
V. to be slow. fei p]ur J^ artide (in a
journal etc.).
profession, trade.
u) to die - IV. to water )'
o (a, i, u) to spring up (of
;er).
- xo VIII., to pay attention,
kill O_yj and *^y* and 6
6 , '- S " notice X^Lo wakefulness
oU^o death c^^> dead.
^XAJ awake, clever,
plur. ^U-*! wave.
w ** *<
o joe J^ joiner,
the Muski (a street in
j^ 1 IV. to complete.
Cair )- so. -*
-* J^ 1 plur. oLF) offspring, son.
(colloquially y^y 5 ) plur.
" razor- ** Moses. ^ P lur ' (^ etar T
mode, fashion.
astrologer >ij clear.
Vocabulary.
429
Lip (u) to escape sLp escape, itf>jj pleasure.
deliverance. o
o - --o. ix>,wJ relation.
wc^ death ^^ ^j^ 3 * ne
died.
9 rf , o s-
(i*Li copper (j*^* copper-
smith
9 o.
J^r? bees (coll.).
J-
we.
n
^-o*o plur. A->U*oi and -o'wwj
textile fabric, tissue.
O -
copy.
^ O,o
9 LwJ (plur. of s L*|) women.
plur. ,Jj-J district
k^P* towards, about.
d? VIII. to choose.
n. pr.
(u) to bewail.
J^s^Lxi pockethandkerchief.
o-
.XJ (a) to repent - - &-
9 -
repentance *-J<-XJ confidant.
SJ III. to call, summon.
X3 vow.
3 plur. jf AJt vile, simpleton
6 . -
JjvXi abject.
o ^
j narcissus-like.
to
cause to forget.
f r -.
UL) IV. to found
origin.
(u) to announce - - IV.
to quote, recite.
io Vni. to spread.
e
r^
liveliness, zeal -
u) to take
order, badge of an order.
lot, happiness,
(a) to advise well
9
**aJ plur. ^JLaJ good
jj (i) to descend, dismount
o .>, o .
vn. OijJ JjjJ guest S I -T
^ ^
dwelling.
6 , '
advice - - u adviser.
., ,
4^ P L
Nazarene = Christian.
430
Vocabulary.
III. to divide -into halves
VIII. to be divided into
o o G . . o >
halves - ouxi half -
middle.
fore-lock.
G.O G.
being isjo plur. f*J benefit
o~ o .
,*AJ yes /**&u tender.
__
laJ blower.
.-
j (a) to be out of print.
Go.
-< leather mat
<AaJ II. to fulfil (a wish etc.).
6 33
' X. to hear a case (of a j^ fli S ht -
s ' 6 >0 G
and
judge) /JfJa-UO*wo examining
G . . o
judge XJiLix* zone.
aj (u) to see VIII. to expect
Jai and JxS glance, look
^,| iJoJ in regard to
G . G.o.
j&li inspector - - jo** ap-
j plur. (j^J5 and (j*_}S~i
-
soul, self (j^f^ precious.
aj VIII. to use 5^d useful
expulsion.
cash> ready
pearance.
f
KiLIaJ cleanness, purity
G
v^axxij clean, pure.
L) II. to put in order V.
and VIII. to be put in order
ftj plur.
money.
j IV. to deliver
JO.
sculpture.
.
*L3u order, law.
G.o. G.
x=^o plur. Lxj sheep.
^J IV. to be kind to (with
jii to be good -
G.. ' G.o.
*j cattle (coll.) X-*j well-
lowest tender.
G o- G .o
plur. (_SoLftj| ruins.
j point.
..ir
J6lj penetrating, deaaly (poison)
G.O-OJ
JJAA^*-* marsh.
transport.
^ VIII. to take revenge on
( with
Vocabulary.
431
VIII. to choose.
O^ o t
XJOu -witticism.
unhappy.
J IV. to deny.
o. G
j plur. (j*_>-i ichneumon.
& ,0.
r Austria (^Lw Austrian.
5 plundering.
J plur. ^J!
o ,,
-lp day.
and
river
i (a) to rise X. to
stir up to.
3 IV. to weaken,
i VIII. to be finished.
S
XJ sailor.
V'
~-LL/ climate.
O > 6 -o O ^
plur. !_^Jl light ij plur.
Lofire.
G .
O
G o.
G rf o
plur. fU-it kind, sort.
r lj (iju a) to sleep -
P sleep"!
AJ) yoke.
Nile,
behold! !A*> thus.
J. O
->"
n. pr.
blowing (of wind),
the flight of Mohammed
from Mecca to Medina (622
A.D.).
plur. ^-^-i^P unrest,
*
disturbance.
III. to assail, assault.
II. to threaten,
murmur (of water).
(i) to destroy vn.
o , ,
(plur.) clothes.
(i) to guide - - IV. to
bestow, present
guidance, way of salvation.
fern.
plur.
this.
J a) to attain III. to
hancf over to (with two accus.) o
V. to take for oneself -
-
j attainment.
Go.
(u) to flee.
G . os
plur. pL$>f pyramid.
> pa rt of the night,
thinness.
432
Vocabulary.
(i) to send rain.
particle of interrogation.
> X. to appear first (new
moon), begin.
engineer.
IV. to destroy utterly
- -
<&lP destruction.
_. , ^ s * * -
j*Ip and lj> ^JlP come hither !
Ui they two.
^ they (masc.).
^
^ (i) to be important, intend
(with LJ), be anxious about
j
(with ij) Vm. to take
S - s > >
great pains p> plur. +}+>
care - xi> care - 1^ plur.
important
anxious.
(a) to be pleasant (of food
etc.) II. congratulate
, ,
! >^jyv^ good wish!
$> here ^ and tiULL
."i' :^
there - * a little.
.p ne .
III. to moderate
(price).
see
> (^^ u ) to be or become
eas y ~ IV - to offend, affront.
passon _j air,
weather.
? 8he '
IL to prepare.
r^ a ) ^ fear.
J& (^> i) to stir up.
^ ^ to be Passionately
p up! - Lu Lp up, let
us go!
and, by (with genit. in oath)
but.
oh!
misfortune, evil conse-
^> n . pr. of a woman.
peg>
Vocabulary. 433
Go- 9 >
-->* O J Go- 9 >
(j& ((JF^ to trust vn . ^^3. j^ plur. <J*jS>} wild beast.
- **A certificate. ~ (a) to loye _ * friend8hip>
necessary, ^ ( ^x,) to lay down> leave
(only in imperf. and imper.)
incumbent on (with J*) _ IL to bid f arewe ll to (with
IV. to cause X. to deserve accus.) IV. to store
- o _
L.jL>7.| affirmation cio departure.
o
incumbent on (with .{'
ou valley.
- > i
n accor-
*K. behind,
dance with.
- - ' ' e > 3 4, (O _j) (properly = to go down
P.) to find ^^-r**,
s - to water) to arrive IV.
existence *->U*r.| finding o
* o rf to bring oi Jt _>1 revenues
existent, on hand.
w O -
L? 1 ^!? rosy.
ix^* small.
- - -os ^ paper.
^?* plur. p^>>' pain.
o.o - j.. plur. ^t,:* vezir, minister,
cheek.
c ; II. to share, allot.
II. to turn to V. to
make for VIII. to turn - \- .?*..-
>5 plur. B^J face, fashion
o.
side, district
^c* III. to be parallel.
^^w* dirty.
C- . 5
o*.j respected.
alone (with suffixes) o , - 6 -
c JJUM^ middle xLx^L means
one -- v>-^>3 alone,
eingle. - n^ fern, ^c**'* middle.
Arabic Grammar. 28
434
Vocabulary.
"^3 wide, roomy
width, comfort.
^ V. to get the means for
(with 1|) - XL*,, means.
to whisper, suggest
suggester (satan).
^ (-sJuoj) to describe -
attribute.
to arrive , ^
I have received II. to bring
- III. to enter into relation
with IV. to make to arrive,
lead V. to reach -- VIII.
to unite, reach (with i|) -
arrival, reception, re-
O o ,
ceipt J-oj receipt
union.
-/o,, II. to make a will, recom-
mend IV. to charge
-
charge (of parents to
children etc.) will.
V. to wash oneself (in
religious ablutions).
01 -
? IV. to explain f****>
obvious, clear.
bring into the world, edit
60- 6 .,
vn. ^xoj ^?y> place.
to tread on.
indigenous
land.
5 (Ootj) I. to promise (with
accus. of person, L-J of thing)
IV. to threaten, promise
6 .
appointed time.
and j^ ruggedness.
^ r^
III. to be exhorted.
iQ
.sUj abundant.
" II. to help (of God) III.
to be suitable, correspond to,
agree to (with J^c) VIII.
to agree, happen --
success (from God).
II. to fulfil (with
V. (pass.) to die 9l3j fulfil-
ment (of a promise), payment
&-* G -"
(of a debt) aljj plur. oLs^.
jto. (^sj) to set, place, lay, death j perfect, complete,
Vocabulary.
i (v^j) to be eclipsed (of
the moon).
Jj plur. o'S time
at that time.
(jib) to fall, happen -
IV. to let fall - ,wl. situ-
ated is*3J_5 plur. ,jl9
event, battle 0^>i XaSt^
6
state of affairs ?^\
name of a dog.
ftflj) to stand still, ac-
quaint one with (with ^s-)
IV. to refrain from (with
O ^ *5 t )
^ySi) >-^5 experience of
(with ji) OLJ5 plur.
pious foundation or
benefaction.
^ - -
5 VIII. to fear (j:_*& piety.
^ v .) to support oneself -
^s..
cushion.
/3 II. to represent V. and
VIII. to trust, rely on -
6 -, '- ' *
xlfa^ representation ^^3
representative.
j , ,
J* (JJb) to bear, beget J^-
O ,
435
o ,
plur. OJI boy, son -
parent, father S jJ !. mother
o- - ,'
birth - JsJyi birthday
plur.
, Christinas
n. pr.
* - o.,
0^j to howl.
^3 (/j^j) to be near II. to
make governor, flee X. to
master (with ,J*c of a thing)
x/^V province of a wali
(governor) - jl wali, governor
S . " ; o~
- i+ master j.^* master
- oc
- 0-5! better, more suitable.
*oJ| ^v mentioned.
to present
wahhabite.
O o . O - oc
*Pj plur. j.LPi imagination,
prejudice^.
) (J J O
,j*u vice-consul.
. alas!
! o o! (particle of address).
^ - > * c,~ o ,
JJ^AJ '^w.uu) to despair u*'rf
despair.
436
Vocabulary.
Jaffa.
.o dry (land etc.).
Jo plur. Jot hand, help - 6
o ^ ^ - o ^' <*
ru before him, in his
presence.
j II. to make easy - - V. to o o .
be made easy, possible - fJ^ P lur
right hand.
; January,
ripe.
j Joseph.
ss
-0*0 easy, small.
day of judgement
to-day \*j-f?
day to day
Jacob.
IV. to waken V. to be
o .. - -
awakened X. to wake up. jjJ ol3 one day.
Jb (a) to be certain V. to
convince oneseli.
from
once
June.
Vocabulary.
437
English-Arabic Vocabulary for the Exercises in Part II,
Able to be able to jJo
with Ji
about 3
accompany (Jf; III.
acquaint -- to be acquainted
with ^i (a)
.. o ^
after Jou
-0.
age O
alight jij
S, e
all J*,
allow to be allowed jL
o^ ,
alms io-Xo
O * o j
amazed L/ i^^A/' (with v.;)
o -
ambassador ^a^ plur.
amen t
angel
answer
Arab ^j* ( coll -) Arabic
. - - > -
arrive Jua 3 (Jua-i) ^ (^
aek 3L1 (a)
astonish to be astonished
V^ V.
o
atmosphere _^>
attached to be attached
(jit II. (pass.)
6-
Back ^
fi
balance **
bath
be Q (u)
befall
^ -c
before **ef
-. -
begin uXi>i (u)
G
beggar J^~*
> j t> ..
Beirut
plur. iOo
to answer beseech
best
438
Vocabulary.
better ^^o>f
call IcO
between Q^O
calm o'lJ 5
bind JyJs
8^oj
t> ,
canal Xcyj
bitter -^
0. o
j
cannon 5JJs^
y -* o
black O^v-5
'
O o ^
bold ts^'
captain Q^UJJ
^ > ,
6
book LjLcT plur. * *^
captive ^^\
O^ o^
*
book-shop xJCX*
carry J*4^> (i)
^ - o
o ^ ^ o i
borrow jlxXAvj
cause *_^-*w plur. LJu*^
boy j^lc plur. ^Ulc. , g-^o
cease ulj (u, a)
O ^o
plur. ,..tx>jo
certain a certain (j
*
O ^ o
Go ,
chain Kl^J.-w
bread i>.3>
^
.- -
O.o,
bring Jwo
chamber &3j
. - oS
O o j
bring back *^>-j\
chance Ki->^o
^ o
O ^ o S
bringing SlJs^j
character ,*)^- ; = > ^
O . ^ o
broom K.>-MA.^
cheerful ^;>j-s
-
Cf ^'
brother -^.1
chief <j^j
G
* * o
buy ( c -xXv J
circumstance *& plur.
i O
o ,
Cairo JA^O
city K-AjJ^o
Q
o
calamity iLxxxax plur. ^OLAOX
clear (J^[;
o
caliph iCaJl3*
clever -bLfii
Vocabulary.
439
clothe ^~3 (u)
come *u>
a ..
comfort {J*
* -~e
command yl
O
commander j**
9 >o
compelled p^'
o ..
concerning ^
r,
condition <3l=>
* oS
content 5-0 i
o
continuance *l
continue <$\\
corsair (adj.) J. 1 '-*^
country -bj,
court
crowd
' , '
custom SO'LC, plur.
cut *~oi (a)
O ^ O -
Danger ^> plur. j*
dawn ^
o
Go.
day j-J
o ^
dear jt
death
deceive
Oo
deed
defend - to defend oneself
o* o - - - -
XttJiJ -^- oto
*. **
deliver uXJbt
deliverance
demand vJj (u)
describe
desert L^ 3
despair ^-^J despairing
destruction ^^
determine *ic
die olo (ti)
O ,o>
different ^aii^
O - o
diligence oLix>j
o -
disappointed ^J*>
-
^ , c. o
disturb Jocii - disturbing ^NCJ
^-' ^
do
dog
door
(a)
o -
440
Vocabulary.
doubt
eternity 'i
Oo ,
dream /*X>
every Ji
g
drink L- >-J&
evil jii
"
G
* * o
drive out j3>i
exalted , U
during ,3
examine 5
- ~ * * i
dwell ^r^ (u), vn. ^*^>
excellency
dynasty aJ$0
excellent ^
>
<
Each j*
except i^j
C
earth o-^j ^
excess J>o
o ^
east ,'^r^
easy to make easy
3 O
Egypt J^A Egyptian
- . s
encircle -bL>-| 4 v_-
encroachment
S, ,
enemy ^Js^i plur. 9
energy
enmity ,..!^*>^
entangle to be entangled
escape ji vn. jtj there is
no escape Jo ^
^ ^ .
especially
with
existing things
expend i3<3o - expenses &&
experience J^Li:
Ezbekiya X-J^j^i
Face x>
fair _
6
faith o l
faithful ,.
farewell to say farewell to
father oJ!>
^ ^ ^
Fatima x*~bL
Vocabulary.
festivity
fifteen see Less. 32
filled with
fight xa
find
finish , &J[ with c
fire
first see Less. 33
five see Less. 32
follow
friend
friendship
from ^
fulfil
Garden Q
O o^
garment ^j^
give
go slJ>3 (a), J~ (i) go out
^5> go away
>~f
God &\
*>Q-
good -
governor -*J -> plur. j
6
grade X
grain
great
o ^ .
greeting ^^L*
O Of
grieve ^~ grievous ^~
guard $-3
guest to be a guest of >*!
> J~
gun J*;^
O o
Half
ball x
o ^ *
hand Jo plur. Jot - hand
over
happen
happiness ol
O rf ^ O , o c
harm j/s plnr.jlytol
hatred A
442
Vocabulary.
health '
hear
(a)
ink
inner
Q o - 6 3
heart u^JLi plur. ^_jJ^
high (3lfr
hither L;
intelligent JJilc
intend
intercessor
plur.
honour *f\ honourable /w^
Jacob
G ^f. e .^
hope Jwo| plur. JU! Joseph
o ^ ..
journey
joyjsj*
horse J^>- (coll.) ^j^j
hour ^'
Go.
house
Important most important
Key _bJix *
kill
king
6 .
increase Oij (i)
s
incumbent ^-
improve
kiss
knock z- yi
indebted I shall be indebted know ^ J-c (i)
to thee j*e ^iU ...a o r rf
indisposition
inducement
Land -^
inform
inhabitant plur.
language *Jt
o .
large -yJ^
G ~-
last >t
by land
Vocabulary.
443
lasting +tfJ
matter ^Li
, ^
meet ^
latter days ^>^
cr x
-
learn /*i*J learned ^Jle plur.
memory t - -^ ^
^ ^ >
O i -
^UtJLc
mighty J'L>^
i -5
Oo
least JJit
mind -^5
^
leave s-Jj*ojJ
-
S C, '
minister j^
legally Lfryfc
o ^ > *
- -E
lend jlfct
misfortune iN-t-y^ 3 plur.
letter XjJvX*
^ ^ 5 c
money ^ij^oi (plur.)
life -*. manner of life S-A^
; -
* ^
morally x/O
^ -/~-' y
*"
light '{^"
O
-^ ^ - -
morning r ^-^
light upon jit with J^c.
o
o >
05- J
Moslem U.-^
little X-iyi
-
G
O o -
lord u^j
mosque sX^^^>
S j 6 a * *
_ _
love v-^- - i^
j J -OC
mouth plur. ^i
o ^ - t
Make Jot>
must you must ^ dO
make for JN-^ai
Mu'tasim **aX1 1
Mamiuke ^jJU^ plur. tjikxiU-fl
Oo
"
Name * |
o * ,
o ,
man i^ 1 -:*^;
nay rather J^
many -^
necessary it is ne<
+
~ >
O j
^ ^ *
market . V 5-*^
Jo
444
Vocabulary.
(coll.)
6
6 ..
need X
needle
i
noble ,
northwards
November ,U
-JO,
Offer o*>* (i)
6 j ..
official
once at once
one Jv^u, fern.
6 o..
another \jax*
open jr^s
order ,.jLvX-o
other r3>5 fern.
Pain fJ!
paleness . 5 yfi
park ixfij
part of
party ^^J
pass by ;
pasturage
one
patience j-yo patient j_j-*
pay SO (a)
people
perfection
perhaps ..
permit xcw (a)
perpetuate JsJ-i>
person jjnaS^
6 j -o^ 6,
philosopher ^?j.^.Lo pi. Ka
piece
pious
pleasant to be pleasant
please s^i (a) pleasure ^^
pledge o*lxs plur.
O.o
pool A^j?
S a -
porter
possessing jU
6
possessor u^s^Uo
possible to be possible ^
pour down JJo^ .(i)
Vocabulary.
445
power '&^ - powerful j-pJ reason, for this reason t^
praise ,->>- - praise (subst.
prayer S^Lo
preacher 2a&\*
o
precious jJje-
-* - by reason of ^~-~^
v *"* *
prepare ^Xti (intr.)
-of
preserve ^t
pride ^-^
o c
prince j*#\ princess
OS
prisoner -^ plur. i!^
prophet e+i plur. il^H
protect J
punish t
purpose
o
Kaging -\
rail ^
rain
raise
rank
plur.
oc
plur.
rebellion ,.
receive
received UXo
recovery iy
refresh to be refreshed
f
refuge to take refuge *^^ti
reject
rejoice -
rely
remember
c- 5
request utj
(u)
requite ^j 1 ^?" w ^^ 2.
S- -
residence yi^
resist jjls
! et ^ n ^ (u) ^i>j ^ %^Ufii
ride ^ f
rise (.is (u)
S **
robber J.J plur.
O-o>
room r^*
446
Vocabulary.
root out
ruler
Go
Saddle
safe
sailor
same ^^&j with genit.
say jl$ (u)
60 G..
scholar iXh+Lj plur. B
G ^ ^ o ^
school X-wv,vX/o plur.
science ,*-Lc plur.
Go-
sea -^
^>
O ^ C-O
sea-sickness -2*0 f
season
secretly \y
security &QLw
see ^5^, (a)
seek v^/J-b
,_ - , s
seem ...> (a)
. * oS
send J^5 send back
G^ o ^
sentence X-L*J>
separate Jsjoi
servant
sew
G o .,
sheikh ^-v^
shepherd p5j plur.
g
ship v
show
side v
sigh o l sighing
I OJ>
snce
sit down
skin ^xX^v (a)
C^
slay JJ3
G o ^ G
slave Jy.c plur. Jy^^t
smite ^jte
G - o ^ 3
soldier JCv^c plur. -^
Go . ,.
son plur.
soon
Go
G o ^
soul
(u) sound o
f 3 *
southwards L$-i:
speak
Vocabulary.
447
o --
speech ^S
r, 0-
spirit (j^aj
standard *Xc plur. *
G - ^
feteed
stick Lac
V*
still Q^Lv
stone j^" plur.
r,
strange >-<o
strike
strong
stubbornness s^UwJS
O o^
success
Sultan ,.
sweep
s S
Syria *LJi Syrian
Tailor -bLc>
bake
:ell OS (u) with ^
en see Less. 32.
e
ban Q^
that (conj.) ^
;hirik ,-jb
this iAP fein.
thought ^y plur. ^.
threaten
throw ^f*j (i)
thrust ^-Jj
thwart Joli
time
to-day j_*^-5
together **A*^
tomb (MrJJvxi plur. ^
to-morrow \^-
torn to be torn JO
track -Si
transitoriness ^LiJ
travel jsL traveller j>\
r. _ _,
tree ^^
e r o . G - - * - om
trouble xbjj -j^S plur.jlJO i
G
true j_5
truly ,.|
trust (Jp>^
V* c
trusty ijy!
turn away O^o
two see Less. o'-'.
Unite
448
Vocabulary.
o
O - o
Vain jLs
wheat XliO>
6 ^ o ^
a- '
vegetables oly^r>
when L*J
w
^ o c-
verily Q |
whence ^jt Q-
s
^ > o ^
very ijty^
wherever ^vP"
e'o-
j> ,o ^ o .
village ioyi
white (jaAji fern. ^l-*^o
o^
> o ^ ^ oc ^
visiting H^lfj
whither ^i>yjS> ^X| ^w? I
S - *> - Q
^ ^ - o
Walk to take a walk iXJf
wine vXkxJ - wine-skin ^
^
O ^
war to make war on LJ,l>
plur. LJiyJ
e.
winter VwXii
warning **
. '
o' *
wish oLi
watchful (jj^-
^
w ^
with <J^^ | _J
water-carrier SwJu
'
. ;> j
withstand ^i
way (JHj-k P^ ur - '^j^ 3 i n the
e-o-o
o
woman sl^f
way of . . Q-
R ^ '
sj. * e,
world *J^- LxJO
weapon .^Iw plur. X^\JL*5
' e o. "e. /
weather 9tj>
* *^
writing ^-^
weep Jo (i)
Year sJ*
^ ^ ^
6 * o j
weigh ^j^
yearning vLcAxs
Bo*
^-
well jx3>
yes ^
well-being K.xX^
yesterday u^^i
west LJJW
. v
yet ^S
" S > 6 . c
what uo
youth LJUvi ..>..lc (plur.).
Index I. 449
I, Arabic Index
(arranged alphabetically without regard to roots).
The numbers refer to the pages.
9 ,o o
I 27. 55. 305. r'4AL~! 54. 305.
* 44 f. 47. 49. 242. 245.
Oo ' ' -
f 11. 38. 47. 242. 257. 277. . . o- /.
^ sjU^t ^| 53 ff.
g! 185.
-^.CMO J O
<=^J^i *-r 241.
Ul 38. 44. 49. 242. 245.
|0 oi
<vi>^>i 38. 242.
'**. -
;<X>I 198. (j~^\ * | 249.
t 88. 242. H 242f -
^'ucof 122. ,0.0 , o
J^LaJi ^] 88. 233. 238.
315. 323.
3+*i! *^-f 90.
J 291. 315. 322. 323.
| (AAD 306. $ O 1 ^ H 240r
i^v, 315. x 244 ff. 257. 270. 271.
i^a^| 99. i^o *^| 57 ff. 246 ff.
X^j 95. 119f. U\ *-^| 249.
Arabic Grammar.
450
Index I.
227.
233.
249.
202 ff.
197.
& ; uto] 41. 44 ff. 281.
274 ff.
* M 95. 112 ff.
99.
ii 96. 118.
M 95. 102 ff.
57 ff. 246. 247. 257. 274.
**3&$ Jotit 58. 257.
. 116 ff.
M 99.
i] 193.
ts 96.
96.
96.
5 1 96.
o
Ol 23.
9. 78.
315. 324.
XxJ? 310.
202 ff.
6
2f.
7. 253.
6
aJ! 7. 253.
6 , JO- 6
su! 254.
) O O
JotaJl 62 ff.
j o o
^ 62. 71 ff.
89.
- jo
m 205.
o-o
89.
o - >- J o
*Jj Le^lf'205.
i] 63. 293.
Index I.
451
r ! 305.
jlT 46. 271.
UI 316.
Lf 316.
^ -c
f
299.
So
wo! 62. 84 ff.
Q t 78. 91. 316.
J,| 315. 323.
^ 90. 280. 316.
^1 90. 279. 280. 306 f.
It 307.
s
all 99.
"ill 95. lllf.
78. 317.
^\ 307.
^.il 307. 324.
^.oc
Ju! 324.
55. 203. 324.
203. 324.
86. 279. 327 f.
iL, 291.
ill 291.
oL 197.
ur4 194.
e-o^
y^. 332.
3 Jo 283 f.
w-o * ~ *C"0 y * *
J^J! 0, AJC! jJo 283
60-
338.
216.
216. 282. 288.
jb 197.
307 -
452 Index I.
^ 9
n
aj 99.
QJO 299 f. JJjtaj 193.
U-o 317. xixij 131. 171.
Mu 317.
AJ 99.
o 291.
o. - , sLStt 300.
KLjJb 9li* 3.
9 o.
o ,0. 1 ;W 237. 280.
3.
li 310. ' 7 -
j) 283. ^/y 283.
S.
j' 283. ^ 307.
II 317.
u 283.
oo. ^ 188.
iixiij 29. >o-* g
30 - S!Ji 321.
9.0-
j^o. 6. 8.
Go.
29. 256.
s 95. 108 f.
JLw -^4^ 30. 256.
KU>- 64. 90.
j 95. 107 f.
6 5 . 6. o .>
314 '
Index I.
453
;<JUs XJU> 64. 91.
282.
321.
o .,
j'o 280. 293.
Jti 78. 293. 317.
! A> 300.
Ji 1. 290 ff.
O Oo -f 3 ti -
315.
305.
^j ^f 282. 290 ff.
I?llJi S.^ 322 f.
.t vTtl V^ 327 ff.
313.
is f.
6.
5.
m *> f >
5.
3.
5.
3.
5J > 5.
45. 49.
300.
309. 324.
QAQ QO/t
310.
65. 90. 279. 280.
-
~> 281 ff.
* 300.
59 -
b 196. 197.
^ 300. 329.
317.
13 53.
5. 23.
3 53.
454 Index I.
53. ^ 321
. 45. 46. 257.
V O
_Jxfc 333.
Oo
& 332.
185 ff. ivJCfc 5.
Vj 288> '.Li 197. 198.
<3 ^ -"'
.> 335 * "'
^ / &L0 57 ff. 204. 246 ff.
41 1 40 ff. 279.
c_ ^v o ^
e -- XJUo 203.
J^, 336.
Ga-
3t; 195.
o
^*^3 49. 287 ff.
/ ^ 73. 305. 323.
187.
^\ Q O ci ^ ^ ^
aj UAM D. o. i .. jri
,Uo& -A4.^> 49.
i 330. S '.V '
^ 49.
j 1 332.
" - LJLb 196.
338.
^329.
.
Jo ^ 337.
73. 305. 323.
282. ^> 279. 299.
Juli 204.
SUv ISC.
G ^
'-i 59. oLc 196.
50. 301.
41. 274.
Index I. 455
* 99.
330. lii 229.
194. jj 247. 257.
313. ,j 229.
U 310.
* 61. 94.
Xlc. 5 - -
d 61. 73. 94.
lU 249 f.
^ 61- 73. 94.
332. , 8-
94. 100 ff.
ji 41. 50. 293 f. jj^ 61> 63 . 6 4
&\ Jots 194.
301.
283. 288.
6 .. So
.o. JU Joti 121.
^282.
.!.? 817. ^ 1^ 121 '
121
78. 313. 323. ^ ^ 279
95. 101 f.
s 279.
63. 64. 86 f. 246. 279.
. S o
^J^c >s 143.
<M b 313.
V->5 O i - > &o
S-t O^ >s 94.
x^-c 5. >
456 Index I.
, ..
i 94 ff. jj 301.
57. 246. 254.^260.
,21 ff. 144. * 5 ' 307 '
pUS 301.
Jots 68. 122. 143. * -
-ba 307.
6 > o . 5 o
Jots 121. 129 ff. Uls 196
G G o -
L/aSlj Jots 143. 167 ff. ^ 292.
0^234. ^ 196 - ? |
& 282. 283.
57. 246. 253. 275. o .
_o. ^ 337.
JJUi 193.
<j- s5^ ^s*
57. 246. 254. 264. O 'o ^
n 68 f. 73 f. 81. 87. 197. 280.
* 243. 322.
6- o
263. 265. 266.
& 282. 283.
j4** 242.
^ 308.
e o,, \\$r
J^otJ 242.
o ^ 282.
6 o,j
J-vLots 242.
US324.
o ^ ^
JrtM 307.
^K 324.
o ^
j
^ 55.
' O ^
^^i 301.
K!/ 250.
o ..
j 41. 296.
^ 78. 317.
" ' .
- o ..
6^
01^ 310. 324.
X-olS 332.
' ^ O ^
'
Uju^ 324.
I
Index I. 457
317 ^J 317. 822. 323. 324.
383. 90. 305 f. 323. ^ 317. 324.
j 41. 50. 76. 82. 237. 291 f. 314. v^~o 280. 310.
Jjj 194. 197. 291.
3 308.
* 81. 308. ^ (negation) 291. 308. 828. *
U (pron.) 55. 203. 317. 324.
310. rf /OS -> -
x*j*jjJl U 317.
Ui ^ 309. . o. -
" o o o. - O^ '" 300 '
. ^L^li Jti *$ 280. 308.
Jo U 196.
,
^ 5 279 -
78. 314. 316. | 64 . 90 . 2 79.
_ ) o "> ^ o >
(^) 78. 314. 316. ^ ^^^^ 283 '
S o.
315. 274 -
(<j:jJ, ^Jjj 296.
280. 310.
250. 5 ,
s i * 49.
335 '
78. 317.
ii 308. 318. 324.
82. 308.
Ux 282.
82. 308. 317.
78. 308. 323. j^ 29. 256.
458 Index I.
g ^o. G .oj
\i>JCs^ 339. ^j** 274 -
^"^ 94. XJlclM 99.
G j o ^ G .. o .
,*= 278. 290. 0-a/> 29. 256.
* 69. 87. 233 ff.
,
234.
13 f. 0-xax 241.
194. ***-
Jotox) 229.
40 - -
Jou^i 240 f.
G o^
299. 318. , JuJw 240 f.
227.
241.
77. 279. ^'
KJLxL 241.
240.
333>
5jjux 90. 233. 246.
c 3 Uw 62. 71 ff. 77. G ,o.
w AJ**A 279.
^3_>o-*-O^^ '**
' &> 77. 80 ff. 6,0 , G ,o.
ax 237. 279.
Q, 55. 204. 324.
o
71 ff. 91. cr 41. 50. 59. 297 ff.
41. jJU 299. 318.
o^G^j G^OJ
xJj u5wy2x 41. ^_-w,Ayo 339.
G * , 6 , o . _
^Lijw 96. ^jj/oX/i 274.
6>o-
^ 297. L-UA^X. 77. 278.
Index I. 459
49 J^ 27. 55. 305. 309.
Jii 329.
324. 9-0-
Hj> 9ff.
yu 332. o .<, >***
^ 301 f.
VU3827. $ 8p9.10ff.
-' f A ff 9V7 971 U^ $UP, dU^P) 309.
x>-v-o 244 ff. ^57. Z<1.
340ff. 279 ff. UP 329.
Lj 332. 3 78. 281. 291. 313 ff.
o
I 308. fk 336.
*^ 194.
,.. ) OlO.
JJj 283. 288. jli"l !C 314.
.jJLil ^ 280. 308. . o -
- ' vX>> 310.
^ 81. 306. ^' 302
111 216.
.. ;, 3tiD.
li 328. iLoj 11.
^ 329. ^ 333>
Jj 317.
i
53.
336.
C 50. 85. 279. 281. 327 f.
460
Index II.
II, English Index,
Abbreviations 16.
Abstracts 249.
Accent 15.
Accusative 279 ff.
Address, Particles of, 50, 85 f.
,Adiectivea*57 ff. 246 ff. 254, 258.
Adverbs 305 ff.
Age 220.
Alphabet If.
Article 23 f.
Cardinal numbers 210 ff.
Catalexis 334 ff.
Class names 249.
Cognate accusative 237 f.
Collectives 27.
Concrete nouns 249.
Conditional sentences 321 ff.
Conjunctions 313 ff.
Dates 220.
Declension 40 ff. 274 ff.
Demonstratives, see Pronouns.
Diminutives 242 f.
Diptotes 274 ff.
Distributive adjectives 228 f.
Dual 29.
Elative 58 f.
Emphasis 283.
Endearment 243.
Exception 315.
Feminine 25 ff. 251 ff.
Foreign words 254, 258 f.
Fractions 228.
Future 73, 305.
Genitive 41 ff.
Imperative 84 f.
Imperfect see Indicative, Sub-
junctive, Jussive.
,Indeclinables 214, 226, 274, 309.
Indicative 71 ff.
Instrument 241.
Intensives 247.
Interjections 327 ff.
Interrogatives 27, 54.
Intransitive verbs 279.
Jussive 77, 80 ff.
Metres 335 ff.
Months 215 ff.
Moods 76 ff.
Negatives 308.
Nominal sentences 64 f.
Nominative 279.
Number 29 ff. 256 ff.
Numerals 210 ff.
Nunation 7 f.
Ordinals 225 ff.
Participles: Active 86 f. 238.
Pass. 90.
Particles 90 ff. 290 ff.
Passive 89 ff.
Pause 333.
Perfect 61 ff.
Permutative 283 ff.
Place and Time, nouns of, 240 f.
Pluperfect 68.
Plural: sound 30 f. broken 33 ff.
259 ff.
Poetry 332 ff.
Predicate 69:
Prepositions 41 ff. 290 ff.
Prohibition 81, 85.
Pronouns: Demonstrative 53 f.
Interrogative 54 f. Personal
31, 287 ff. Suffixed 49 f. 67 f.
Pronunciation 4.
Proper names 249, 250.
Reflexives 288.
Re ative adjectives 244 ff.
Relative sentences 202 ff.
Rhymed prose 332.
Subjunctive 77 ff.
Syllables 14 f.
Unity, nouns of, 27, 253.
Index II.
Verbal noons 87, 233 ff
271. Verbal sentences 64.
Verbt61 ff
Derived forms 94 ff."
Doubled 122 ff.
Doablv > weak ^ ff
Hamzated 129 ff.
Quadriliteral 193 &
Weak 143 ff.
Vowels 5 ff.
Printed by C. F. Winter, Darmstadt.
SESJJJ&tf
a-t- ftsr.
, u-t-
***$4. ^a^JU. /%***)<*** j
4*>*Ate ^m.&^L.
r.
-^* y '- *<r?
ux &^v.
*L
*
4 ^^-
^ ^1^?SS^^jir^
.
,
, ., -
^
**?
^
etc .
. g
( t -
^
-co
